JP2019069326A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which simultaneously performs dynamic displays of a plurality of special symbols, and which can suppress an occurrence of an overflow by arranging equal winnings of game balls to a plurality of start ports.SOLUTION: In a pachinko machine 10, assistance is given by a distribution device 630 so that a winning is alternately made to a first start port 63a and a second start port 63b. In this way, even with a configuration in which dynamic displays are simultaneously performed both in a first special symbol and a second special symbol, an occurrence of an overflow can be suppressed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when game balls enter a plurality of starting openings provided on the game board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and the dynamic display of the special symbol notifying the lottery result is It is executed on the display device. In such a configuration, the success or failure of the game is drawn individually corresponding to each starting opening, and the drawing result corresponds to each starting opening (for example, the first special for the two starting openings) After dynamically displaying the symbol and the second special symbol), the lottery result is notified. In this way, it has been proposed that a plurality of special symbols can be dynamically displayed at the same time.

  For example, in Patent Document 1, when the game ball enters the first starting opening, the dynamic display of the first special symbol starts, and when the game ball enters the second starting opening, the second special symbol moves dynamically. Start the display. Therefore, when the game ball enters the starting opening corresponding to the other special symbol while either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed dynamically, the first special symbol and the second special symbol Both will be in the state of displaying dynamically at the same time. Then, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped in the display mode informing the big hit, it shifts to the big hit game.

  In addition, when the game ball enters the first starting opening during the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the upper limit number of rights to dynamically display the first special symbol after the end of the dynamic display in progress (for example, 4) is stored as a holding ball. Similarly, when the game ball enters the second starting opening during the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the right to dynamically display the second special symbol after the end of the dynamic display in progress is the upper limit number ( For example, up to 4) is stored as a holding ball.

JP, 2005-319221, A

  By the way, in the gaming machine where dynamic display can be simultaneously performed by the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is difficult to make the game ball enter the first start opening and the second start opening equally, and it is difficult It is biased to enter the ball to one starting opening, and in order to store the holding balls in both starting openings up to the upper limit number, an overflow where the game balls above the upper limit number enters at one starting opening tends to occur There was a problem of that. When an overflow occurs, a winning lottery or dynamic indication for the overflowed ball is not made, which is disadvantageous to the player.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of causing a game ball to be equally prized in a plurality of starting openings and suppressing the occurrence of overflow in a gaming machine in which a plurality of special symbols are dynamically displayed simultaneously. .

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 executes the determination of the first lottery game based on the establishment of the first condition, and the second based on the formation of the second condition. The first identification information indicating the success / failure determination means for executing the success / failure determination of the lottery game and the first lottery game determination result by the success / failure determination means is dynamically displayed in the order in which the first success / failure determination condition is satisfied. First display means, and second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating a result of determination of success or failure of the second lottery game by the success or failure determination means, in order of establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition; Display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of first identification information on the first display means and display control of the second identification information on the second display means, and a result of the pass / fail judgment by the pass / fail judgment means , By the display control means It has a bonus game execution means for giving a bonus game which is advantageous to the player when the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit on the first or second display means. Condition distribution means for assisting alternately establishing the first success / failure determination condition and the second success / failure determination condition, and the first or second success / failure determination condition assisted by the condition distribution means And hold storage means for storing as the right to play the first or second lottery game up to a predetermined upper limit number of times.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the game area and the game ball flowing down the game area enter the first judgment condition. The game machine according to the present invention has a starting opening and a second starting opening in which the second hit / not determination condition is satisfied by the game ball flowing down the game area entering, and the condition distributing means includes the first starting opening. And a game ball guiding portion for assisting the game ball to alternately enter the second starting opening.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the condition distributing means includes a ball entry port through which game balls flowing down the game area can enter, and ball entry into the ball entry port. A first guiding path for guiding the game ball to the first starting opening through the gaming ball guiding portion, and a second guiding path for guiding the second playing opening through the game ball guiding portion , And the gaming ball guiding unit receives the gaming ball entered from the ball entry port, rotates it to a predetermined angle in a first direction, and guides the gaming ball to the first guiding path, Next, the gaming ball having entered the ball from the ball entry port is received in a state of being rotated in the first direction, and is rotated to a predetermined angle in a second direction opposite to the first direction. It guides the game ball to the induction route.

  The gaming machine according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the gaming ball guiding portion of the condition distributing means enters the ball entrance in a state of being rotated to a predetermined angle in the first direction. The first passive part is disposed at a position facing the ball game ball and receives the game ball entered and is rotated to a predetermined angle in the second direction, and rotated to a predetermined angle in the second direction. In this case, the second passive unit is disposed at a position facing the gaming ball entered into the entrance, and receives the gaming ball entered and rotates to a predetermined angle, and the first passive unit is in front After receiving the game ball entered from the entry ball opening and rotating in the second direction, the game ball is prevented from rotating in the first direction before entering the ball entry port next time, Alternatively, after the second passive part receives the game ball having entered the ball from the ball entry port and rotates in the first direction, the next game is performed. There before ball entrance to the entering ball port, and a, and a rotation restricting portion which prevents the pivoting in the second direction.

  The gaming machine according to claim 5 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the game area and the game ball flowing down the game area enter to establish the first or second success or failure judgment condition. The condition distribution means alternately controls the first and second determination conditions and the second determination condition each time the game ball enters the common start aperture. It is something that holds true.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Further, based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. The dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first success or failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the success or failure judgment result of the second lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second success / failure judgment conditions are satisfied.

  Here, the first identification information is a first display means, and the second identification information is a second display means, and can be dynamically displayed by the display control means. And, when the result of judgment of success or failure by the success or failure judgment means becomes a hit and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing a hit by the display control means, a bonus game which is advantageous to the player is executed. It is carried out by means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently.

  It is assisted by the condition distributing means that the first and second judgment conditions are satisfied alternately. The right to perform the first or second lottery game up to a predetermined upper limit number is stored by the hold storage means when the first or second validity determination conditions are satisfied, assisted by the condition distribution means.

  As a result, the first success or failure judgment condition and the second success or failure judgment condition are easily met equally, and the right to play the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be stored uniformly, and the first lottery game is played. It is possible to prevent any one of the right and the right to play the second lottery game from being biased and being stored earlier up to the upper limit number. Therefore, to store the right to perform the first lottery game and the second lottery game up to the upper limit number respectively, it is possible to suppress the problem that the right more than the upper limit number is generated in either one and becomes invalid. It has the effect of being able to

  According to the gaming machine of claim 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 1, the following effect is exerted. That is, when the game ball flowing down the game area enters the first starting opening, the first hit determination condition is satisfied, while when the game ball enters the second starting opening, the second hit determination condition is satisfied. Ru. It is assisted by the game ball guiding portion of the condition distributing means that the game balls alternately enter the first starting opening and the second starting opening.

  As a result, the player can easily cause the game ball to alternately enter the first starting port and the second starting port by causing the game ball to flow down to the game area, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game Can be performed efficiently, so that many lottery games can be performed in a short time.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the second aspect, the following effect is exerted. That is, the gaming ball entered from the entrance of the condition distributing means is rotated by a predetermined angle in the first direction to the first starting opening through the first guiding path to the gaming ball by the gaming ball guiding portion After being guided, the game ball entered from the ball entry next is received while being rotated to a predetermined angle in the first direction, and is rotated at a predetermined angle in a second direction opposite to the first direction. The gaming ball is guided by the gaming ball guiding portion to the second starting opening through the second guiding path.

  Thereby, it becomes possible to distribute and guide game balls alternately to the first starting opening and the second starting opening using a common member, and a member for distributing to the first starting opening and the second starting opening respectively Compared to the case of providing the game ball, the structure for distributing the game balls can be made compact.

  According to the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the third aspect, the following effect is exhibited. That is, the first passive portion of the gaming ball guiding portion is disposed at a position facing the gaming ball having entered the ball entrance with the gaming ball guiding portion of the condition distributing means being rotated to a predetermined angle in the first direction. When the first passive portion receives the entered game ball, it is rotated in the second direction to a predetermined angle. Further, the second passive part of the gaming ball guiding part is disposed at a position facing the gaming ball having entered the ball entrance with the gaming ball guiding part of the condition distributing means being rotated to a predetermined angle in the second direction. When the second passive portion receives the entered game ball, the game ball is rotated in the first direction to a predetermined angle.

  After the first passive part receives the game ball entered from the ball entrance and rotates in the second direction, it may then rotate in the first direction before the game ball enters the ball entrance. Or, after the second passive part receives the game ball having entered the ball from the ball entrance and is rotated in the first direction, it is then rotated in the second direction before the game ball enters the ball inlet. This is prevented by the rotation restricting portion.

  Thus, after the gaming ball guiding portion is rotated to guide the gaming ball to one of the guiding paths, the next gaming ball is rotated in the other direction before entering the ball, and then the ball is entered next. A game ball can also be prevented from having a problem that it is guided to the same route as the game ball entered in front of the game ball. Therefore, it becomes possible to guide the game ball entering the ball entrance to the first starting opening and the second starting opening more accurately alternately, and the right to carry out the first lottery game and the second lottery game is equalized. The effect is that it can be stored in

  According to the gaming machine of the fifth aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the following effect is exerted. That is, each time the game ball flowing down the game area enters the common starting opening, establishment of the first and second judgment conditions is alternately distributed by the condition distributing means in a controlled manner. As a result, the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be alternately performed with the common starting port, and there is an effect that the game area can be configured compactly.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. (A) is the figure which saw through the inside from the front side of the distribution apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the figure which saw through the inside from the back side of the distribution apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display device in a 1st embodiment, (b) is a reservation symbol display displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in a 1st embodiment It is the figure which showed typically the display mode before rearranging and after rearranging. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the various counters in 1st Embodiment, a special symbol holding ball storage area, a special symbol holding ball execution area, a normal symbol holding ball storage area, and a normal symbol holding ball execution area. (A) is a figure which showed typically the content of ROM of the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed the big hit random number table in 1st Embodiment typically, (C) is a figure which showed typically the jackpot classification table in 1st Embodiment, (d) is a figure which showed typically the random symbol per symbol table in 1st Embodiment typically. (A) is a figure which showed typically the rearrangement reserve storage area in 1st Embodiment, (b) is a figure which showed the secondary rearrangement reserve storage area in 1st Embodiment typically. . (A) is a figure which showed typically the normal time special hitting variation pattern table in a 1st embodiment typically, and (b) showed the normal time special deviation variation pattern table in a 1st embodiment typically FIG. (A) is a figure which showed typically the time reduction and probability change special hitting change pattern table in 1st Embodiment, (b) is a model which shows time deviation and probability change special deviation change pattern table in 1st Embodiment. FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the process of rearrangement of the reservation symbol display in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the process of rearrangement of the reservation symbol display in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start processing performed by MPU in the main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit judging processing performed by MPU in the main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection processing performed by MPU in the main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change stop processing performed by MPU in the main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation start process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol change stop processing performed by MPU in the main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st prefetch process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st prefetch update process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prefetch process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prefetch update process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol change process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding number display update process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flow chart which showed change display setting processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 1st embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the temporary fluctuation | variation stop process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation rearrangement process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 40, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63a, 63b, 67, etc. is detachably mounted from the back side. Balls are played by balls flowing down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 6) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is an open / close shaft. The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of a resin part for decoration, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be viewed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box-like shape with the upper surface opened and protruding upward, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination causes the ball inserted into the upper plate 17 to be guided to the ball firing unit 112a. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when rearranging the reserved symbol displays (Ds1 to Ds8) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2) described later.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or blinking according to the change of the gaming state at the time of the jackpot or the predetermined reach, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front surface frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time.

  A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side of the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen. 2), and the like can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player for driving a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed, and driving of the ball launch unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Sensor 51a, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 based on a change in electric resistance (Not shown) is built in. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of operation, and the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is then driven to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "dollar box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails for guiding balls, windmills and rails 61, 62, a first starting opening 63a, a first 2 The starting opening 63b, the first variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge portion is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The first start opening 63a, the second start opening 63b, the first variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and from the front side of the game board 13 It is fixed by wood screws etc. The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front of the game board 13, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, a belt-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is formed. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is formed by dividing two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 into a substantially circular area (a winning opening etc. is disposed, and a shot ball is (Flowing down area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated. In addition, a resin-made arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. It is driven in and fixed to the plate 60.

  A sorting winning device 630 is provided at the lower center of the game area. FIG. 4A is a perspective view of the sorting winning device 630 as viewed from the front. FIG. 4B is a perspective view of the sorting winning device 630 as viewed from the back.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, in the sorting winning device 630, an ordinary electric wheeled product 64 is provided at the top. In the normal state, the ordinary electric character 64 is disposed with the opposing wings 64a and 64b standing upward at an interval (about 11 mm in diameter of the game ball) in which the game balls can enter approximately one ball. . The route through which the game ball enters the sorting device 630 is only the route passing between the blades 64a and 64b of the ordinary electric character 64 in the normal state (the blades 64a and 64b standing upward). The player first shoots the game ball so that the game ball passes between the blades 64a and 64b of the ordinary electric character 64.

  When the game ball enters the distribution device 630, the passive distribution member 640 is disposed, and the accommodation ball 640a or 640b of the passive distribution member 640 receives the entered game ball. When the game ball is received by the housing section 640a, the passive distribution member 640 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front (see FIG. 4A) due to the weight of the game ball, and the game ball is moved to the first starting opening. Guide to 63a. Here, the passive distribution members 640 are configured to be rotatable about 90 degrees around the left and right, respectively, and a magnet 640 c is provided on the boundary wall between the housing portion 640 a and the housing portion 640 b.

  In the base body 900 provided on the back side of the sorting winning device 630, the magnet 640c of the passive sorting member 640 is disposed on the center line between the blades 64a and 64b of the ordinary electric role piece 64 and the base side magnet 900a is disposed. It is done. As shown in a top view of the sorting winning device 630 shown in FIG. 4C, the magnet 640c of the passive sorting member 640 and the base-side magnet 900a are configured to have mutually opposing polarities. In detail, the base-side magnet 900a is formed of a rod-like magnet fixed to the base body 900, and is configured to generate a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) at its tip. The base-side magnet 900 a is disposed and fixed so that its tip end faces the passive distribution member 640 side.

  The magnet 640c of the passive distribution unit 640 is also formed of a rod-shaped magnet in the same manner as the base side magnet 900a, and is fixed to the passive distribution member 640 so that the tip end faces the base side magnet 900a. At a position where the passive distribution member 640 rotates and the boundary wall of the housing portion 640a and the housing portion 640b is directly above (the center line of the interval at which the opposing wings 64a and 64b can enter the ball approximately one ball) The base magnet 900a and the magnet 640c of the passive distribution member 640 come closest to each other (the tips thereof face each other). Here, since the magnets are arranged to have the same polarity (for example, the N pole and the N pole), the repulsion case, the stop of the boundary wall of the passive distribution member 640 may be at a position where it is just upward It will be maintained in the position rotated to either the left or right.

  As a result, when the magnet 640c is at a position (upper position) where the magnet 640c is on the center line between the blade 64a and the blade 64b of the normal motorized product 64, the passive distribution member 640 Due to repulsion, the passive distribution member 640 rotates to either the left or right side, and one of the housing portion 640 a and the housing portion 640 b receives the game ball entering the distribution device 630 (upper side of the gaming machine) Will turn to Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of ball clogging due to the entering game ball coming into contact with the boundary wall between the accommodation portion 640a and the accommodation portion 640b.

  Further, for example, the housing portion 640a receives the gaming ball and rotates about 90 degrees to the left by the repulsion of the magnet 640c and the base-side magnet 900c, so that the gaming ball is guided to the first starting opening 63a. It is possible to prevent the distributing member 640 from rotating to the right (the housing portion 640a faces upward). As a result, after guiding the gaming ball to the first starting opening 63a, the accommodation portion 640b is in the state of facing upward, and then the gaming ball having entered the sorting device 630 is received by the accommodation portion 640b, and the gaming ball is The passive distribution member 640 is rotated about 180 degrees to the right by the weight of to guide the gaming ball to the second starting opening 63b. Thus, the passive distribution member 640 can alternately guide the gaming balls entering the distribution device 630 to the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b. Therefore, it is possible to evenly distribute the game balls to the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b and make a prize, and to be described later, a lottery game (hereinafter referred to as the first drawing It is possible to efficiently execute a lottery game (hereinafter, referred to as a second lottery game) resulting from the winning of the second start opening 63b.

  On the central left side of the game board 13, a normal symbol start port 67 is provided. The normal symbol start port 67 is formed of a start port having a sensor capable of detecting passage of the game ball in a gate type. When the game ball passes through the normal symbol start opening 67, a lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed. In the lottery performed for the game ball having passed to the normal symbol starting opening 67, a pass / fail determination of whether or not a normal symbol is hit is performed.

  When the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variation display of the normal symbol is started in the second symbol display portion 88 provided in the variable display device unit 80, which will be described later, "o" and "x" After the symbols are alternately turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds), a normal symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol of "o" or "x") indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed (lit display). When the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port 67 while the variable display is being performed in the second symbol display portion 88, the number of times of passage is held up to four times, and the number of holding balls is the first symbol display device 37 Displayed by.

  When it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol, the second symbol display portion 88 is lighted and displayed as "o", which is a symbol indicating that the lottery of the normal symbol is a hit. When the symbol which is a hit is displayed, the normal motorized symbol 64 is operated, and the blades 64a and 64b of the normal motorized symbol 64, which are normally maintained in the upright position, are substantially vertically erected. By moving the game ball into a substantially V-shape (reverse C shape) and guiding the game balls to the blades 64a and 64b, it is easy to enter the game balls into the sorting device 630 for a predetermined time (1.2 s in this embodiment). Become. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is dislocated, "x" which is a symbol indicating that the lottery of the normal symbol is out is lit and displayed on the second symbol display section 88.

  A first symbol display provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side top (the upper right of FIG. 2) of the game area A device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a illuminates the number of holding balls which is the number of balls (holding balls) for which the variable display has not been executed among the balls winning in the first starting opening 63a, the second starting opening 63b, and the normal symbol starting opening 67. It is indicated by the state. In addition, the number of rounds in the jackpot and the error indication are also indicated by the corresponding lighting state.

  The 7-segment display 37 b is configured by two 7-segment LEDs on the left and right. On the left side of the seven-segment LED, the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is variably displayed (dynamically displayed). Specifically, the variable display (in the present embodiment, the central segment of the seven segments blinks) until the fluctuation time (dynamic display time) has elapsed, which is determined based on the winning of the first start opening 63a. After that, it is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating the determination result. When the determination result is out, the symbol "-" is displayed, which indicates the outset in which one central segment is lighted. On the other hand, when the determination result is a hit, a symbol different from the symbol indicating the detachment such as the symbols "3" and "7" corresponding to the hit is displayed. The second lottery game is also configured in the same manner as the first lottery game. The LEDs 37a are configured such that the light emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the light emission colors can indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

  Moreover, although the fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation mode or a dynamic display mode) in the pachinko machine 10 will be described later, a fluctuation time is set for each fluctuation mode, and corresponds to a dynamic display mode regarding time information. Furthermore, the variation patterns can be divided into a relatively long variation pattern with a relatively long variation time and a short variation pattern with a relatively short variation time, as a reach variation pattern and a non-reach variation pattern. In this way, even if roughly classified according to a certain standard of time (here, reach, non-reach, or reference time (for example, whether it is longer than 10 seconds or not)), the dynamic regarding the time information is also It corresponds to the display mode.

  As will be described later, regarding the time information until the fluctuation start time, the time at which the accurate fluctuation start is also applicable, and the above-mentioned rough fluctuation pattern time information (for example, whether it is a long time fluctuation pattern Information on time information (for example, the number of long-term fluctuation patterns performed until the start of fluctuation, etc.) determined based on whether or not

  In the present pachinko machine 10, in the lottery performed for the winning of the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b, while performing the success or failure determination (big hit lottery) whether or not the big hit, also the determination of the big hit type Do. As jackpot types determined here, 15R normal jackpots, 15R probability variation jackpots, and 2R probability variation jackpots are prepared. The jackpot symbol displayed on the LED 37b is a symbol indicating the jackpot type (in the present embodiment, "9" for 15R normal jackpot, "7" for 15R probability variation jackpot, "3" for 2R probability variation jackpot, for example) Is displayed).

  Here, “15R normal jackpot” means that the maximum number of rounds is a jackpot of 15 rounds, and after the jackpot, a special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 8 (b)) for low probability, which will be described later. It is the hit when the game is set. The "15R probability variation jackpot" is the jackpot of the maximum round number of 15 rounds, and after the jackpot, a special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (FIG. 8 (b)) for high probability time, which will be described later, is set. It is. The "2R probability variation jackpot" is the jackpot of the maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds, and after the jackpot, the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (FIG. 8 (b)) for high probability time, which will be described later, is set. It is.

  In the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 79 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winnings (start winnings) to the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b as a trigger, while being synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display 37, the third symbol (first A third symbol display device 81 configured of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") for performing variable display of a special symbol and a second special symbol is provided.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display of 8-inch size, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 described later, as shown in FIG. 5A, the left side In the display area Dm1, three symbol rows on the left, middle and right are displayed, showing a first special symbol which is one of the third symbols. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol (first special symbol) is variably displayed on the left display area Dm1 of the third symbol display device 81 ((1) Dynamic display). In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanied by the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, while the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. It makes a decorative display according to it. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like. Moreover, also in the 2nd special symbol which is one of the 3rd symbol, it is displayed similarly to the 1st special symbol in the right side display area Dm2.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 5, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 5 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 5 (a) is a view schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG.5 (b) is the figure which illustrated the reordering front and after reordering of the reservation symbol display in an actual display screen.

  The third symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is respectively constituted by 10 types of special symbols attached with the numbers from "0" to "9". Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main controller 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbol is aligned (for example, "777") variation display is performed, and the variation display The jackpot is configured to occur after the session is over.

  As shown in FIG. 5 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is mainly divided into upper and lower parts, and the third symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is displayed in the upper display area Dm. And a display area for displaying the holding symbol (the number of holdings of the first lottery game and the second lottery game) in the lower display area Ds. The upper display area Dm is configured to be displayable by being divided into the left side display area Dm1 and the right side display area Dm2. Mainly, in the left side display area Dm1, the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game based on the winning of the first starting opening 63a is variably displayed. On the other hand, in the right side display area Dm2, the second special symbol indicating the determination result of the second lottery game based on the winning of the second starting opening 63b is variably displayed.

  The left display area Dm1 displays three symbol rows L1, L2 and L3 for left, middle and right, respectively. In each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending order or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, and variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each symbol row L1 to L3. In particular, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order in the left symbol row L1, and the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order in the middle symbol row L2 and the right symbol row L3. On the other hand, in the right side display area Dm2, the second special symbol is displayed in the same manner as the first special symbol, symbol rows R1, R2 and R3 are displayed, and variable display is similarly performed.

  In the left side display area Dm1 and the right side display area Dm2, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line U1. If the third symbol is stopped on the effective line by the combination of the big hit symbols (in this embodiment, the combination of the same main symbols), the big hit moving image is displayed as the big hit.

  On the other hand, the lower display area Ds is provided laterally longer than the upper display area Dm, and is further equally divided into eight reserved areas Ds1 to Ds8 of small areas in the left-right direction.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 5B, a total of three main symbols of the special symbol (third symbol) are displayed in the upper display region Dm in the left display region Dm1 and the right display region Dm2. Ru.

  In the present embodiment, winnings on the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b are respectively suspended up to four times. When the gaming ball wins in the first starting opening 63a while the first special symbol is variably displayed, the start of the first lottery game based on the winning is suspended, and the reserved symbol display area (Ds1 to Ds8 of the lower display area Ds) In the display area of the display area of the display area of the lowest number in the area where the reserved symbol is not displayed ("○" which is the reserved symbol of the first lottery game is displayed in the reserved symbol display area of the left number) .

  In addition, if the game ball wins in the second starting opening 63b while the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the "●" which is the holding symbol for the second lottery game is lowered, as in the case of winning in the first starting opening 63a. Displayed in the reserved symbol display area (Ds1 to Ds8) of the side display area Ds.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will be continued. When the game balls enter the distribution winning device 630, the game balls are distributed in order to the first start opening 63a and the second start opening 63b by the distribution member 640 (see FIG. 4). In the state where the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, and when there is no hold in the first lottery game, if the first start port 63a is won, whether or not the second special symbol is in the variable display Regardless of, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed after being variably displayed in the left display area Dm1. On the other hand, when the game ball wins in the second starting opening 63b, the second special symbol is variably displayed regardless of whether or not the first special symbol is being variably displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously configured to allow variable display simultaneously in the left side display area Dm1 and the right side display area Dm2. Therefore, the game machine balls that are alternately won are distributed to the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b by the distribution winning device 630, so that the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. it can. Although it will be described later, since the first lottery game and the second lottery game are each executed by the lottery whether or not to execute the big hit game, the case of the big hit game lottery opportunity is executed only in the first lottery game The number of times of drawing can be increased by comparison, and the chance of the player getting a big hit can be increased.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the pachinko machine 10 comprised by two, the 1st lottery game and the 2nd lottery game, was explained, it is not restricted to it, 3 or 4 or more lottery games and the starting corresponding to it Naturally, it is also possible to provide a mouth and simultaneously configure each lottery result to be able to change display.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the sorting winning device 630 has a mechanical configuration (the sorting configuration of the gaming balls by the passive sorting member 640), but only one starting opening and every time the gaming balls win, Naturally, it may be configured to be alternately distributed to the start timing of the first lottery game and the start timing of the second lottery game. By configuring in this manner, it is not necessary to provide a mechanism for distributing the game balls on the game board surface, and the game area can be effectively used.

  When the game ball wins on the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b, the first starting opening switch or the second starting opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the gaming board 13 is turned on. Due to the turning on of the first starting opening switch and the second starting opening switch, a lottery for a big hit is made by the main control device 110, and a display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls are won.

  If one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the jackpot, the other variable symbol is temporarily displayed in a variable display, the variable display is temporarily interrupted, and the jackpot game ( For example, in the case of 15 rounds usually a big hit, after the 15 rounds of jackpot game is finished, the fluctuation display of the special symbol is continued for the remaining fluctuation time.

  The remaining variable time variable display is displayed in a change mode dedicated to the remaining variable display so that the player can know that the remaining variable display is the remaining variable display for the suspended variable display. Further, as the variation mode dedicated to the remaining variation display, the variation display mode is selected in accordance with the remaining variation time. Specifically, when the remaining fluctuation time is equal to or less than the reference time (3 seconds or less in the present embodiment), the character "display the lottery result of the fluctuation display which has been temporarily stopped!" 3 After displaying on the symbol display device 81 for the remaining fluctuation time, stop display is performed in a display mode indicating the determination result. Then, when the determination result is stopped and displayed, the characters “The lottery result of the temporary display has been displayed!” Are displayed, and continue to be displayed until the next change is started.

  On the other hand, when the remaining fluctuation time is longer than the reference time (3s in the present embodiment), all the main symbols constituting the special symbol are variably displayed at a constant speed, and the character "temporarily stopped fluctuation" A notification mode indicating that the display is changing! Is displayed. After that, when the remaining fluctuation time has passed, the main symbols are simultaneously stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the determination result.

  By configuring in this manner, the player can recognize that it is a continuation of the fluctuation display of the special symbol interrupted halfway, and can recognize that it is a lottery result of the fluctuation display which is interrupted. it can. Therefore, even if the variable display is interrupted on the way, the player can be prevented from playing the game with dissatisfaction, doubts and the like that the lottery has disappeared on the way.

  In addition, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a big hit, if the other special symbol is in the state of stopping the variable display, a new variable display Start is prohibited. When the big hit game is over, the variable display is set to be started again based on the winning on the corresponding starting openings 63a and 63b.

  As a result, it is possible to prevent the problem that the occurrence of the jackpot is overlapped and the player can not concentrate on the jackpot game because the lottery game is executed in the other special symbol even during the jackpot.

  In addition, when the remaining fluctuation time is short, even if the continuation of the interrupted fluctuation mode is displayed, there is a problem that the player may miss it or it may be too short to understand the notification result. However, in the configuration of the pachinko machine 10, when the remaining time is within the reference time (3 s in this embodiment), the notification result is displayed immediately after notifying the player that the lottery result is to be displayed. Therefore, the player can recognize that the notification result which has been interrupted (temporary stop) is displayed.

  Furthermore, even after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, a character notifying that the suspended variable display is stopped and displayed is displayed, so the remaining fluctuation time is very short (for example, within 1s). Also, the player can recognize that the suspended variable display is effective and the determination result is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, even when the remaining fluctuation time is longer than the reference time (3s in the present embodiment), the player is notified of the fact that the notification result being interrupted (temporarily stopped) is being displayed in a fluctuation manner. The person can easily recognize that the suspended variable display was effective without disappearing.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been suspended is resumed, the character is informed of that to the character, but the present invention is not particularly limited thereto. Of course, it may be configured to notify by a lamp or the like. In addition, as shown in the display mode that shows that the player has resumed (for example, displayed as an animation notifying that the variable display has been resumed by the character etc.), the suspended change Of course, notification may be made in a display mode dedicated to the resumption of display. By doing this, the player can correctly recognize that the suspended variable display has been resumed.

  Also, in the present embodiment, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is a big hit, if the other special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the variable display is interrupted. Although it is configured to stop the fluctuation display, but not limited to that, during the jackpot game, measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted, but the fluctuation display of the special symbol is continued as it is, and the fluctuation time is measured after the jackpot game May be configured to change the display of the special symbol.

  By configuring in this way, since the special symbol is continuously changed and displayed during the jackpot game, the player can confirm that the other change display is continued without disappearing, You can play the jackpot game with peace of mind.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is a big hit, if the other special symbol is in the variable display mode, the variable display is interrupted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display may be continued without interruption, and the lottery game may be executed as usual.

  By configuring in this way, even during the jackpot game, it is possible to further perform the lottery game, and it is possible to play more lottery games in a short time, and the player performs many lottery games. It will be possible to do. In such a configuration, when one of the special symbols during the big hit game is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a hit, the execution of the big hit game is delayed until one big hit game is ended (stock ), The player can play the jackpot game continuously.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation display mode in which the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 has been interrupted is displayed in the fluctuation mode exclusively for remaining fluctuation display. Not only that, the remaining variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed by the first symbol display device 37 may be displayed in a variation mode dedicated to the remaining variation display. Specifically, when the remaining variable display is performed on the 7-segment display 37b, the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed while being blinked. Alternatively, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed by being lit with the remaining color (for example, blue etc.) dedicated to the remaining variable display, thereby displaying the variable. By doing this, the remaining variation display is displayed on the player not only for the third symbol display device 81 but also for the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed on the 7-segment display 37b. Can be notified.

  Further, as in the case of the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the variation display mode may naturally be changed according to the remaining variation time.

  In addition, during the interruption, the first special symbol or the second special symbol may be blinked in a predetermined display mode “for example, alphabet h” in a predetermined cycle. In this way, by configuring, it is possible to inform the player that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (suspended).

  A horizontally long rectangular shaped variable winning device 65 is disposed on the lower right side of the game area. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery regarding the first lottery game or the second lottery game in the main control device 110 becomes the big win, the first stop pattern of the big hit is made after the predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed. While turning on the symbol display device 37, the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit is displayed in the corresponding display area (the left display region Dm1 or the right display region Dm2) of the third symbol display device 81, and occurrence of a big hit is shown . Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  The specific winning hole 65a is closed when a predetermined time passes, and after the closing, the specific winning hole 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The open / close operation of the variable winning device 65 is determined by the determined type of jackpot, and for example, in the case of 15R normal jackpot, it is possible to repeat at most 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is one form of the bonus game state advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as the provision of the game value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, when the variable winning device 65 is stopped and displayed with the first special symbol or the second special symbol indicating a hit based on winning in the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b, The open / close operation is set based on the jackpot type, and the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time or until a predetermined condition is satisfied (in the embodiment, until 30 seconds pass or 10 balls are won). Be done.

  The variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening / closing drive forward on the lower side of the opening / closing plate. . The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large open port solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball is easy to win in the specified winning port 65a. Operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  In the left and right corners of the lower side of the game board 13, adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for attaching a certificate, an identification label and the like are provided. Can be viewed through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not won any of the winning openings 63a, 63b, 65a, 79 is guided to the ball discharge path (not shown) through the out port 66. A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 6) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3). ing. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 6), for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  The main control unit 110 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display unit 88. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 7) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 7, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters etc. are MPU201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform the setting of the display of the 1st symbol display device 37 and the 3rd symbol display device 81, the 2nd symbol display part 88, etc. Used in

  In the setting of the display of the jackpot lottery and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a special symbol random number counter C1 used for lottery of the jackpot and a special hit type counter C2 used for selection of the jackpot symbol A variation pattern determination counter C3, an initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set an initial value of the special hit random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS1 used to select a variation pattern are used. Further, the random number counter C4 is used for lottery of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol display portion 88), and the initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the ordinary random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time updating is performed, and the value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 14), and some counters are not included in the main processing (S1000) (see FIG. 17). It is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although details will be described later, each counter value is stored in the RAM 203 for the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c1 where the counter value is stored for winning for the first starting opening 63a and the winning for the second starting opening 63b. The second special symbol holding ball execution area 203c2 is provided. In the present embodiment, the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b are each provided with a maximum of four holding balls, and a maximum of eight holding balls can be stored. Therefore, when the game ball wins during the period when it is possible to draw the special symbol, such as when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable display or when the big hit of the special symbol is not being played, each counter value Is stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c1, and when the gaming ball is won in the second starting opening 63b, each counter value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203c2. On the other hand, during a period in which the lottery of special symbols such as during the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed, or during the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not possible, the game ball can be used as the first starting opening 63a or In the case where the second starting opening 63b is won, if the number of holdings for the starting opening that has won is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment), each counter value is acquired and the starting opening is won Are stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to. In addition, when the number of holdings for the winning starting opening is the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) or more, each counter value etc. is not acquired but the winning balls (in the present embodiment, 5 game balls) Only) is treated as an invalid ball to be paid out to the player.

  In the present embodiment, although the upper limit value of the number of holding balls is four for each of the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b, it is not limited thereto, but may be four each, or the upper limit value You may choose not to

  Each counter shown in FIG. 7 will be described in detail. The special random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), and after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 399) It has a back configuration. In particular, when the special hit random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special hit random number counter C1.

  The initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the special random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the special random number counter C1 is a loop counter which can take values of 0 to 399, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) is executed, and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (S1200) (see FIG. 33).

  The value of the special hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the ball is won in the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b (starting winning combination) At timing, it is stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c1 or the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203c2 corresponding to the winning starting opening of the RAM 203. The value of the jackpot random number is set by the jackpot random number table 202a (FIG. 8 (b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, and the value of the special punch random number counter C1 is set by the jackpot random number table 202a. It is determined that the jackpot is matched if the value of the random number that will be the jackpot (in the present embodiment, “7” at low probability, “0 to 9 at high probability”).

  The special per random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this special per random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (per wins) that will be the big win is 1 at low probability, its value “7” is 10 at high probability, its value “0 to 9” is big hit It is stored in the random number table 202a.

  The special hit type counter C2 is for determining the jackpot type in the case of a big hit, and is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and the maximum value (99 in the present embodiment) After reaching, it is configured to return to 0. The value of the special hit type counter C2 is, for example, regularly (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the ball wins in the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b (starting winning combination) At the timing, the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c1 or the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203c2 of the RAM 203 corresponding to the winning starting opening is stored.

  Here, if the value of the special per random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c1 or the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203c2 is not a large random number, that is, it is a random number falling out For example, the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display effect and the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") are those at the time of deviation. On the other hand, if it is a random number in which the value of the special random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c1 or the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203c2 is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern or stop in the fluctuation display effect The type is that of the jackpot. In this case, the variation pattern at the big hit and the stop type are determined corresponding to the big hit type indicated by the value of the special hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball execution area 203c.

  The value of the special hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. The jackpot type is determined based on the special hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b (see FIG. 8C) stored in the ROM 202. Here, as shown in FIG. 8A, the ROM 202 stores various tables. FIG. 8B is a diagram schematically showing an example of the first jackpot random number counter table 202a, and FIG. 8C an example of the jackpot type table 202b. The jackpot type table 202 b (FIG. 8C) is a table in which the jackpot type is associated with the value of the special hit type counter C2.

  As the jackpot type, as described above, the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds Special symbol big hit random number table 202a (refer to FIG. 8 (b)) for low probability time after the big hit game is set "15R normal big hit", maximum The number of rounds is 15 rounds and special symbol big hit random number table 202a (refer to FIG. 8 (b)) for high probability time is set after the big hit game "15R probability variation big hit", maximum round number is high probability after big hit game in 2 rounds There is a "2R probability variation jackpot" in which a special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 8B) for the time is set.

  In the jackpot type table 202b, the value of the special hit type counter C2 that determines the jackpot type is associated with each jackpot type. In the example of FIG. 8C, the value "60 to 99" of the special hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R normal jackpot, and the value "0 to 49" of the special hit type counter C2 for the 15R probability variation jackpot Are associated, and the value “50 to 59” of the special hit type counter C2 is associated with the 2R probability variation jackpot.

  The first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c1 or the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203c2 in which the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is stored when the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is a value that makes a big hit The jackpot type associated with the value of the special hit type counter C2 stored in is determined from the jackpot type table 202b. For example, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is "20", 15R probability variation jackpot is determined as the big hit type, and if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is "80", 15R normal big hit as the big hit type) It is determined.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, 15R normal jackpot is selected with a probability of about 40% when it is a jackpot, and 15R probability variation jackpot is selected with a probability of 50%, and 2R probability variation jackpot with a probability of 10%. A jackpot type table 202b is defined to be selected.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description of the various counters will be continued. The fluctuation pattern determination counter C3 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 100, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 100).

  The values of the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are, for example, periodically updated (once in each timer interrupt processing in the present embodiment), and the ball is the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening. The first special symbol or the second special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner at the timing of winning (start winning) at 63b, and is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b When various counter values of the holding balls are not stored, they are stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c1 or the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203c2 of the RAM 203.

  FIG. 10A is a diagram schematically showing an example of the normal-time special hit variation pattern table 202d stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 10 (a), the special hit variation pattern table 202d for normal use is a case where the special symbol big hit random number table 202a for high probability is set in the big hit random number table 202a (hereinafter referred to as a normal gaming state) The 15R jackpot only and the 2R probability variation jackpot referred to when the 15R jackpot is determined if the 15R jackpot is determined if the 15R jackpot is determined if the 2R probability jackpot is determined. Is divided into groups based on the 2R probability variation jackpot referred to in the case where is determined, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups. If the value of the special random number counter C1 is a value that makes a big hit (per win value), it is stored in the execution area according to the big hit type corresponding to the value of the special hit type counter C2 stored in the same execution area The fluctuation pattern group is selected from the fluctuation pattern group corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Then, the variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3 stored in the execution area.

  There are various types of normal reach, various types of super reach, and various types of premier reach in the 15R jackpot, and the correspondence with the value of fluctuation type counter CS1 is 0 to 10 for normal reach, 11 to 95 for various super reach, and 96 for various Premier reach. It is about 100. The Norlech variety is a reach where the fluctuation time is short, and after the short reach, the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned (so-called, the symbol is aligned with a stop at the bitter end). A variation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after reaching a variation time longer than normal reach (for example, a reach extending from long reach or normal reach), and various Premier Reach variations are longer than super reach The first pattern (or the third pattern) is aligned after the time reach (for example, the reach that develops further after the super reach or the special reach where the destination from the normal reach differs from the super reach, etc.) Is a variation pattern not selected.

  In addition, "reach various" means that there are many things that effect contents differ also in each reach, for example, in the super reach, the reach which changes the back image rapidly and is displayed, and a certain character There is a reach to be displayed suddenly, etc. In addition, there are multiple reach with different effect contents such as one to which a notice effect before the start of variable display is added, and one to which an effect to be a big hit by re-change display is added.

  In the case of the 2R probability variation jackpot, the 2R probability variation dedicated variation pattern is selected regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3. The 2R probability variation dedicated variation pattern is, for example, a special variation pattern in which the special symbol is stopped at "341" to notify that the 2R probability variation has been won.

  FIG. 10B is a diagram schematically showing an example of the normal out-of-time extraneous change pattern table 202 e stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 10 (b), the special outlier fluctuation pattern table 202e in the normal game state is a normal reach which is relatively out of various types of normal outliers that become completely out as a stop type at the time of outliers, and a normal reach is relatively short. It consists of various types of normal reach (short) that are out of the normal reach, various types of normal reach that are relatively out of normal reach with a relatively long fluctuation time, and various types of super reach that are out of super reach.

  When the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “0 to 29”, the correspondence between the fluctuation type counter CS1 and each fluctuation pattern group is normally out of various types, and in the case of “30 to 60”, normal reach (short The various types of super reach are determined in the case of various types of "61 to 89", in the case of various types of normal reach (long) and of "90 to 100".

  For various types of out-of-normal-time, normal out-of-range A and normal out-of-range B are set in which the variable display ends in a short time and reach is not established. When the value of the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3 is "0 to 100", the fluctuation pattern of the normal deviation B is selected when the normal deviation A is "101 to 198". In addition, a variation pattern of normal reach shorts A to C is set in various out-of-order normal reach (short) types in which the reach is established but the variation time is short. If the value of the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3 is "0 to 70", if the normal reach short A is "71 to 128", the normal reach short B is "129 to 198". The variation patterns of the normal reach short C are respectively selected. Similarly, fluctuation patterns are selected for various normal reach lengths and various super reach types.

  FIG. 11A is a view schematically showing the time variation / precise variation special hit variation pattern table 202 d stored in the ROM 202. FIG. 11B is a view schematically showing the time-shortening / probability-variation special deviation fluctuation pattern table 202 e stored in the ROM 202. When the special symbol big hit random number table 202a for high probability is set in the big hit random number table 202a in the big hit random number table 202a and the special hit variation pattern table 202d for short time and probability change special hit change pattern table 202d It is a table for a variation pattern selection which is selected when the state is set to the probability variation gaming state) and the time reduction counter 203k is set to a value of "0" or more (hereinafter, the gaming state is set to the time reduction gaming state). .

  The selection of the variation pattern is similar to that of the normal special hit variation pattern table 202d and the normal extra deviation variation pattern table 202e, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. In addition, about special hitting fluctuation pattern table 202d and special outlier fluctuation pattern table 202e, although only one type was explained here, special hitting fluctuation pattern table 202d and special for the first special symbol and the second special symbol respectively Outset fluctuation pattern table 202e is set, and the distribution of fluctuation pattern determination counter C3 is changed between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol Thus, even if the value of the same variation pattern determination counter C3 is acquired, the same variation pattern is not selected. By configuring in this manner, different variation patterns can be easily selected for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and various effects can be made.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description of the various counters will be continued. The ordinary random number counter C4 (see FIG. 8D) is configured as a loop counter which is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). At the timing when the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening 67, it is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h (see FIG. 7) of the RAM 203. And the value of the random number which becomes the big hit of the ordinary symbol is set by the ordinary symbol random number table 202c (FIG. 8 (d)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, and the value of the ordinary random number counter C4 is When it matches the value of the random number which becomes a hit set by the normal symbol per random number table 202c, it is determined that the normal symbol is hit.

  Also, when the per-round random number counter C4 makes one revolution, the value of the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the per-round normal random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the normal random number counter C4 is updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed the normal symbol start port 67 (through gate) . The number of random numbers to be won is 24, in the normal gaming state, and the range is “5 to 28”. Also, in the high probability gaming state, it is 200, and its range is “5 to 204”. That is, in the normal gaming state, it is determined to be won when the value of the acquired ordinary hit random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", and in the high probability gaming state, the value of the acquired ordinary hit random number counter C4 Is determined to be won when the symbol is in the range of "5-204", and the symbol of "o" is displayed on the second symbol display portion 88 as a stop symbol (second symbol) and the symbol of the ordinary electric role item 64 is displayed. In the normal gaming state, the blades 64a and 64b are opened twice for a predetermined time (1.2 s in the present embodiment) and in the high probability gaming state for a predetermined time (1 s in the present embodiment). The ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the ordinary random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (S1200) (see FIG. 33).

  When the gaming ball passes the normal symbol starting port 67, the variation display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is not in progress, and when each counter value based on the holding ball is not stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h, A random number value is acquired from the normal hit random number counter C4 in the normal symbol holding ball execution area 203i and stored in the normal hit random number counter storage area 203i1. Also, when the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner or when the random number value corresponding to the holding ball stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h is less than the upper limit (4 pieces in this embodiment) Is stored in the normal hit random number counter storage area 203h1 of the number of times of holding (normal symbol hold 1 to 4) corresponding to the random number value acquired from the normal hit random number counter C4. In addition, when a random number value is stored in each area, the normal symbol flag 203j is set to ON, and the variable display of the normal symbol is stopped based on the random number value, or the previous hold is made by digesting the hold. When data is shifted to the area, it is set to off. Here, when the data is shifted, the normal symbol flag of the newly shifted and stored reserved area is set to on. Whether or not the data is stored in the reserve area, or whether the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner is determined depending on which reserve area or the normal symbol flag of the execution area is on.

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control unit 110 causes the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the value of the counter or the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display unit 88 can be executed.

  In addition, in this embodiment, it was comprised so that a common various counter value might be selected about the lottery of a 1st lottery game and a 2nd lottery game, but a 1st lottery game (1st special symbol) and a 2nd lottery With the game (the second special symbol), it sets various counters for exclusive use, respectively and updates with different value by making the update opportunity and the initial value etc of the various counters of the 1st lottery game and the 2nd lottery game different. Naturally, it may be configured by the counter value to be calculated.

  In this way, by configuring, even when the counter value is acquired at the same opportunity in the lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is possible to acquire counter values of different values, It is possible to suppress a failure that the fluctuation pattern selected by the 1 special symbol and the 2nd special symbol and the judgment result of success or failure are synchronized.

  In addition, even if the variation pattern is selected from the common variation pattern table for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is possible to suppress the problem that the selected variation pattern is synchronized, and various effects. It can be performed. Further, storage data of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be suppressed, and an inexpensive configuration (using a RAM with a small storage area or the like) can be made.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 is a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored in addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 6, various flags and counters, I / O And a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (S1200) (see FIG. 33), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 32) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  RAM 203 is the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c, the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d, the first special symbol holding ball number Counter 203e, second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f, normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g, normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h, normal symbol holding ball execution area 203i, normal symbol flag 203j, time reduction counter 203k, probability variation flag 203m, First big hit flag 203o, second big hit flag 203p, first fluctuation stop flag 203q, second fluctuation stop flag 203r, first fluctuation time storage area 203s, second fluctuation time storage area 203t, reordering storage area 203u, others It has at least memory area 203v .

  The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a storage area for storing various counter values obtained based on winning in the first starting opening 63a up to the upper limit number (four in the present embodiment). is there. Further, the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b stores various counter values obtained based on the game ball winning in the second starting opening 63b up to the upper limit number (four in this embodiment). Storage area for

  The first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c is a storage area in which various counter values for starting variable display of the first special symbol are stored, and the first special symbol is the first special symbol when the variable display is stopped. When various counter values are stored in the holding ball storage area 203a, the storage area is a storage area where the various counter values are shifted and stored. The second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d is a storage area in which various counter values for starting variable display of the second special symbol are stored, and the details are the same as the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c. .

  The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c, and the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d are for counters as the start winning combination is detected. The values of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the change pattern determination counter C3 and the change type counter CS1 acquired from the buffer (see FIG. 7) are respectively stored. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won the first starting opening 63a in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), the MPU 201 obtains the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 from the counter buffer, and The special hit random number counter storage area 203a1, the special hit type counter storage area 203a2, the fluctuation pattern determination counter 203a3 and the fluctuation type counter storage area 203a4 of the holding ball storage area 203a are respectively stored. On the other hand, when it is detected that the ball has won the second starting opening 63b, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are obtained from the counter buffer and each corresponding, as in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. They are similarly stored in the area (not shown).

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuation effect, the above-described first to execute processing such as a jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81, etc. Of the data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to each start winning combination stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, it corresponds to one start winning combination The data is shifted to this special symbol holding ball execution area 203c. Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 203 e and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203 f are detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) which is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. The number of holding balls (number of waits) of the fluctuation display effect (the fluctuation display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the winning of the opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b Each is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f are set to zero as an initial value by the initial setting process (S1112 in FIG. 32) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, each time the start winning is detected and the number of balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value 4 respectively. On the other hand, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203a and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203b are decremented by one each time the variable display effect is executed.

  In addition, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e (that is, the holding ball number) is a counter value in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a based on the game ball having won in the first starting opening 63a. Is stored, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the first special symbol holding ball number command output from the main control device 110. The first special symbol holding ball number command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the starting winning combination is detected and the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203 e is incremented by one. It is.

  In addition, the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f (that is, the holding ball number) is a counter value in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b based on the game ball having won in the second starting opening 63b. Is notified, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the second special symbol holding ball number command output from the main control device 110. The second special symbol holding ball number command is sent from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the starting winning combination is detected and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f is incremented by one. It is.

  If the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer are respectively stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c or the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d, the MPU 201 1 Refer to the data stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area 203c or the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d in the first change start process (Fig. 16, S203) or the second change start process (Fig. 20, S206) Then, based on the reference data, a jackpot lottery is performed, and the fluctuation pattern and the stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. In the first symbol display device 37, under the control of the main control device 110, the variation display effect is performed based on the determined variation pattern and the stop type.

  Further, the variation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the first or second change pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, in the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation display effect is performed based on the fluctuation pattern and the stop type notified by the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command.

  In the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g, the gaming ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening 67 detected in the timer interrupt process (refer to FIG. 14) which is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds (hereinafter referred to as "start winning" The variable display effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 (based on the second symbol display unit 88 of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display effect performed by the second symbol display device 88) It is a counter which counts the number of pending balls (waiting number) of each up to four times. The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is a counter that stores the total number of holding balls stored based on the passage of the gaming ball through the normal symbol starting opening 67. By the initial setting process (S1112 in FIG. 32) of the RAM 203 after power on, zero is set as an initial value. Then, each time the start winning is detected and the number of balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value 4. On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is decremented by 1 each time the variable display effect is executed (see FIG. 29, S106).

  The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h is a storage area in which the normal hit random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 7) is detected along with the detection of the start winning to the normal symbol start port 67. When the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 detects that the ball has passed the normal symbol starting port 67 (start winning) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), the counter buffer normally receives the random number counter C4. A value is acquired and stored in the normal hit random number counter storage area 203h1 of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h. The normal symbol flag 203 j is set to ON in the normal symbol flag storage area 203 h 2 and stored (stored). The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h has four holding areas so that data (the value of the counter C4, normal symbol flag 203j) corresponding to one start winning can be stored (held) up to four times. There is. In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h, the data of the holding ball is stored in the order from the earliest holding area among the holding areas where the data is vacant, in the order of passing (start winning) to the normal symbol starting opening 67 Be done.

  In addition, when it is detected that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuation indication production of normal design on the basis of starting winning a prize, normal counter design sphere execution area 203i, each counter value is housed, the winning lottery of the normal design and the 1st It is a memory for storing data (value of the counter C4) to be referred to in processing such as setting of display (variation pattern) of the symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, when the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation display effect of the normal symbol, in order to execute processing such as winning lottery or setting of display of the second symbol display unit 88 or the second symbol display device 88 Of the data corresponding to each start winning combination stored in the above-described normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h (general hit random number counter C4 value), data corresponding to one starting winning combination, this normal symbol holding ball Shift to execution area 203i. Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The normal symbol flag 203j is a flag indicating that the data of the normal random number counter C4 is stored and indicating that the symbol is being held, and is a flag indicating that the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. It is set to ON when the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area 203i or the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h. Also, if the value of the normal hit counter C4 is shifted to the next pending area (the pending area corresponding to the pending count for which the pending count has been reduced and the number of pending tasks reduced), the value of the pending area before being shifted The normal symbol flag 203j is set to off, while the normal symbol flag 203j of the reserved area that has been shifted and stored is set to on. Further, when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is subjected to the fluctuation stop processing, the normal symbol flag 203j is set to off.

  The time saving counter 203k is a counter area where the time saving count 100 is set after the 15R normal jackpot game is executed. When the number of times of time saving is set, a random number per table for high probability time is set in the normal pattern per random number table 202c until the number of times of time saving is set to 0. Also, when the symbol "o" indicating the hit of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display portion 88, the open time (in the present embodiment, the wings 64a and 64b of the normal motorized character 64 are longer than the normal gaming state) , 1s) The operation of opening is repeated twice. Hereinafter, this gaming state is referred to as a time saving gaming state.

  The hour reduction counter 203k is decremented by one each time the first special symbol or the second special symbol stops fluctuating display, and when the value of the time reduction counter 203k becomes 0, it shifts from the time reduction gaming state to the normal gaming state, and the ordinary symbol When the normal symbol per random symbol table for low probability of per random number counter 202c is set, and the symbol "○" showing the normal symbol hit is displayed on the second symbol display section 88, the open time is 0.2 s With the setting of the number of times of opening, the blades 64a and 64b of the ordinary electric character 64 are opened.

  The probability change flag 203m is a flag indicating that the gaming state is a high probability gaming state. In the first special symbol or the second special symbol, a flag that is set on based on the end of the jackpot game when it is notified that the 15R probability variation big hit game is won and the 15R probability variation big hit game is executed It is. On the other hand, when the probability change flag 203m is set to ON and the stop display is made with the first special symbol or the second special symbol to indicate the jackpot (all types), it is set to OFF, and after the jackpot game, by the jackpot type It is set to on if it is a 15R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot.

  The first jackpot flag 203o is a flag that is set to ON when it is determined that the value of the acquired special hitting random number counter C1 is a hit based on the winning of the first starting opening 63a. In addition, when the jackpot game ends, it is set to off.

  The second jackpot flag 203p is a flag that is set to ON when it is determined that the value of the acquired special hitting random number counter C1 is a hit based on winning in the second starting opening 63b. In addition, when the jackpot game ends, it is set to off.

  The first change stop flag 203 q is a flag indicating that the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is determined to be a hit while the first special symbol is in a change display. In a second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 21, S717) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later, it is set to ON. Further, in the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 19, S603), the variable display of the first special symbol is set to OFF when the temporary stop processing is performed.

  The second stop flag 203 r is a flag indicating that the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is determined to be a hit while the second special symbol is variably displayed. In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S <b> 407) to be executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later, the flag is set to ON. Further, in the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 23, S 803), the variable display of the second special symbol is set to OFF when the temporary stop process is executed.

  The first variation time storage area 203s is a storage area where the variation time of the first special symbol is counted (measured). The first variation time storage area 203s counts the variation time (counts the number of interrupts) when the first special symbol is displayed for variation display, and the variation time (2 ms in one interruption) is measured.

  The second variation time storage area 203t is a storage area where the variation time of the second special symbol is counted (measured). When the second special symbol is started to change, the second change time storage area 203t counts the change time (counts the number of interrupts), and the change time (2 ms in one interrupt) is measured.

  In the present embodiment, the first variation time storage area 203s and the second variation time storage area 203t measure the variation time by counting the number of interrupts, but the invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the time measurement data may be acquired as needed to measure the fluctuation time. In addition, it is also possible to store the fluctuation time in which the fluctuation display is performed in advance and to subtract that value as needed.

  The rearrangement reserve storage area 203u is the first special symbol reserve ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserve ball storage area 203b in the first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second pre-reading process (FIG. 27, S 914). Storage area in which each determination result determined based on each data of reservation areas 1 to 4 stored in is stored.

  FIG. 9A is a view schematically showing the rearrangement hold storage area 203 u. Reordering storage area 203u corresponds to the pending data storage area in which each determination data corresponding to each suspension frequency of suspension areas 1 to 8 is stored, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol during variation display And each determination data is stored in the during-changing data storage area.

  In each reserve area 1 to 8 of pending data, a success / failure determination result storage area 203u1, a big hit type storage area 203u2, a variation pattern type storage area 203u3, a variation order storage area 203u4, a variation start time storage area 203u5, a prefetch probability change flag 203u6 Are provided respectively. The storage areas 1 to 8 are sequentially stored from the storage area 1 in the order in which the respective storage balls are established (the overall formation order in which the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b are combined). That is, with the pachinko machine 10, the holding areas 1 to 8 combine the holding ball of the first special symbol and the holding ball of the second special symbol, and indicate the formation order in which the holding ball is established.

  In the variable display data storage area, in correspondence with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a pass / fail judgment result storage area 203u1, a big hit type storage area 203u2, a variation pattern storage area 203u3, and a prefetch probability change flag 203u6 are provided respectively. It is done.

  Judgment result storage area 203u1 is the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second pre-reading process (FIG. 27, S 914). Is a storage area in which the result of the determination in advance of the success or failure of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in is stored.

  The jackpot type storage area 203u2 is in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second pre-reading process (FIG. 27, S 914). It is a storage area in which the jackpot type determined by the stored special hit type counter C2 is stored.

  The variation pattern type storage area 203u3 is the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second pre-reading process (FIG. 27, S 914). The storage area is a storage area in which the type of the determined variation pattern is stored based on various data stored in. This variation pattern is data that can identify which variation pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the data of the holding area is either the first special symbol or the second special symbol It is also used as data to identify whether it is data of

  The variable display order storage area 203u4 is the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second pre-reading process (FIG. 27, S 914). Is a storage area in which the actual variable display start order in the determined holding areas 1 to 8 is stored based on various data stored in the storage area. In addition, specifically, the fluctuation display start order is determined by calculating the fluctuation start time of the newly stored holding ball, and comparing it with the fluctuation start time of each holding ball stored in advance. .

  The variation start time storage area 203u5 is the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second pre-reading process (FIG. 27, S 914). Is a storage area in which the time until each data of the calculated reserve areas 1 to 8 actually starts variable display is stored based on the various data stored in. It should be noted that, when this fluctuation display start time is stored in the hold area, it is updated as needed in other processing (S112) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110.

  It is predicted that the type of stored jackpot type storage area 203k2 is 15R probability variation jackpot or 2R probability variation jackpot in the first prefetch update process (FIG. 26, S933) to be described later (predetermined (predicted) Storage area that is set to ON and stored. In addition, every time data is shifted to and stored in the upper reservation area, all the areas before the shift are cleared to 0, so that the pre-read probability change flag storage area 203 u 6 is set to off. That is, the pre-read probability variation flag storage area 203u6, which has been set to ON once, is shifted to the in-fluctuation data storage area, and is overwritten by (shifted) new data in the in-fluctuation data storage area. . In addition, in the state where the game machine is powered on and the process of clearing the RAM is executed, the initial value is set to off.

  When power failure occurs in the pachinko machine 10, each piece of data in the sorting reserve storage area 203u is backed up and stored in a backup area (not shown) of the RAM 203. Then, when the power is turned on again, it is read out from the stored backup area and set.

  The other memory area 203v is an area for temporarily storing and storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110.

  As described above, when the game ball is won in the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b and a holding ball is generated, each of the holding balls according to the formation order of the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b. Various determination data of the holding ball are stored. Therefore, the winning a prize command is generated based on the sorting reserve storage area 203u, and the voice lamp control device 113 establishes the holding combining the first special symbol and the second special symbol based on the winning command. A command to be output to the display control device 114 can be generated so as to perform the hold symbol display in order. Therefore, it is possible to display the holding symbol display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 in the holding order of holding the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  Further, since the variable display start order of each hold is also determined and stored in relation to the establishment order, the voice lamp control device 113 is also received by generating a winning command based on the variable display start order. Based on the win command, it is possible to determine the holding order of each hold and the actual variable display start order.

  In addition, since the fluctuation start time of each hold is stored in each hold area, and the time is managed (updated as time passes), it is easy to start the fluctuation display start order of the newly stored hold data. It can be determined.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is opened and closed forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display portion 88, and the specified winning opening 65a as an axis. A solenoid 209 composed of a large opening solenoid for driving the motor or a solenoid for driving the motorized part is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including switches and sensors (not shown), and a RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115 described later. Various processing is executed based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 22) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation stop handle 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is off (condition that it is not operated), the operation handle The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33, the display lamp 34), Setting control of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as variable display). The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main control unit 110, the display control unit 114, the audio output unit 226, the lamp display unit 227, the vibration sensor 228, the frame button 22 and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and displays the winning order displayed in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 when the frame button 22 is operated by the player. The voice output device 226 is controlled to instruct the display control device 114 so that the reserved symbol display being displayed is rearranged and displayed in the order of the variable display start.

  Further, the vibration sensor 228 is attached to the back surface of the game board 213. In the pachinko machine 10, since winning in the winning opening is an important factor in determining the gaming state, it is necessary to change the flow of balls by vibration and to prevent the winning in the winning opening intentionally. Therefore, when it is determined from the output of the vibration sensor 228 that the player or the like has given vibration to the pachinko machine 10, an error command for transmitting the vibration error is transmitted to the display control device 114. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and includes an error type including an error type. It transmits to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to an error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

  The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a command storage area 223a, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b1, a second special symbol holding ball number counter 223b2, a first change start flag 223c1, a second change start flag 223c2, a second 1 stop type selection flag 223d1, second stop type selection flag 223d2, second variation stop flag 223e, second variation stop flag 223f, first variation resume flag 223g, second variation resume flag 223h, first variation A variation time storage area 223i, a second variation time storage area 223j, a second post-sorting storage area 223k, and another memory area 223m are provided.

  The command storage area 223a is an area temporarily stored until various commands output from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113 are processed. In detail, it is configured by a ring buffer, and data read / write is performed by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 36) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination process is performed. , And the command is analyzed and processing according to the command is performed.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b1 is, like the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203a of the main control unit 110, the first special performed in the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81) It is a counter which is a fluctuation display (dynamic display) of a symbol and counts the number of holding balls (the number of waits) of the fluctuation display effect held in the main control unit 110 up to four times.

  The second special symbol holding ball number counter 223b2 is, like the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203a of the main control unit 110, the second special performed in the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81) It is a counter which is a fluctuation display (dynamic display) of a symbol and counts the number of holding balls (the number of waits) of the fluctuation display effect held in the main control unit 110 up to four times.

  The first fluctuation start flag 223c1 is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is set to ON when the first fluctuation pattern command for notifying of the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. (FIG. 36, S1502). On the other hand, when the setting of the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 is made (FIG. 38, S1602).

  The second fluctuation start flag 223c2 is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is set to ON when the second fluctuation pattern command for notifying the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. (FIG. 36, S1505). On the other hand, when the setting of the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 is made (FIG. 38, S1602).

  The first stop type selection flag 223d1 is set to ON when the first stop type command for notifying the change stop type of the first special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received (FIG. 36, S1508). On the other hand, it is turned off when the setting of the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 is made (FIG. 38, S1612).

  The second stop type selection flag 223d2 is set to ON when the second stop type command for notifying the change stop type of the second special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received (FIG. 36, S1508). On the other hand, it is turned off when the setting of the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 is made (FIG. 38, S1612).

  The first variation stop flag 223e is a flag indicating that the first special symbol is temporarily stopped. When the temporary first fluctuation stop command is received from the main control device 110, it is set to ON (FIG. 36, S1516). On the other hand, when processing for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is executed, it is set to be off (FIG. 39, S1702).

  The second variation stop flag 223f is a flag indicating that the second special symbol is temporarily stopped. When the temporary second fluctuation stop command is received from the main control device 110, it is set to ON (FIG. 36, S1516). On the other hand, when the processing for stopping the variation display of the second special symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is executed, it is set to be off (FIG. 39, S1706).

  The first variation resuming flag 223g is a flag indicating that the variation display of the first special symbol that has been temporarily stopped is resumed. When the first special symbol variation restart command is received from the main control unit 110, the sub first restart flag 223g is set to ON (FIG. 36, S1518). On the other hand, when the process of restarting the variable display of the first special symbol of the third symbol display device 81 is executed, it is set to be off (FIG. 39, S1710).

  The second variation resumption flag 223h is a flag indicating that the variation display of the second special symbol that has been temporarily stopped is resumed. When the second special symbol variation restart command is received from the main control unit 110, the second restart flag 223h is set to ON (FIG. 36, S1518). On the other hand, when the process of restarting the variable display of the second special symbol of the third symbol display device 81 is executed, it is set to be off (FIG. 39, S1714).

  The first variation time storage area 223i is a storage area in which a value obtained by measuring the variation time of the first special symbol is stored. This storage area is stored at a value synchronized with the first variation time storage area 203 s of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110. Based on the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, 1 is added every 1 ms and the fluctuation time actually displayed is stored.

  The second variation time storage area 223j is a storage area in which a value obtained by measuring the variation time of the second special symbol is stored. This storage area is stored at a value synchronized with the second fluctuation time storage area 203t of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110. Based on the variation display start of the second special symbol, 1 is added every 1 ms, and the variation time actually changed and stored is stored.

  As shown in FIG. 9 (b), the secondary sort reserve storage area 223k has data similar to the sort reserve storage area 203u of the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 based on the winning command output from the main controller 110. Is a storage area stored based on the winning command output from the main control unit 110 to the sound lamp control unit 113.

  FIG. 9B is a view schematically showing the sub sort reserve storage area 223 k. The follow sort reserve storage area 223k stores various data of the first special symbol and the second special symbol while being variably displayed by the third symbol display device 81 and the reserve area for pending data from the reserve area 1 to the reserve area 8 And a storage area of data during variable display. The respective reserve areas are a success / failure determination result storage area 223k1, a big hit type storage area 223k2, a variation pattern type storage area 223k3, a variation order storage area 223k4, a variation start time storage area 223k5, a second reading probability variation flag storage area 223k6, a sorting flag 223k7 The respective data extracted from the received winning command are stored in the corresponding reserved area. In addition, each time the display variation pattern command for starting the variation display of the special symbol is generated, the data of the reserve area of the follow sort reserve storage area 223k is shifted and stored in the immediately preceding reserve area. In addition, in the case of the first special symbol, the hold data of the reserve area 1 is in the storage area of the first special symbol in the changing data storage area, and in the case of the second special symbol, the second special symbol in the changing data The data are respectively shifted and stored in the storage area.

  Judgment result storage area 223k1 is the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second pre-reading process (FIG. 27, S 914). It is a storage area that is extracted and stored from the received winning command as a result of having determined in advance whether the special hit random number counter C1 stored in the data has passed or not. Information on the result of determination of success or failure extracted from the winning command is one of the results of determination of result on or off of the holding areas 1 to 8 corresponding to the number of holding times (the corresponding holding area of the rearrangement holding memory area 203u of the main controller 110). It is stored in 223k1.

  The jackpot type storage area 223k2 is in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second pre-reading process (FIG. 27, S 914). It is a storage area that is extracted and stored from the received winning command, the jackpot type determined by the stored special hit type counter C2.

  The variation pattern type storage area 223k3 is the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second pre-reading process (FIG. 27, S 914). It is a storage area stored by extracting the type of the determined fluctuation pattern from the received winning command based on various data stored in. This variation pattern is data that can identify which variation pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the data of the holding area is either the first special symbol or the second special symbol It is also used as data to identify whether it is data of

  The variation order storage area 223k4 is in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second pre-reading process (FIG. 27, S 914). This is a storage area which is extracted and stored from the received winning command based on the stored various data and the actual change display start order in the determined holding areas 1 to 8.

  The variation start time storage area 223k5 is the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second pre-reading process (FIG. 27, S 914). Based on various data stored in the storage area, the time until each data of the reserved areas 1 to 8 actually calculated starts changing display from the received winning command is a storage area to be stored . Note that this variable display start time is updated as needed in the hold number display process (FIG. 35, S1406) of the main process (FIG. 35, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 when stored in the hold area. Ru.

  In the present embodiment, the winning command is a command indicating the time until the calculated data of each of the holding areas 1 to 8 actually start fluctuating display, but the invention is not limited thereto. Each counter value for calculating time (for example, the kind of the selected fluctuation pattern, the counter value for calculating the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol during fluctuation (such as the number of interruptions)) and the start of fluctuation display It is good also as a command corresponding to time until it becomes.

  The secondary reading probability change flag storage area 223k6 is a storage area that is set to ON and stored when the type of the stored big hit type storage area 223k2 is 15R probability variation big hit or 2R probability variation big hit.

  The sorting flag 223k7 indicates that the player is the holding symbol (the holding symbol display displayed when the frame button 22 is operated) for which the player has requested the sorting of the holding symbol display by operating the frame button 22. It is a flag.

  As described above, when the game ball is won in the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63a and a holding ball is generated, the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b are based on the data extracted from the winning command. The various determination data of each holding ball are memorize | stored according to the formation order of the holding ball which put together. Therefore, the display control device is such that the voice lamp control device 113 performs the holding symbol display in the holding order of holding the first special symbol and the second special symbol based on the data of the follow sort holding storage area 223k. A command to be output to 114 can be generated. Therefore, it is possible to display the holding symbol display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 in the holding order of holding the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  In addition, based on the winning command, the follow sort hold storage area 223k is updated with data synchronized with the sort hold storage area 203u of the main control unit 110, and there is a change in hold data (new hold being established, etc.) Also, data can be synchronized and updated sequentially.

  The other memory area 223 m is an area for temporarily storing and storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch (see FIG. 3, 122) (see FIG. 3). And a RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and a backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is outputted to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 22) properly.

  When a power failure occurs, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 stores each data of the reordering storage area 203 u as backup data in the backup area of the RAM 203. Then, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 again, each backed up data of the rearrangement suspension storage area 203u is read out from the backup area, and each corresponding suspension area of the rearrangement suspension storage area 203u or being changed It is stored in the data storage area.

  Then, in the start-up process (FIG. 32), similar to the winning command generated in the first pre-reading update process (FIG. 26, S939), based on the reordering storage area 203u stored and read back up data. All the winning commands are generated and output to the voice lamp control device 113, whereby data synchronized with the same sorting storage area 203u is set in the secondary sorting storage area 223k.

  Further, in the start-up process (FIG. 32), by transmitting a prize command to the voice lamp control device 113, the data of the sorting reserve storage area 203u and the secondary sort reserve storage area 223k are also recovered from the time of power failure. Although the configuration for synchronizing has been described, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 backs up each data of the slave sort reserving storage area 223k to the RAM 223 when a power failure occurs as well as the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Naturally, it may be stored as

  The RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 has the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) (see FIG. 3) depressed when the power is turned on (power is applied while pressing the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122)). In this case, it is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

  The MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 executes control processing such as detection of winning of special symbols and ordinary symbols, and various lotterys such as winning and selection of fluctuation patterns for the winnings. Therefore, the control load of the MPU 201 is large, and in order to stably execute control of the pachinko machine 10, as in the present embodiment, the lottery of whether to set the game operation suggestion setting is sub-controlled The control load of the main control device 110 can be lightened by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 corresponding to the device.

  The control substrate of the main controller 110 and the audio lamp controller 113 is covered by a box called a substrate box, which is formed of a transparent plastic base member and a lid member. The substrate box is crimped by a member for preventing fraud called a "sealing member" so that the base member and the lid member can not be easily separated. Generally, when the base member and the lid member are fitted together, the sealing member inserts a pin-shaped sealing member into a through hole provided through a part of the base member and the lid member (? It is difficult to separate the base member and the lid member only by a method that leaves an opening mark such as whether the member forming the through hole is broken or the sealing member is broken by clamping. .

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a ROM 234, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241.

  The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via a bus line 240. An output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. In addition, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, even if the pachinko machine 10 is another model in which the jackpot lottery probability and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot are different models, the model of the specification with exactly the same symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Since the display control device 114 is a common part, cost reduction is achieved.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the ROM 234, and the image controller 237 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described. First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, various processes are executed according to the control program stored in the ROM 234.

  As described above, the ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the ROM 234 after system reset release via the bus line 240, and executes the control program stored in the ROM 234. The ROM 234 is connected to the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the ROM 234 to the work RAM 233. The MPU 231 outputs the image data transferred to the work RAM 233 to the third symbol display device 81 as needed, and performs display control of the third symbol display device 81.

  When the game ball enters the distribution device 630 and is distributed by the passive distribution member 640 and the game ball is won in the first starting opening 63a, each counter value (C1 to C3 and CS1) is acquired and acquired After the lottery and the determination of the fluctuation pattern and the like are performed based on the respective counter values, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol corresponding to the first lottery game is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 Variable display (dynamic display). In addition, when the game ball enters the distribution device 630 during the variable display of the first special symbol, the game ball is distributed by the passive distribution device 640 and wins the second starting opening 63b. When the game ball wins in the second starting opening 63b, each counter value (C1 to C3) is displayed for fluctuating display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second lottery play machine, as in the case of winning in the first starting opening 63a. And CS1) are acquired, and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured to be simultaneously variable display by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, respectively. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37, in the 7-segment LED on the left side of the two 7-segment LEDs of the 7-segment display 37b, the variation display corresponding to the first special symbol is executed, and the 7 on the right In the segment LED, the variable display corresponding to the second special symbol is executed.

  Further, in the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 5A, the variable display corresponding to the first special symbol is executed on the left side display area Dm1, and the second special on the right side display area Dm2. The variable display corresponding to the symbol is executed. By configuring in this manner, variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed, and the player can efficiently execute the first lottery game and the second lottery game. .

  When the game ball wins in the first starting opening 63a while the first special symbol is variably displayed (the remaining fluctuation time is set), the respective counter values (C1 to C3 and CS1) acquired based on the winnings Since the first lottery game for variably displaying the lottery result can not be executed immediately, each counter value is stored (stored) in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. When each counter value is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, an aspect (for example, one of the holding number "1" of the first special symbols of the plurality of light emitting diodes 37a of the first symbol display device 37) The light emitting diode lights up in red). When each counter value is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is updated (the number of holding balls is incremented by 1).

  When each counter value is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 outputs a winning command to the voice lamp control device 113. In the winning command, it is possible to identify which of the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b the winning is to be made, and it is possible to identify what number of holding balls (holding number).

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the prize command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the pending information such as the number of pending items and information about the starting opening which has won from the received command, and based on the pending information, the third symbol display device A process of displaying a reserved symbol in the reserved symbol display area (Ds1 to Ds8) corresponding to the lower display region Ds at 81 is executed. If this holding symbol is a holding symbol corresponding to the holding information of the first special symbol (the first starting opening 63a) as shown in FIG. 5 (b), the "特別" is the second special symbol (the second starting symbol (the second starting symbol). If it is a holding symbol corresponding to the holding information of the mouth 63b), "●" is displayed for each holding information (one holding symbol for one holding symbol) if it is a holding symbol.

  Similarly, while the second special symbol is variably displayed (the remaining fluctuation time is set), when the game ball wins in the second starting opening 63b, each counter value is acquired, and the second special symbol holding ball storage area The value is stored (stored) in 203b, and the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f is updated. Then, the holding symbol indicating that the holding information is stored is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  The reserved symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are displayed in a comprehensive winning order in which the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b are combined with the game balls that have won. One example shown in FIG. 12 will be specifically described. First, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are in a variable display, the first special symbol has a remaining 10s variation time, and the second special symbol has a remaining 5s variation time. It shows. In the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81, a pending symbol “in the pending symbol display area Ds1 indicating that it is the pending information of the second special symbol (pending information based on winning in the second starting opening 63b)“ ● "" indicates that the holding symbol display area Ds2 is the holding information of the first special symbol The holding symbol "○" indicates that the holding symbol display area Ds3 is the holding information of the second special symbol " A held symbol “o” indicating that “●” is the held information of the first special symbol is displayed in the held symbol display area Ds4. In this case, it is shown that the order of holding symbol display area Ds4 is from the holding symbol display area Ds1 in order from the holding symbol display area Ds1 in the order in which the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b are won.

  In other words, after the game ball wins in the second start opening 63b, it wins in the first start opening 63a, and then the game ball wins in the second start opening 63b and then the first start opening 63a. It shows that it did.

  As shown in FIG. 12, in each reserve data, the variation time of the variation pattern selected when the suspension becomes the variation start is predicted and stored in advance (the type of the variation pattern to be determined is stored) Has been Then, since it is the suspension of the second special symbol stored in the winning order first (the reserve area 1 is appropriate in the rearrangement suspension storage area 203u), the remaining of the second special symbol currently displayed in a variable display When the fluctuation time (5 s) elapses, the fluctuation display start time is calculated to be 5 seconds after, since the fluctuation display starts. Also, since it is the suspension of the first special symbol that is stored in the second winning order (in the rearrangement suspension storage area 203u, the suspension area 2 is appropriate), the remainder of the first special symbol currently displayed in a variable display When the fluctuation time (10 s) elapses, the fluctuation display start time is calculated to be 10 seconds after, since the fluctuation display starts. Next, since it is the suspension of the second special symbol that is stored in the third winning order (in the rearrangement suspension storage area 203u, the suspension area 3 is appropriate), the second special symbol currently displayed in a variable display When the fluctuation time (40 s) of the suspension data stored first in the winning sequence elapses in the remaining fluctuation time (5 s), the fluctuation display start time is calculated, so the fluctuation display start time is calculated to be 45 seconds later. Next, since it is the suspension of the first special symbol that is stored in the fourth winning sequence (in the rearrangement suspension storage area 203u, the suspension area 4 is appropriate), the first special symbol currently displayed in variation is When the fluctuation time (10 s) of the suspension data stored second in the winning order elapses in the remaining fluctuation time (10 s), the fluctuation display start time is calculated, so the fluctuation display start time is calculated to be 20 seconds later.

  In this manner, the fluctuation display start time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is calculated in the order of establishment in the sorting reserve storage area 203u, and the fluctuation display start time is, in ascending order, based on the fluctuation display start time. And the variable display order is assigned.

  When the player operates the frame button 22 at this timing, the holding symbol display of the third symbol display device 81 is shown in the sort display mode shown in FIG. The symbol display is rearranged with the reserved symbol display of the second special symbol in the winning order third (the winning symbol display of the fourth winning order is cut in front of the reserved symbol display of the winning order third) and displayed.

  FIG. 13 shows that the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 performs the first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second pre-reading process (FIG. 25) when the gaming ball is won in the first starting opening 63 a 1s after the state of FIG. 27, it is the figure which showed typically the process which determines the fluctuation | variation display start order of the retention symbol newly memorize | stored in S914).

  Since FIG. 13 shows the state after 1 s from FIG. 12, the first special symbol in the variation display has a remaining variation time of 9 s, and the second special symbol has a remaining variation time of 4 s. In addition, the fluctuation start time of each reserve area of the sort reserve storage area 203u is also updated.

  Holding of the newly established first starting opening 63a (first special symbol) is the fifth winning order, and each data is stored in the holding area 5 in the rearrangement holding storage area 203u. First, the same as the newly stored first special symbol, the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the fluctuation display, and the fluctuation fluctuation time of the first special symbol of winning order 2 and 4 are newly added, respectively. The time when the hold of the first special symbol that has been established (stored) becomes the variable display start is calculated (in this case, 24 s).

  Next, as shown in the rearrangement schematic diagram of FIG. 13, the post-reordering order (variation display start order) is added in the order of the start of the fluctuation display based on the fluctuation display start time of each reserve area. At this time, when the player operates the frame button 22 to request the sorting of the reserved symbol display, as shown in the display mode after sorting in FIG. 13, the winning symbol fourth and fifth reserved symbols are displayed. Is rearranged with the third winning symbol display in the winning order (the fourth and fifth winning symbol displays in the winning order are cut in front of the third pending symbol display in the winning order) and displayed.

  In this manner, each time a suspension occurs, the variable display start time is calculated, and the sort order is determined, whereby the player performs an operation (the operation of the frame button 22) to request the sort. In the case of having made, it is possible to quickly display the reserved symbol display after sorting.

  Also, the fluctuation patterns of the 15R probability variation jackpot and the 15R normal jackpot tend to be longer than the fluctuation patterns selected when the variation time is out. As shown in FIG. 13, the first hold of the winning order has a long fluctuation time of 40 seconds. Therefore, the holding of the same second special symbol established after that, the variable display start time will be later than the holding of the first special symbol established later, and if reordering, a long fluctuation time is selected Behind the held symbol display, a type (difference between the first special symbol and the second special symbol) different from the hold whose long fluctuation time is selected is displayed collectively. Therefore, the more the number of the held symbol display displayed by cutting into the subsequent held symbol display area of the held symbol display, the more the player holds the expectation of the big hit for the previous held symbol display, and the player Sorting can be done with the expectation of a jackpot. Therefore, the interest in the game increases and the game can be continued without getting tired.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process (FIG. 32) activated upon power-on and a main process (FIG. 33, S1200) executed after the startup process (this embodiment) There is a timer interrupt process (Fig. 14) activated in 2 ms cycle) and an NMI interrupt process (Fig. 31) activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. The timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the start-up process (FIG. 32) and the main process (FIG. 33, S1200) will be described.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. As the MPU 201 executes this timer interrupt process, various processes to be performed periodically are performed.

  In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S101). In the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) and the main process (FIG. 33, S1200), a command etc. to be transmitted to the payout control device 111, the audio lamp control device 113, etc. is generated based on various processes. It temporarily stores in the ring buffer for command transmission. In the external output process of S101, output data such as a command stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side.

  For example, the ball holding ball number command set in the start winning process (S108 in FIG. 24) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, the determination command and the like set in the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  Next, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S102), and then, the special winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened or closed in the big hit state. A large opening opening / closing process is performed (S103). That is, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has passed or whether the specified winning opening 65a has a prescribed number of balls. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning hole 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning hole 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds.

  Next, the processing for reading various winning switches is executed (S104). That is, while reading the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, the state of the switches is determined to store detection information (winning detection information). Further, based on the winning detection information, a prize ball command corresponding to the acquired ball number to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. As a result, the winning ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process to be executed next.

  Next, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S105). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1 and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), and the updated value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is changed to the RAM 203. In the corresponding counter buffer area.

  Further, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the variation pattern determination counter C3, the change type counter CS1, and the normal hit random number counter C4 are updated (S106). Specifically, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the variation pattern determination counter C3, the stop type counter CS1, and the normal hit random number counter C4 are respectively incremented by 1, and their counter values are maximum In the embodiment, when reaching 399, 99, 100, 198, 239), they are cleared to 0 respectively. Also, when the special per-random number counter C1 or the per-normal random number counter C4 makes one revolution, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 or the common initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is the special per-random number counter C1 or the per-normal random number counter The initial value of C4 is read, and the initial value is set to the special random number counter C1 or the ordinary random number counter C4. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a process for displaying the first special symbol and the second special symbol by the first symbol display device 37, and a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, etc. (S107), and then, a start winning process is executed in association with the winning of the first start opening 63a or the second start opening 63b (S108). The details of the special symbol variation process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIG. 15, and the details of the start winning process (S108) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After executing the start winning process (S108), execute the normal symbol variation process which is the variation process of the normal symbol for the game ball having passed the normal symbol starting opening 67 (S109), and then the normal symbol starting aperture 67 Through gate processing for the game ball having passed (S10). The details of the normal symbol variation processing (S109) will be described later with reference to FIG. 29, and the details of the through gate processing (S110) will be described later with reference to FIG. A launch control process for executing control relating to the launch of the game ball is executed (S111), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S112), and the timer interrupt process is ended. In the launch control process (S111), the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the ball is released under the condition that the strike stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of the firing. Then, when the ball firing is on, the information of the ball firing signal is set in the command transmitting ring buffer provided in the work RAM 203 in order to send the ball firing signal to the firing control device 112. As a result, the ball emission signal is transmitted to the emission control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the processing of S101 of the timer interruption process to be executed next.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 15, the special symbol variation process (S107) which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S107). The special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) performs various determinations and determinations on the first special symbol and the second special symbol based on the acquired counter values, and the variation display determined by the predetermined control In the aspect, the variable display can be simultaneously controlled by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, or the control of stopping display in the display mode indicating the determination result is executed. The special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) will be described below.

  In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107), it is first determined whether or not a jackpot game is in progress (S201). If it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S201: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (S201: No), it is determined whether the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S202). When it is determined that the variable display of the first special symbol is being performed (S202: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process is executed (S204). The first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 17, S204) will be described in detail later, but when the specified fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the fluctuation display has elapsed, a symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game The process of stopping the variable display and the second special symbol is stopped by the symbol indicating the big hit, and when the jackpot game of the second lottery game is executed, the process of temporarily stopping the first special symbol in the variable display Is executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not in the variable display (S202: No), the first special symbol variation start process is executed (S203). The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203) will be described in detail later, but when the first special symbol is temporarily stopped, while processing for resuming the variable display is executed, the temporary stop If the first special symbol holding ball number storage area 203a does not store holding data (various counter values), the jackpot determination based on the holding data and the selection process of the variation pattern are executed. .

  After the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S107) is executed, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is being variably displayed (S205). When it is determined that the second special symbol is in the variable display mode, the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 23, S207) is executed. The second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 23, S207) will be described in detail later, but similarly to the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 19, S204), the specified fluctuation of the second special symbol during the fluctuation display When time passes, the process of stopping the fluctuation display with the symbol indicating the determination result of the second lottery game and the fluctuation display being stopped with the first special symbol indicating the jackpot, the jackpot game of the first lottery game is executed When being done, processing of temporarily stopping the second special symbol in the variable display is executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special symbol is not in the variable display mode, the second special symbol variation start process is executed (S206). This second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 20, S206) will be described later in detail, but, similar to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203), the second special symbol is temporarily stopped. Is the process of resuming the variable display while the temporary data (various counter values) is stored in the second special symbol holding ball number storage area 203b when it is not temporarily stopped, The jackpot determination based on the pending data and the selection process of the variation pattern are executed. Thereafter, this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the first special symbol variation start process (S203), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107), will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (S203).

  In the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203), first, it is determined whether the first special symbol is temporarily stopped (S301). Whether or not the first special symbol is temporarily stopped is determined by whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped although the variation time (variation pattern) is set. . If it is determined that the first special symbol is temporarily stopped (S301: Yes), the measurement of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is resumed (S302). For the variation time of this first special symbol, when the variation pattern etc. is selected when the variation display etc. is started in the first special symbol variation display selection process (FIG. 18, S310) described later. The measurement start of the fluctuation time is set to. When the variation pattern is selected, a variation pattern command is output to the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation display of the first special symbol is started. Further, the main control device 110 starts variable display of the first special symbol of the first display device 37 accordingly. The variable display of the first special symbol (the 7-segment LED on the left side of the 7-segment display 37b) in the first symbol display device 37 is resumed (S303). A first special symbol variation restart command is set to instruct the voice lamp control device 113 to resume variable display of the first special symbol during temporary stop (S304). Thereafter, this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not temporarily stopped (S301: No), the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is acquired (S305). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S306). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S306: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S308) . A process of sequentially shifting data stored in the hold area 1 to the hold area 4 of the first special symbol hold ball number storage area 203a toward the execution area (S308). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in such a way as holding area 1 → execution area, holding area 2 → holding area 1, holding area 3 → holding area 2, holding area 4 → holding area 3 and so on.

  Next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S309). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309) will be described in detail later, the game is set based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 shifted to the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c Based on the state, a jackpot determination of whether or not a jackpot is performed. When it is determined that the determination result is a big hit, the second fluctuation stop flag 203r is set to on. Thereby, it is possible to recognize that the big hit game is started after the first special symbol is variably displayed and stopped and displayed, and the second special symbol in the variably displayed can be temporarily suspended during the jackpot game of the first special symbol. It can be done.

  Next, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S310). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 18, S310) will be described later in detail, but based on the result of the pass / fail determination based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c. Is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on each counter value.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S309), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203), will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S309).

  In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c is acquired (S401). It is determined whether the gaming state is a high probability gaming state (during a definite change) (S402). Whether the gaming state is the high probability gaming state or not is determined depending on whether the probability change flag 203m is set to on. When it is determined that the probability change flag 203m is on (that is, the gaming state is high probability gaming state (during a definite change)) (S402: Yes), based on the special symbol big hit random number table 202a for high probability, It is determined whether the value of the special winning random number counter C1 matches the large hitting random number value, and the lottery result is obtained (S403). On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability change flag 203m is off (that is, the gaming state is not the low probability gaming state (not positive variation)) (S402: No), the special symbol big hit random number table 202a for low probability Based on the determination, it is determined whether the value of the special winning random number counter C1 matches the jackpot random number value, and the lottery result is acquired (S404).

  It is determined whether the lottery result is a jackpot (S405). If it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot (S405: Yes), the second fluctuation stop flag 203r is set to ON (S407). Thereby, in the big hit determination of the first special symbol, the determination result becomes a big hit, and when the variation display of the first special symbol notifying the determination result is stopped and displayed, temporarily if the second special symbol is changing. The variable display will be stopped.

  In this way, by setting the second fluctuation stop flag 203r to ON before the start of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, at the time of the fluctuation table stop of the first special symbol, whether to make the temporary stop of the second special symbol As compared with the case where it is judged whether or not it is possible to prevent the problem that the control processing is concentrated at the time of the fluctuation stop.

  A big hit symbol is set in the first symbol display device 37 based on the acquired value of the special hit type counter C2, and the first jackpot flag 203o is set on (S408). Thereby, in the first symbol display device 37, a symbol based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 (for example, "7" for 15R probability variation jackpot) is set to the left 7-segment LED of the 7-segment display 37b .

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result is off (S405: No), the first symbol display device 37 is detached and the symbol is set (S409). In the present embodiment, in the case of detachment, “−” indicating detachment is set to the left 7-segment LED of the 7-segment display 37 b of the first symbol display device 37. Here, each symbol set in the first symbol display device 37 is a process for setting a symbol to be displayed in a stopped state when the variable display is stopped.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S310), which is one of the first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 16, S203), will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S310).

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 18, S310), first, it is determined whether the result determined in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309) is a big hit (S310) ). The determination of whether or not the jackpot is made is determined by whether or not the first jackpot flag 203o is set to on. If it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON (S501: Yes), the special hit variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the game state is set (S502). When the gaming state is the normal gaming state (in the low probability gaming state and not in the time saving mode), the normal time special winning variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10A) is set. Further, when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state or the short time (the time reduction counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving / probability changing special hit variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11A) is set.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is off (S501: No), the special out-of-order variation pattern table according to the gaming state is set. When the gaming state is the normal gaming state (in the low probability gaming state and not in the time saving mode), the normal special off variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10 (b)) is set. Further, when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state or the short time (time reduction counter 203k is larger than 0), the time reduction / probability variation special deviation variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11B) is set.

  The jackpot type table is determined according to the jackpot type based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 (S504). The jackpot classification table is composed of a 15R jackpot table and a 2R jackpot table, the 15R jackpot table is determined in the case of 15R probability jackpot and 15R regular jackpot, and the 2R jackpot table is determined in the case of 2R probability jackpot . Based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol suspension execution area 203c, the fluctuation pattern type is selected (decided) from the selected fluctuation pattern table (S505).

  The variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3 (S506). Here, a variation pattern command for notifying the selected variation pattern to the audio lamp control device 113 is also set. The first stop type command is set based on the determined stop type (S507). The measurement start of the first variation time, which is the variation time of the first special symbol, is set.

  By starting measurement of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol together with the setting of fluctuation pattern command, the fluctuation time can be measured at the same time as the fluctuation start of the first special symbol, and the fluctuation time can be measured, and the fluctuation time is measured accurately can do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the first special symbol variation stop processing (S204), which is one of the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 15, S107), will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation stop process (S204).

  In the first special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 19, S204), first, it is determined whether the first variation stop flag 203q is set to ON (S601). If it is determined that the first change stop flag 203 q is set to ON (S601: Yes), it is determined whether the change time of the second special symbol is the end time (S602). If it is determined that the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is the end time (S602: Yes), a temporary first fluctuation stop command is issued to instruct the voice lamp control device 113 to temporarily stop the first special symbol. The first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is temporarily stopped, and the first fluctuation stop flag 203 q is set to be off (S 603). Then, the measurement of the first variation time is interrupted (S604).

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to temporarily stop the first special symbol as well as the timing at which the second special symbol is stopped changing with the determination symbol that is a hit. Thus, the player can play the game concentrating on the jackpot game in the second lottery game.

  Further, since the measurement of the first fluctuation time is also interrupted in accordance with the timing of the temporary stop, it is possible to accurately measure the remaining fluctuation time after the jackpot game.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the first special symbol is temporarily stopped, the third symbol display device 81 stops the display mode in which the player can know that the first special symbol is temporarily stopped. Is displayed. Specifically, a character such as "The first special symbol is temporarily stopped" is displayed, or the player keeps changing display in the display mode in which the three main symbols on the left, center and right that make up the special symbol are shaken. Informing that the temporary stop is in progress. Moreover, the display mode which alert | reports temporary stop is not restricted to this, You may be notification modes other than that.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is not the end time (that is, fluctuation display is in progress) (S602: No), the processing of S605 is executed. If it is determined that the first change stop flag 203 q is off (S601: No), it is determined whether the change time of the first special symbol during the change display is the end time (S605).

  If it is determined that the variation time of the first special symbol is not the end time (S605: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation time of the first special symbol is the end time (S605: Yes), it is determined whether the first jackpot flag 203o is set (S606). If it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is set (S606: Yes), the probability variation flag 203m is set to OFF (S607). Various settings for the jackpot game are made based on the determined variation stop type (S 608). Specifically, in the case of 15R probability variation big hit, 15R normal big hit, the number of rounds where the big hit game is executed is set to 15 times, and the maximum opening time of the specified winning opening 65a in one round is set to 30s Ru. Further, in the case of the 2R probability variation jackpot, the number of rounds in which the jackpot game is executed is set to two, and the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a in one round is set to 2 s.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is off (S606: No), it is determined whether the time reduction counter 203k is a value larger than "0" (S609). If it is determined that the time saving counter 203k is a value larger than "0" (S609: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203 is decremented by 1 (S610). That is, the time saving counter 203k is decremented by one each time the first special symbol changes and is displayed once. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving counter 203k is a value smaller than 0 (that is, 0) (S609: No), the processing of S611 is executed.

  A first determination command instructing the sound lamp control device 113 to stop the change display of the first special symbol is set (S611). The first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the determined result of acceptance or rejection (S612). The value of the first fluctuation time storage area 203s is cleared to 0, and the first fluctuation time measurement value is cleared to 0 (S613). After this, this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the second special symbol variation start process (S206) which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation start process (S206).

  In the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 20, S206), the first special symbol for each of the processes from S301 to S310 with respect to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203) described above. , 1st fluctuation time measurement restart, 1st symbol display device 37, 1st special symbol fluctuation restart command, 1st special symbol holding ball number counter value (N1), 1st special symbol holding ball storage area, 1st special symbol In the jackpot determination process, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process in each process from S701 to S710, the second special symbol, the second variation time measurement resumption, the second symbol display device 37, the second special symbol holding ball number counter It is the same as the value (N2), the second special symbol holding ball storage area, the second special symbol jackpot determination process, and the second special symbol variation pattern selection process, except that they are respectively changed except that they are changed, so Substantially.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S709) which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 20, S206) will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S709).

  In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 21, S709), the first special symbol holding ball execution area for the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309) described above with respect to the processing of S401. In the process of S711, in the second special symbol holding ball execution area, the second variation stop flag and the first jackpot flag for each process from S407 to S408 are the first variation in each process from S717 to S718. The description is omitted because it is the same except that the stop flag and the second jackpot flag are respectively changed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the second special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S710), which is one of the second special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 20, S206), will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S710).

  In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22, S710), the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 18, S310) described above is the first for each of the processes from S507 to S508. The respective processes from the stop type command and the first fluctuation time measurement start to S727 to S728 are the same except that they are respectively changed to the first stop type command and the first fluctuation time measurement start, and therefore the explanation thereof is the same. I omit it.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the second special symbol variation stop processing (S207) which is one of the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 15, S107) will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation stop process (S207).

  In the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 23, S207), the first fluctuation stop with respect to each processing from S601 to S604 with respect to the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 19, S204) described above. In each process from S801 to S804, the flag, the first special symbol, the temporary first fluctuation stop command, and the first fluctuation time measurement suspension are the second fluctuation stop flag, the second special symbol, the temporary second fluctuation stop command, the second For each processing from S611 to S613, the first confirmation command, the first special symbol, and the first fluctuation time measurement value for each processing from S811 to S813 are changed to the suspension time measurement suspension, and the second confirmation command is performed. Since it is the same except that the second special symbol and the second variation time measurement value are respectively changed, the description is omitted.

  As described above, since the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the control of the second special symbol is independently and parallelly executable, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be simultaneously changed and displayed. It can be done. Therefore, it is possible to execute more special symbol lottery games within a predetermined time, and it is possible to increase the probability that a jackpot is given to the player within the predetermined time. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

  Moreover, compared with the pachinko machine 10 in which the lottery game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed by either one, the pachinko machine 10 has variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Even if it is relatively short, in either of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol becomes easy to be executed, and by raising the efficiency of the game, It is possible to suppress the problem that the state in which the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner is long.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the lottery game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed by either one, when the sorting device 630 is provided as in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time is relatively increased. If you do not shorten it, many overflows will not occur. However, as in the present embodiment, in the configuration in which the lottery game is performed with both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, even if the fluctuation having a long fluctuation time is selected, the fluctuation of the special symbol is also performed on the other Can be performed many times in a short time because of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to show the player an effect of a sufficient fluctuation time as needed, and to prevent the player from getting bored more with the game.

  In addition, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously changed and displayed and the lottery game is executed, if a big hit game occurs in one of the first or second special symbols, the other is selected. Since the variable display of the special symbol is temporarily stopped, the player can concentrate on the jackpot game and play the game.

  In addition, since the temporarily stopped special symbol is stopped in a display mode or a notification mode that shows the player that the temporary stop is in progress, the player can not lose the lottery game which was in the process of the variable display. It can be grasped and can play a big hit game in peace.

  In addition, since the sorting device 630 is provided in the pachinko machine 10, the first starting port 63a and the second starting port 63b are easily winning alternately, and the first starting port 63a or the second starting port 63a is configured. If the winning is biased to one of the openings 63b and the other starting opening with a small amount of holding is attempted to achieve a winning, the game ball also reaches the upper limit of the number of holdings in one starting opening 63a, 63b. It is possible to suppress the problem that many invalid balls are generated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the start winning process (S108) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S108). In the start winning process (FIG. 24, S108), it is determined whether or not the gaming ball has won in the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b, and when the winning is achieved, the hold upper limit number (first starting opening 63a, It is a process which stores each acquired counter value in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b up to 4) in each of the 2 starting openings 63b. In addition, when each counter value acquired based on the holding ball is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, respectively, the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a Or based on each counter value memorized by each of the 2nd special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, processing which predicts a success / failure determination result, a variation pattern selected, etc. in advance is performed. The start winning process (FIG. 24, S108) will be described below.

  In the start winning process (FIG. 24, S108), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won in the first start opening 63a (start winning) (S901). Here, the winning of the first starting opening 63a is detected. If it is determined that the ball has won in the first starting opening 63a (there is a starting winning) (S901: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is acquired (S902). It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S903). It is determined whether this is less than four, which is the upper limit value of the number of reservations for the first starting port 63a (that is, is the number of reservations being stored to the upper limit value). When it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S903: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e (S904). A ball holding ball number command for notifying the sounding lamp control device 113 of the number of holding balls is set (S 905). Each value of special hit random number counter C1, special hit type counter C2, fluctuation pattern judgment counter C3 and fluctuation type counter CS1 which are various counter values are read out (obtained) from the counter buffer, and the special symbol holding ball of RAM 203 is held. The special hit random number counter storage area 203c1, the special hit type counter storage area 203c2, the fluctuation pattern determination counter storage area 203c3 and the fluctuation type counter storage area 203c4 of the execution area 203c are respectively reserved (stored) (S906).

  Next, a first prefetch process is performed (S 907). The first read-ahead process (FIG. 25, S108) will be described in detail later, but the first special display is stored with the variable display start order based on the respective counter values newly stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. The combination of the symbol and the second special symbol is used to determine in advance what number it is in advance, and further, from the variation display order and each stored counter value, the result of determination of success or failure, the variation pattern to be determined, the stop type, etc. A process of determining

  Next, with respect to each processing of S908 to S914, the same processing as the processing performed for the winning of the gaming ball to the first starting opening 63a performed in each processing of S901 to S907 is the second processing. The only difference is that the process is performed for the starting opening 63b, so the detailed description will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the first prefetch process (S907) which is one process of the start winning process (S108 in FIG. 24) will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this first pre-reading process (S 907).

  In the first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S 907), first, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the variation which are various counter values from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol hold storage area 203a. The values of the pattern determination counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 are read out. The read data is stored in an area having the smallest winning order among the vacant storage areas of the sorting reserve storage area 203u, and variable display based on the newly stored suspension data (each counter value) is started The variable display start time is calculated (S922).

  This fluctuation start time, as shown in FIG. 12, is a special symbol in the fluctuation display corresponding to the newly stored holding data (if it is the holding data based on the first starting opening 63a, the first special symbol, the second If it is a reserve data based on the special symbol 63b, each reserve data previously stored is determined based on the remaining fluctuation time of the second special symbol) and the same starting opening 63a, 63b as the newly stored reserve data. It is calculated by adding the respective fluctuation time.

  Here, if the newly stored pending data is the pending data based on the first starting port 63a, the newly stored pending data is a previously held data based on the same starting port as the newly stored pending data. (Based on the first special symbol) pending data based on the first starting opening 63a stored in the first storage, while if the newly stored pending data is pending data based on the second starting opening 63b, it is stored first Data (corresponding to the second special symbol) based on the second start port 63b being held.

  When the variable display start time is calculated, the post-rearrangement order is renumbered in the ascending order of the variable display start time of all the suspension data stored in the rearrangement hold storage area 203 u (S 923). Here, with regard to the renumbering of the variable display start time, in the present embodiment, the renumbering is performed for all the pending data, but the present invention is not limited thereto. When the newly displayed variable data display start order of suspended data is interrupted by the variable data display start sequence of the previously stored data, it is natural that only the change order is renumbered. Good.

  It is determined whether or not the pre-read certainty change flag 203 u 6 immediately preceding the change display start order of the newly stored pending data is set to ON (S 924). If it is determined that the prefetching probability change flag 203 u 6 immediately before the fluctuation display start order of the newly stored reserved data is set to ON (S 924: Yes), the special symbol big hit random number for high probability time Based on the jackpot determination value of the table 202a, the success or failure of the first special symbol is predicted, and the determination result is stored in the corresponding rearrangement storage area 203u (S925). On the other hand, when it is determined that the prefetch read only change flag 203 u 6 immediately before the variable display start order of the newly stored reserved data is off (S 924: No), the special symbol big hit random number table for low probability time Based on the jackpot determination value of 202a, the success or failure of the first special symbol is predicted, and the determination result is stored in the corresponding rearrangement storage area 203u (S927).

  The first read ahead update process is executed (S926). The first prefetch update process (FIG. 26, S926) will be described in detail later, but in the order in which the variable display is actually started, the result of the pass / fail judgment of the hold data (various counter values) stored in the rearrangement hold storage area 203u. , The jackpot type (whether or not it is a positive change) and the change pattern (change time) are stored (updated).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the first prefetch update process (S926) which is one process of the first prefetch process (S907 in FIG. 25) will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this first prefetch update process (S926).

  In the first prefetch update process (S926 in FIG. 26), first, it is determined whether the success / failure determination result predicted in the process of S925 in the first prefetch process (S907 in FIG. 25) is a jackpot (S931). If it is determined that the success or failure judgment result predicted by the process of S925 in the first pre-reading process (S 907 in FIG. 25) was a big hit (S931: Yes), the predicted big hit is a positive change big hit (15R positive change big hit or 2R) It is determined whether or not the probability variation jackpot (S932). If it is determined that the predicted jackpot is a probable variation jackpot (S 932: Yes), the prefetch probability change flag 203 u 6 of the rearrangement hold storage area 203 u corresponding to the newly stored hold data is set to ON (S 933) . Note that when data is shifted to and stored in the upper reservation area, the data in the reservation area before being shifted is cleared to 0 when the data is shifted and stored in the upper reservation area, and therefore, the prefetch error variation n flag 203 u 6 is set to off. Clogged, pre-read error flag 203u6, which is set to ON once, is shifted to the hold area in order, and it is turned off by being overwritten (0 clear) when the next new data is shifted in the in-transition data storage area. It is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the predicted jackpot is not a definite variation jackpot (that is, 15R is usually a jackpot) (S932: No), the processing of S934 is executed.

  The special hit type counter C2 for the hold data newly stored from the special hit change pattern table 202d corresponding to the gaming state at the start of the change display (certainly changed or not or not) The fluctuation pattern determined at the start of the fluctuation display is predicted based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S934).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the success or failure judgment result predicted in the process of S925 in the first pre-reading process (S 907 in FIG. 25) is out of step (S931: No), the gaming state (probability change or short Determined based on the values of the variation pattern determination counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 newly stored in the suspension data from the special outlier variation pattern table 202e corresponding to whether or not A variation pattern is predicted (S935).

  The predicted success or failure, the stop type, and the variation pattern are stored in the area corresponding to the winning order in the rearrangement hold storage area 203 u (corresponding to the newly stored hold data) (S 936). It is determined whether or not the fluctuation display start order of the suspension data newly stored in the rearrangement suspension storage area 203u is stored (changed in order) into the fluctuation display start order stored previously (S937) . When it is determined that the fluctuation display start order of the suspension data newly stored in the rearrangement suspension storage area 203 u is interrupted (or changed in order) and stored in the fluctuation display start order stored previously. (S937: Yes) For the hold data after the fluctuation display start order of the newly stored hold data, the yes / no, the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern are predicted again and updated (S938). Voice lamp control device for each data corresponding to all the pending data stored in the sorting pending storage area 203u based on the pass / fail type, the variation pattern, the winning sequence, the variation display start sequence, and the prefetching probability change flag u6 A winning command for notifying to 113 is generated for each pending data (S939).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the second prefetch process (S914) which is one process of the start winning process (S108 in FIG. 24) will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing this second pre-reading process (S914).

  The second pre-reading process (FIG. 27, S914) pre-reads pending data based on the fact that the above-described first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S 907) is won in the first starting opening 63a and is stored. While the variable display start order of the held data is determined to perform various determinations, the held data stored in advance is prefetched based on the held data based on the winning of the second start port 63b. The same processing is executed except that the variable display start order is determined and processing is performed to make various determinations, and thus the detailed description will be omitted.

  The first prefetch update process (FIG. 26, S926) described above is also performed on the second prefetch update process (S946), which is one process of the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, 914) shown in FIG. (1) Various selection data are predicted based on the fluctuation display start order of the suspension data based on winning in the starting opening 63a, and it is processing to generate a winning command, while winning in the second starting opening 63b The same processing is executed except that it is different from the processing of predicting various selection data and generating a winning command based on the fluctuation display start order of the suspension data based on the same, so the detailed description is omitted. Do.

  In this manner, the game ball is won in the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b, and various counter values are newly stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. When (held data is stored), the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, S 914) is executed. The newly stored pending data is stored in the sorting pending ball storage area 203u in the order in which the variable display starts in the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, S 914). Since it is determined in comparison with the fluctuation display start time of each held data being played, the game state (whether or not the probability change is in progress) is accurately determined when the fluctuation display of the stored held data is started can do. Therefore, it is possible to accurately determine the success / failure determination result, the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern displayed in a fluctuating manner. Therefore, the first prefetching process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second is also performed next when the pending data is newly stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. The fluctuation display start time of the newly stored suspension data can be accurately predicted based on the fluctuation time (variation pattern) of each suspension data predicted in the prefetch process (FIG. 27, S914). As a result, the correct variation display start order can be predicted.

  In addition, when the variable display start order of the newly stored hold data is stored in the variable display start order of the hold data previously stored (the order is earlier), the newly stored hold is stored. For each hold data of the variable display start order after the data, the gaming state at the start of the variable display is predicted again by the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, S 914) Since the prediction (prefetching) of the pass / fail, the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern is performed, the winning command can be generated based on the more accurate prediction result. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the accurate prediction result of the stored pending data from the winning command.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, normal symbol variation processing (S109) which is one processing of timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S109). The normal symbol variation process (S109) is a process for controlling the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display unit 88, the open time of the ordinary electric power role object 64, and the like.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the current symbol is in the middle of the normal symbol (second symbol). (S1001). The middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol) includes the period from when the second symbol display portion 88 displays a display indicating a hit until the opening / closing control of the normal motorized symbol 64 is performed. If it is determined that a normal symbol (the second symbol) is being hit (S1001: Yes), the present processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (the second symbol) is not in contact (S1001: No), it is determined whether or not the normal symbol of the second symbol display portion 88 is being variably displayed (S1002). If it is determined that the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner (S1002: Yes), it is determined whether the variation time of the normal symbol being executed in the second symbol display unit 88 has elapsed ( S1003). Here, the fluctuation time is a time set in advance by the processing of S1017 and the processing of S1018, which will be described later, before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display unit 88.

  In the process of S1003, when the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S1003: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1003 that the variation time of the normal symbol being variably displayed has elapsed (S1003: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display section 88 is set (S1004) . In the process of S1004, when the lottery of the normal symbol becomes a hit, and the display mode is set by the process of S1018, the "O" symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display portion 88 as the second symbol (lighting display Set to be On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is out and the display mode at the time of disconnection is set by the process of S1017, the "x" symbol is displayed in the second symbol display section 88 as the second symbol, and the stop display (lighting It is set to be displayed. When the stop display is set by the process of S1004, the fluctuation display in the second symbol display unit 88 is ended, and the stop symbol (the second symbol) is the first in the display mode set in the process of S1017 and S1018. 2 The stop display (lighting display) is made on the symbol display unit 88.

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a hit (S1005). If it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol this time is a hit (S1005: Yes), the start of the open / close control of the ordinary electric role item 64 is set (1006). On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol this time is out (S1005: No), this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1002, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the variable display (S1002: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g (number M of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S1007). After the process of S1007, the process of S1023 is performed.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is larger than 0 (S1008). When it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is 0 (S1008: No), the present process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is not 0 (S1008: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S1009).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h is shifted (S1010). In the process of S1010, the data stored in the normal symbol holding 1 to the normal symbol holding 4 of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h is shifted in order toward the execution area. More specifically, normal symbol holding 1 → execution area, normal symbol holding 2 → normal symbol holding 1, normal symbol holding 3 → normal symbol holding 2, normal symbol holding 4 → normal symbol holding 4 etc. Shift data After shifting the data, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area 203i is acquired (S1011).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203k is 1 or more (that is, is not 0) (S1012). When it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203k is 0 (that is, it is not in time reduction) (S1012: No), the hit determination value of the random symbol per random symbol table (FIG. 8 (d)) for low probability time Based on the result of step S1013, the result of the judgment is obtained (S1013). On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the hour reduction counter 203 k is not 0 (that is, it is in the middle of a minute) (S1012: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in progress ( S1014). When it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being played (S1014: Yes), the processing of S1013 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not in the jackpot (S1014: No), the hit judgment value of the normal symbol per random symbol table (FIG. 8 (d)) for high probability is used. Based on the determination result, the result of the determination is obtained (S1015).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second symbol (normal symbol) is a hit (S1016). When it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (normal symbol) is not a hit (that is, it is out) (S1016: No), a display mode of "x" which is a display mode at the time of out is set (S1017). On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (normal symbol) is a hit (that is, it is a hit) (S1016: Yes), the display mode of "o" which is the display mode at the time of hit is It is set (S1018).

  It is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203k is 1 or more (that is, whether the gaming state is time saving (including positive change)) (S1019). If it is determined that the time is not short (S1019: No), the open time of the blades 64a and 64b of the normal motorized character 64 is set to 0.2 s, and the open frequency is set to 1 (S1020).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the time is short (S1019: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in progress (S1021). If it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being played (S1021: Yes), the processing of S1020 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not in progress (S1021: No), the opening time of the blades 64a and 64b of the ordinary electric character 64 is 1s, and the number of times of opening is two. It is set (S1020).

  It is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203k is 1 or more (that is, whether the gaming state is time saving (including a definite change)) (S1023). When it is determined that the time is short (S1023: Yes), the variation time of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is set to 3s (S1024). On the other hand, when it is determined that the time is not short (S1023: No), the variation time of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is set to 30 s (S1025).

  Next, the through gate passing process (S110) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S110). This through gate passing process (S110) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and it is determined whether the gaming ball has passed through the normal symbol starting opening 67 and there is a passing of the gaming ball. This is processing for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the normal random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process (FIG. 30, S110), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the normal symbol starting port (gate) 67 (S1031). Here, the fact that the gaming ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed the normal symbol starting opening 67 (S1031: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is acquired (S1032). Then, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S1033).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal symbol starting port (gate) 67 (S1031: No), or even if the ball has passed the normal symbol starting port 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is If it is not less than 4 (S1033: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes the normal symbol starting opening 67 (S1031: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is less than 4 (S1033: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number counter The value (M) of 203 g is incremented by 1 (S1034). Then, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 updated in S106 of the timer interrupt processing described above and the first normal symbol flag in the free reservation area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h of the RAM 203 (normal symbol holding 1 to normal symbol) It is stored in the first area of hold 4) (S1035). In the process of S1035, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203g is referred to, and if the value is 0, the area of the normal symbol holding 1 is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the area of normal symbol hold 2 is the case, if the value is 2, the area of normal symbol hold 3 is the first, and if the value is 3, the area of normal symbol hold 4 is the first Area.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control under execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1041), and ends the NMI interrupt processing Do.

  The above-described NMI interrupt processing is also executed by the payout and emission control device 111 in the same manner, and the power disconnection occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout etc., the blackout signal SG1 is outputted from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control under execution. Start the NMI interrupt processing.

  Next, referring to FIG. 32, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this start-up process.

  This start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on. In the start-up process (FIG. 32), first, an initial setting process associated with power on is executed (S1101). For example, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Subsequently, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a weight process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S1102). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1103).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S1104), and if it is turned on (S1104: Yes), the process proceeds to S1110. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is not turned on (S1104: No), it is further determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (11605). (S1105: No), since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power-off has not ended normally, the processing also shifts to S1110 in this case.

  If the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1105: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1106), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1107: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so the process also proceeds to S1110 in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S1110, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 to be the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1110). When receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and can start the payout control of the gaming ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1111, S1112) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) when initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the time of opening of a hall. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the initialization process (S1111, S1112) of the RAM 203 is executed.

  In addition, the initialization process (S1111, S1112) of the RAM 203 is also executed similarly when the occurrence of power-off is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.). . In the initialization process of the RAM (S1111, S1112), the use area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1111), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1112). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S1113.

  On the other hand, since the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is not turned on (S1104: No), power supply interruption occurrence information is stored (S1105: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) If it is normal (S1107: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared (S1108) while keeping the data backed up in the RAM 203. Next, a payout recovery command at power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of driving power supply interruption is transmitted (S1109), and the process shifts to the processing of S1113. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout recovery command, it holds the data stored in the RAM 213, and can start the payout control of the gaming balls.

  Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S1113). Thereafter, the interrupt is permitted (S914). Then, the process proceeds to main processing (S1200) described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the main process (S1200) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 after the above-described start-up process will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this main processing (S1200). In the main process (S1200), the process of updating the counter and the process of powering off are roughly executed.

  In the main processing (FIG. 33, S1200), first, in timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 14), output data such as a command stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 is The external output processing to be transmitted to the control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1201).

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1202). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (100 in the present embodiment). Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer 202b of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1203). The display control process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1204).

  Next, display control processing of a second symbol (for example, a symbol of “o” or “x”) by the second symbol display unit 88 is executed (S1205). Simply stated, on the condition that the ball has passed the normal symbol opening (through gate) 67, the second random number counter C4 value is acquired at the timing when it passes, and the second symbol display section 88 The variable display of the second symbol is implemented. Then, the lottery of the second symbol is carried out based on the value of the normal random number counter C4, and when the second symbol is hit, the ordinary electric wheeled product 64 is opened for a predetermined time.

  After that, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1206), and if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1206: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous main processing (S1207) If the predetermined time has already passed (S1207: Yes), the process proceeds to S1201, and the above-described S1201 and subsequent steps are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S1207: No), the initial time within the predetermined time is reached, ie, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process. The value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1208, S1209).

  First, updating of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 is executed (S1208). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 239 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated values of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1202 (S1209).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1201 to S1205 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but is variably displayed. Therefore, by repeatedly executing updating of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 using such remaining time, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the special hit random number counter C1) The initial value of the random number counter C4 can be updated at random, and the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated randomly.

  Further, in the process of S1206, if the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1206: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 31 has been executed, so that the processing at the time of the power-off after S1210 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is inhibited (S1210), and a power-off command indicating that the power is shut off is sent to another control device (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). And transmit (S1211). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1212), the access to the RAM 203 is inhibited (S1213), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1206 is at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1201 to S1205 or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S1208 and S1209 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of main controller 110, since the occurrence information of the power-off is confirmed at the timing when each setting is finished, when returning from the power-off state, the process is performed after the end of the start-up process. It is possible to start from the process of S1201. That is, as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process, the process can be started from the process of S1201. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1201. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or runaway.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 34 to 40, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The processes of the MPU 221 can be roughly classified into a start-up process that is started up with the power on and a main process (S1400) that is executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 34, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is performed, first, an initial setting process is performed according to the power on (S1301). Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether the power-off process flag is on or not, the power-on process of S1418 (see FIG. 35) is performed due to a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called "temporary power failure") of the current start-up process. It is judged whether or not it is started during the execution of (S1302). As described later with reference to FIG. 35, when the power-off command is received from the main control device 110 (see S1415 in FIG. 35), the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process of S1418. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1418 is being executed can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1302: No), the current start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off of S1418 occurs. It was started after completing execution of the process, or was started after reset (only without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) by resetting only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1303).

  Confirmation of data corruption in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55 AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1306. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55 AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if "55 AAh", the data destruction of the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1303: Yes), the process proceeds to S1304 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1303: No), the process proceeds to S1308.

  In addition, since the keyword of "55AAh" is not memorize | stored in the specific area | region of RAM223 when the start-up process this time is started after the power supply was cut off completely (The memory of RAM223 is lost by power-off. ) Is judged to be data destruction of the RAM 223 (S1303: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1304. On the other hand, the current start-up process is started after completing the execution of the power-off process in S1418 after a momentary power failure has occurred, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. In the case where it is started to start, since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1303: No), and the process proceeds to S1308.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1302: Yes), the current start-up process is performed after the instantaneous power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off process of S1418, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since the control can not be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1304 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1304, the storage area of the whole range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1304). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”, and if “0FFh”, it is determined that it is normal. The writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” next to “0FFh”. By the read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1305: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1306). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether there is data corruption in the RAM 223 or not. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the reading / writing check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1305: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1307), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S1308, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S1308). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1418 is performed (see FIG. 35, S1417). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1418 is performed, the process of S1308 is performed instantaneously when the power-off flag is turned on until the process of S1308 is performed. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1418 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1109), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1310). The permission is set (S1113), and the process proceeds to the main processing (S1400). The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing a command or the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason for reaching the processing of S1308 in the state where the power-off flag is turned off is that, for example, the current startup processing is started after the power is completely shut off, and the processing of S1304 to S1306 is performed. It is a case where the processing is reached or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: No), S1309, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1310, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1310).

  The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1309 is that, when the process of S1308 is reached via the processes of S1304 to S1306, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1304. If the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data of the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, and the audio lamp control device 113 is stored. It is because control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the main processing (S1400) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the start-up processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this main processing (S1400). When the main process (S1400) is performed, it is first determined whether or not one millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process (S1400) was started or the process of S1401 was performed last time (S1400). S1401), if 1 millisecond or more has not elapsed (S1401: No), the processing of S1402 to S1410 is not performed, and the processing shifts to the processing of S1411. In the process of S1401, the process of determining whether 1 millisecond has elapsed is a process relating to display (rendering) in S1402 to S1410, and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the variation display process of S1411 and the command determination process of S1412 in a short cycle. Since the process of S1414 is executed in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1414 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Setting based on the variable display effect can be performed without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1401 (S1401: Yes), first, various commands to the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1403 to S1414 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 ( S1402). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to become the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1409 described later (S1403), and then the power on notification process is executed (S1404). The power on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is made by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. It will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S1405 without performing notification by the power on notification process.

  In the process of S1405, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the number-of-helds display update process is executed (S1406). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is sent to 114. In the number-of-holds display update processing (S1406), although described later in detail, processing of updating the display of the held symbol display of the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the data of the follow sort hold storage area 223k. .

  Thereafter, the frame button input monitoring and rendering process is executed (S1407). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, the input whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process set to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  In addition, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a rearranging possible period (period in which a large hit game and a state without a hold are omitted) described later, the hold symbol display displayed in the hold establishment order starts variable display It is sorted and displayed in order.

  When the frame button input monitoring and rendering process is finished, next, the lamp editing process is executed (S1408), and then the sound editing and output process is executed (S1409). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the electric decoration portions 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1409, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1410). Thereafter, the process proceeds to the process of S1411. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. The lamp editing process of S1408 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. In addition, the sound editing / output processing of S1409 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1411, in order to display the variation display effect in the third symbol display device 81, a variation pattern command for display is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is displayed control device 114 The variable display setting process, which is a process to be set to transmit the image data, is executed. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the fluctuation display setting process (S1411), a temporary fluctuation stop process is executed (S1412). In this temporary fluctuation stop process (S1412), a temporary first fluctuation stop command indicating temporary stop of the first special symbol from the main controller 110 or a temporary second fluctuation stop command indicating temporary stop of the second special symbol On the basis of having received the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Details of the temporary variation stop process (S1412) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the temporary fluctuation stop process (S1412), a hold reordering process is executed (S1413). In this pending sorting process, based on the winning command output from the main control unit 110, the pending symbol display is sorted and displayed based on the player's button operation from the winning order to the variable display start order. Execute the process The details of the pending reordering process (S1413) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the pending reordering process (S1413), a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control apparatus 110 (S1414). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1414 ends, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1415). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1415 (S1415: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on (S1417), and the power-off process is executed (S1418). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1419), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is inhibited, and each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of occurrence information of power-off is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1415 (S1415: No), whether the RAM 223 is destroyed or not is determined based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1416) and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1416: No), the process returns to S1401, and the main process (S1400) is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1416: Yes), the processing is endlessly looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, since the main process (S1400) is not executed if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a clerk or the like in the hall to ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, notification of the destruction of the RAM may be performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, a command determination process (S1414) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1414). This command determination process (S1414) is executed in the main process (S1400) (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, the command received from the main control device 110 Determine The details of the command determination process (S1414) will be described below.

  In the command determination process (FIG. 36, S1414), first, the first command received from the main control apparatus 110 among the unprocessed commands is read out and analyzed from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, and the main control apparatus 110 Further, it is determined whether the first variation pattern command has been received (S1501). Here, the first change pattern command is a special symbol indicating a change display mode for changing and displaying the first special symbol. When it is determined that the first fluctuation pattern command has been received (S1501: Yes), the first fluctuation start flag 223c1 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1502). A variation pattern type is extracted from the received first variation pattern command (S1503). The variation pattern type extracted here is identifiably stored in the other memory area 223m of the RAM 223 as being the variation pattern type of the first special symbol, and is displayed in the variation display setting process (FIG. 38, S1411) described later. It is used when setting the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol that notifies the control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the first special symbol and the variation pattern type of the first special symbol.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the first variation pattern command has not been received (S1501: No), it is determined whether the second variation pattern command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1505). Here, the second change pattern command is a special symbol indicating a change display mode for changing and displaying the second special symbol. When it is determined that the second fluctuation pattern command has been received (S1504: Yes), the second fluctuation start flag 223c2 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1505). A variation pattern type is extracted from the received second variation pattern command (S1506). The variation pattern type extracted here is identifiably stored in the other memory area 223m of the RAM 223 to be the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and is displayed in the variation display setting process (FIG. 38, S1411) described later. It is used when setting the variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol that notifies the control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the second special symbol and the variation pattern type of the second special symbol.

  If it is determined that the second variation pattern command has not been received (S1504: No), it is determined whether the first or second type-of-stop command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1507). If it is determined that the first or second type-of-stop command has been received (S1507: Yes), if the first type-of-stop command has been received, the first type-of-stop selection flag is set to ON. When the second stop type command is received, the second stop type selection flag is set to on. (S1508). A stop type (either 15R probability big hit, 15R normal big hit, 2R probability big hit) is extracted from the received first stop type command or second stop type command (S1506). The extracted stop type is stored in the other memory area 223 m of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the stop type extracted from the first stop type command can distinguish that it is the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the second stop type command is the stop type of the second special symbol Are stored so as to be identifiable.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first or second stop type command has not been received (S1507: No), it is determined whether or not the ball holding ball number command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1510). If it is determined that the holding ball number command has been received (S1510: Yes), the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110 or the second special symbol holding ball included in the received holding ball number command The value of the number counter f (ie, the number of balls held for the variable display effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol held in the main controller 110) is extracted, and the number of balls held for the first special symbol is the voice lamp The first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b1 of the control device 113 is stored, and the second special symbol holding ball number is stored in the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223b2 (S1511).

  Here, since the holding ball number command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 when the ball wins (start winning) at the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b, whenever there is a starting winning combination , By the process of S1508, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b1 and the second special symbol holding ball counter 223b2 of the voice lamp control device 113 to the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110 and the first (2) It can be adjusted to the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203f. Therefore, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b1 or the second special symbol holding ball counter 223b2 of the voice lamp control device 113 is the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Or even if it deviates from the value of the second special symbol holding ball counter 203f, correct the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b1 or the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223b2 of the voice lamp control device 113 at the start winning detection Can be adjusted to the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e of the main control unit 110 or the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f.

  If it is determined that the hold ball number command has not been received (S1510: No), it is determined whether a winning command has been received (S1512). If it is determined that the winning command has been received (S1512: Yes), the information of each holding area of the rearrangement hold storage area 203u of the main control device 110 is extracted from the received command (S1510). Here, the information of each reserve area in the rearrangement reserve storage area 203 u to be extracted is the time until it becomes the variation display order, the variation display order, the variation display start, the success / failure determination result for each suspension, for each reserve .

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S1512: No), it is determined whether the temporary first change stop command or the temporary second change stop command has been received (S1515). If it is determined that the temporary first change stop command or the temporary second change stop command is received (S1515: Yes), if the temporary first change stop command is received, the sub first change stop flag 223e If the temporary second change stop command is received, the sub second change stop flag 223f is set on (S1516).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the temporary first change stop command or the temporary second change stop command is not received (S1515: No), the first special symbol change restart command or the second special symbol change restart command is received. It is judged whether or not (S1517). When it is determined that the first special symbol variation resume command or the second special symbol variation resume command is received (S1517: Yes), the first special symbol variation resume command corresponding to the received command is received. In the case, the first variation resumption flag 223g is set to on. Also, when the second special symbol variation resume command is received, the sub second variation resume flag 223h is set to ON (S1518).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol variation resume command or the second special symbol variation resume command is not received (S1517: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S1519).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the pending number display update process (S1406) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing this pending number display update process (S1406). This pending number display updating process (S1406) is a process for updating the pending symbol display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the data of each pending area of the sub sort pending storage area 223k. .

  In the pending number display updating process (FIG. 37, S1406), first, the variation display start time of the variation start time storage area 223k5 of each pending area of the follow sort pending storage area 223k is updated. The execution cycle of this process (1 ms in this embodiment) is subtracted from each piece of time data stored in the change start time storage area 223k5. Further, the update of the variable display start time is not limited to this, and may be performed by providing an RTC or the like, or may be another method.

  The hold symbol display corresponding to the hold area in which the sort flag 223k7 of the follow sort hold memory area 223k is on is a hold corresponding to the hold area in which the sort flag 223k7 is off in the variable display start order. In the symbol display, the holding symbol display is displayed in the holding order.

  Here, the reordering flag 223k7 is operated (in the present embodiment, the frame button 22 in a reorderable period) in the pending reordering process (S1413 in FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 described later. When pressed, it is set to ON in all pending areas where pending data is stored. As a result, all displayed pending symbol displays are sorted and displayed based on the pending variable display start order from the pending order of holding. On the other hand, after the sorting flag 223k7 is set to ON, regarding the newly stored hold, the sorting flag 223k7 is off, so the order established without being sorted, ie, the third symbol display device 81 Displayed at the end of the display of the pending symbol displayed on.

  Therefore, when the player operates the frame button 22 in order to rearrange the holding symbol display, the holding symbol display displayed at that time is rearranged in the variable display start order, and thereafter Also, while the display of the sorted symbol display is maintained in the variable display start order, the display of the symbol display corresponding to the newly stored (occurred) hold is displayed first in the formation order for the display of the hold symbol corresponding to the hold. Since it is displayed at the tail end without being interrupted and displayed on the held symbol display being played, the player can suppress a defect that confuses the order in which the current display is displayed. Can.

  Further, as described above, by rearranging only the reserved symbol display displayed when the frame button 22 is operated, it is possible to inform the variable display start order only when the player wants to know.

  Also, in the case of a 15R probability variation jackpot or a 15R normal jackpot, a relatively long fluctuation pattern is selected. Therefore, the change display start time is delayed for the hold established at the same starting opening 63a, 63b as the hold that is a big hit. Therefore, the case where the variable display start time is earlier occurs in the case of the suspension with the late establishment order occurring at the start ports 63a and 63b different from the suspension that becomes the big hit. In such a case, when sorting of the reserved symbols is performed, the reserved symbols whose order of establishment is late are interrupted and displayed before the reserved symbols whose order of establishment is earlier than that (the reserved symbol display area Ds1 side) Ru. Therefore, when the player operates the frame button 22 to rearrange the holding symbol display, when the holding symbol of the late formation order is interrupted and displayed before the holding symbol of the early formation order, Among the holding symbols displayed before the holding symbol displayed by the interruption, it may be a big hit about the holding that occurred in the winning opening to the starting opening 63a, 63b different from the holding symbol displayed by the interruption You can have expectations.

  Therefore, when the player operates the frame button 22, he or she thinks that there may be a jackpot in the holding symbol display, and can operate the frame button in anticipation of changing the arrangement order. The frame button 22 can be operated with a sense of expectation for the jackpot.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the variable display setting process (S1411) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process (S1411). The variable display setting process (FIG. 38, S1411) is a process of the main process (S1400) (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variation display setting process (FIG. 38, S1411) is based on the first or second variation pattern command received from main controller 110 in order to cause variation display effect to be displayed on third symbol display device 81. Then, a variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is generated, and processing for transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Also, based on the extracted stop type (15R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot), a process of setting a first or second display type command for display to notify the display control device 114 of the stop classification. Run.

  In the fluctuation display setting process (S1411 in FIG. 38), first, it is determined whether the first fluctuation start flag 223c1 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1601). Then, if it is determined that the first change start flag 223c1 is off (S1601: No), since the first change pattern command is not received from the main control device 110, the process of S1606 is executed. Do. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first fluctuation start flag 223c1 is on (S1601: Yes), the first fluctuation start flag 223c is set to be off (S1602).

  In the process of S1603, the variation pattern in the variation display effect of the first special symbol extracted from the first variation pattern command in the process of S1503 of the command determination process (FIG. 36, S1414) is acquired from the other memory area 223m of the RAM 223 Thus, the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol is generated (S1603). In addition, the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol is configured to be distinguishable whether it is a variation pattern command for display corresponding to the first special symbol or a variation pattern command for the second special symbol. Specifically, if the upper 2 bits of the upper byte of the display variation pattern command of 2 bytes configuration is "10", it indicates that it corresponds to the first special symbol, and if it is "01" the second special symbol It is configured to indicate that it corresponds to

  The variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol set in the process of S1603 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is output by the command output process (S1402) of the main process (FIG. 35, S1400). It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the display control device 114 corresponds to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the first special symbol indicated by the variation pattern command for display. Display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbol is performed.

  Here, when the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the variation display mode indicated by the received display variation pattern command is displayed in the left display area Dm1 of the third symbol display device 81, The first special symbol (the third symbol) is variably displayed (dynamically displayed). With the setting of the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the holding ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set display variation pattern command is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the holding sphere of the first special symbol In accordance with the setting of display), the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b1 is decreased by 1, and the holding data stored in the follow sort holding memory area 223k is in the immediately preceding holding area It is shifted (S1604). More specifically, the first special symbol or the second special symbol of the data under pending area 1 → variable display, pending area 2 → pending area 1, pending area 3 → pending area 2, pending area 4 → pending area 3, pending The data in each area is shifted in such a manner as area 5 → reserve area 4, reserve area 6 → reserve area 5, reserve area 7 → reserve area 6, reserve area 8 → reserve area 7, and so on.

  The measurement of the variation time of the first special symbol is started using the first variation time storage area 223i (S1605).

  It is judged whether the second fluctuation start flag 223c2 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1606). When it is determined that the second fluctuation start flag 223c2 is not on (that is, off) (S1606: No), the first fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110. Therefore, the process of S1611 is performed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the second fluctuation start flag 223c2 is on (S1606: Yes), the second fluctuation start flag 223c2 is set to be off (S1607).

  In the process of S1506 in the command determination process (FIG. 36, S1414), the variation pattern in the variation display effect of the second special symbol extracted from the second variation pattern command is acquired from the other memory area 223m of the RAM 223, A variation pattern command for display of a special symbol is generated (S1608).

  The variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol set in the process of S1608 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is output by the command output process (S1402) of the main process (FIG. 35, S1400). It is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the display variation pattern command of the second special symbol, a special pattern corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the second special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command Display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbol is performed.

  Here, when the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command of the second special symbol, the variation display mode indicated by the received display variation pattern command is displayed in the right side display area Dm2 of the third symbol display device 81, The second special symbol (the third symbol) is variably displayed (dynamically displayed). With the setting of the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the holding ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set display variation pattern command is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the holding sphere of the second special symbol In accordance with the setting of display), the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223b2 is decremented by 1, and the holding data stored in the follow sort holding memory area 223k is in the immediately preceding holding area It is shifted (S1609). More specifically, the first special symbol or the second special symbol of the data under pending area 1 → variable display, pending area 2 → pending area 1, pending area 3 → pending area 2, pending area 4 → pending area 3, pending The data in each area is shifted in such a manner as area 5 → reserve area 4, reserve area 6 → reserve area 5, reserve area 7 → reserve area 6, reserve area 8 → reserve area 7, and so on.

  Measurement of the variation time of the second special symbol is started using the second variation time storage area 223j (S1610).

  It is determined whether the first stop type selection flag 223d1 or the second stop type selection flag 223d2 is set to ON (S1611). If it is determined that the first stop type selection flag 223d1 and the second stop type selection flag 223d2 are not set to on (that is, off) (S1611: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the first stop type selection flag 223d1 or the second stop type selection flag 223d2 is on (S1611: Yes), if the first stop type selection flag 223d1 is on, If the first stop type selection flag 223d1 is set to off and the second stop type selection flag 223d2 is on, the second stop type selection flag 223d2 is set to off (S1612).

  In the process of S1509 of the command determination process (S1414 in FIG. 36), the stop type extracted from the received first stop type command or the second stop type command is set (S1613). If the set stop type is the stop type of the first special symbol, the display control device 114 in the stop type (15R probability variation hit, 15R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot based on the stop type A first display type stop command for notifying “is there?” Is generated. In addition, when the stop type which is set is the stop type of the 2nd special symbol, in the display control device 114 stop type (15R probability big hit, 15R normal big hit, 2R probability big hit either) based on the stop type ) Is generated (S1614). The first or second stop type command notified from the main control unit 110 is for notifying the jackpot type when the jackpot is reached, and is notified even if the determination result is out of order. . If the determination result is out, the out type is not referred to and the out pattern is set.

  By being configured in this manner, the audio lamp control device 113 can control the display control device 114 so as to change and display both the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time.

  In addition, based on the variation pattern of the first special symbol or the second special symbol being set, a dedicated command for shifting from the main control device 110 by also shifting the data of the follow sort reserving storage area 223k. The control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced without the need to control transmission.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the temporary fluctuation stop process (S1412) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this temporary change stop process (S1412). This temporary fluctuation stop process (FIG. 39, S1412) is a process of the main process (S1400) (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, in the temporary fluctuation stop process (FIG. 39, S1412), one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 is a big hit, and the other variable display is During the jackpot game, processing for temporary stop is executed.

  In temporary fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 39, S1412), first, it is judged if the second fluctuation stop flag 223e is set to ON. If it is determined that the first variation stop flag 223e is set to ON (S1701: Yes), the first variation stop flag 223e is set to OFF (S1702).

  A first display temporary stop command is generated (S1703). The first temporary stop command for display is a command for controlling the display control device 114 so as to temporarily stop the first special symbol being variably displayed by the third symbol display device 81. When setting the first temporary stop command for display, the display control device 114 causes the first special symbol (main symbol in the left, right, and left main symbols) to be slightly shaken and displayed after stopping the variable display of the first special symbol. Then, the player is notified that the variable display is temporarily stopped. In addition, by displaying the characters "the first special symbol is temporarily stopped" in the left display area Dm1 of the third symbol display device 81, it is easier for the player to understand, and it is temporarily assumed that the variable display is stopped. It is configured to notify.

  In this way, the player can recognize that the special symbol in the variable display has been temporarily stopped due to the occurrence of the jackpot, and the lottery in the variable display may disappear or be invalidated. You can play with peace of mind by preventing you from becoming anxious.

  In addition, the display mode of the temporary stop is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, and the first special symbol may be erased from the left side display area Dm, and the character may be notified of temporary stop using only characters. Naturally, other configurations may be adopted.

  When the display first temporary stop command is set, the measurement of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol measured in the subordinate first fluctuation time storage area 223i is interrupted (temporarily stopped).

  By configuring in this way, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol can be accurately managed, and even when the fluctuation display is resumed, the fluctuation display can be accurately performed with the remaining fluctuation time.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the first variation stop flag 223e is not set to on (ie, is off) (S1701: No), is the second variation stop flag 223f set to on? It is determined (S1705). If it is determined that the second variation stop flag 223f is set to ON (S1705: Yes), the second variation stop flag 223f is set to OFF (S1706), and the second temporary stop command for display Are generated (S1707). Similarly to the first display temporary stop command, the second display temporary stop command controls the display control device 114 so that the second special symbol currently displayed in the variable display on the third symbol display device 81 is temporarily stopped in the variable display. Is a command to Similarly to the first special symbol, the second special symbol is also temporarily stopped in the display mode of the temporary stop.

  When the second temporary stop command for display is set, the measurement of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol measured in the second fluctuation time storage area 223j is interrupted (temporarily stopped).

  By configuring in this way, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol can be accurately managed, and even when the fluctuation display is resumed, the fluctuation display can be accurately performed with the remaining fluctuation time.

  It is determined whether the second variation resumption flag 223g is set to ON (S1709). If it is determined that the sub first fluctuation resumption flag 223g is set to on (S1709: Yes), the sub first fluctuation resumption flag 223g is set to off (S1710).

  It is determined whether the measured variation time of the first special symbol stored in the second variation time storage area 223i is 3 seconds or less (S1711). If it is determined that the measured remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol stored in the second fluctuation time storage area 223i is 3 seconds or less (S1711: Yes), the first short fluctuation mode for display A resume command is set (S1712). When this display first short variation mode restart command is set, it is output to the display control device 114. This display first short fluctuation mode restart command displays the characters "Display the lottery result of the fluctuation display which has been temporarily stopped" on the display control device 114 in the left display area Dm1 for the remaining fluctuation time. Then, based on the confirmation command output from the main control unit 110, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the lottery result. In addition, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the character display will change to the characters “I displayed the lottery result of the variable display that had been temporarily stopped!” And will continue to be displayed until the next fluctuation is started .

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the measured variation time of the first special symbol stored in the second variation time storage area 223i is longer than 3 s (S1711: No), the first normal variation mode for display is resumed. A command is set (S1713). When this display first normal variation mode restart command is set, it is output to the display control device 114. This display first normal variation mode restart command displays the characters "temporarily stopped variation display in change!" In the left side display area Dm1 for the remaining variation time, and all of the first special symbols are displayed. After displaying the main symbols (3 symbols on the left, right and left) in a fluctuating manner during the remaining fluctuation time, the first special symbol is displayed with a symbol indicating the lottery result based on the confirmation command output from the main control device 110 Stop display. Next, measurement of the fluctuation time in the first fluctuation time memory area 223i is resumed (S1714).

  By configuring in this manner, the audio lamp control is performed even if main controller 110 does not perform processing for instructing the remaining variation mode to be displayed on third symbol display device 81 according to the remaining variation time. Since the device 113 determines the remaining fluctuation time and selects the remaining fluctuation manner, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  In addition, when the remaining fluctuation time is short, even if the continuation of the interrupted fluctuation mode is displayed, there is a problem that the player may miss it or it may be too short to understand the notification result. However, in the configuration of the pachinko machine 10, when the remaining time is within the reference time (3 s in this embodiment), the notification result is displayed immediately after notifying the player that the lottery result is to be displayed. Therefore, the player can recognize that the notification result which has been interrupted (temporary stop) is displayed.

  Furthermore, even after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, a character notifying that the suspended variable display is stopped and displayed is displayed, so the remaining fluctuation time is very short (for example, within 1s). Also, the player can recognize that the suspended variable display is effective and the determination result is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, even when the remaining fluctuation time is longer than the reference time (3s in the present embodiment), the player is notified of the fact that the notification result being interrupted (temporarily stopped) is being displayed in a fluctuation manner. The person can easily recognize that the suspended variable display was effective without disappearing.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the sub first variation resumption flag 223g is off (S1709: No), it is determined whether the sub second variation resumption flag 223h is set to on (S1715). If it is determined that the sub second variation resumption flag 223h is set to on (S1715: Yes), the sub second variation resumption flag 223g is set to off (S1716).

  It is determined whether the measured remaining fluctuation time of the second special symbol stored in the second variation time storage area 223j is 3 seconds or less (S1717). If it is determined that the remaining measured variation time of the second special symbol stored in the second variation time storage area 223j is 3 seconds or less (S1717: Yes), the second short variation mode for display A resume command is set (S1718). When this display second short variation mode restart command is set, it is output to the display control device 114. The second short fluctuation mode restart command for display displays the characters “Display the lottery result of the temporary display that has been temporarily stopped” on the display control device 114 for the remaining fluctuation time in the right display area Dm 2 Then, based on the confirmation command output from the main control unit 110, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the lottery result. In addition, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the character display will change to the characters "The result of the temporary display of the variable display which has been temporarily stopped!" And will continue to be displayed until the next fluctuation is started. .

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the measured variation time of the second special symbol stored in the second variation time storage area 223j is longer than 3 s (S1717: No), the second normal variation mode for display is resumed. A command is set (S1719). When this display second normal variation mode restart command is set, it is output to the display control device 114. This second normal variation mode restart command for display displays the character "temporarily stopped variation display during variation!" In the right side display area Dm2 during the remaining variation time, and all of the second special symbols are displayed. After displaying the main symbols (3 symbols on the left, right and left) in a fluctuating manner during the remaining fluctuation time, the second special symbol is displayed with a symbol indicating the lottery result based on the confirmation command output from the main control unit 110 Stop display. Next, measurement of the fluctuation time in the second fluctuation time memory area 223j is resumed (S1720). On the other hand, when it is determined that the second variation resumption flag 223h is off (S1715: No), this process ends.

  By configuring in this manner, the audio lamp control is performed even if main controller 110 does not perform processing for instructing the remaining variation mode to be displayed on third symbol display device 81 according to the remaining variation time. Since the device 113 determines the remaining fluctuation time and selects the remaining fluctuation manner, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  In addition, when the remaining fluctuation time is short, even if the continuation of the interrupted fluctuation mode is displayed, there is a problem that the player may miss it or it may be too short to understand the notification result. However, in the configuration of the pachinko machine 10, when the remaining time is within the reference time (3 s in this embodiment), the notification result is displayed immediately after notifying the player that the lottery result is to be displayed. Therefore, the player can recognize that the notification result which has been interrupted (temporary stop) is displayed.

  Furthermore, even after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, a character notifying that the suspended variable display is stopped and displayed is displayed, so the remaining fluctuation time is very short (for example, within 1s). Also, the player can recognize that the suspended variable display is effective and the determination result is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, even when the remaining fluctuation time is longer than the reference time (3s in the present embodiment), the player is notified of the fact that the notification result being interrupted (temporarily stopped) is being displayed in a fluctuation manner. The person can easily recognize that the suspended variable display was effective without disappearing.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been suspended is resumed, the character is informed of that to the character, but the present invention is not particularly limited thereto. Of course, it may be configured to notify by a lamp or the like. In addition, as shown in the display mode that shows that the player has resumed (for example, displayed as an animation notifying that the variable display has been resumed by the character etc.), the suspended change Of course, notification may be made in a display mode dedicated to the resumption of display. By doing this, the player can correctly recognize that the suspended variable display has been resumed.

  In the present embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to select the variation pattern in accordance with the remaining variation time. Not limited to this, when main controller 110 resumes the temporarily stopped fluctuation table time, the remaining fluctuation time causes the same fluctuation time fluctuation pattern or a fluctuation time slightly shorter than the remaining fluctuation time. The variation pattern may be configured to be selected. When a variation pattern with a slightly shorter variation time is selected, the voice lamp control device 113 is controlled to delay the difference between the variation pattern of the remaining variation time and the variation pattern of the slightly short variation time and cause the variation table time to occur. The variation table of the first special symbol or the second special symbol can be performed according to the remaining variation time.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the suspension rearrangement process (S1413) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing this pending reordering process (S1413). This hold rearrangement process (S1413 in FIG. 40) is one of main processes (S1400) (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, in the hold rearrangement process (FIG. 40, S1413), when the player operates the frame button 22 in the effective period, the hold symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the order of establishment of the hold A process of setting the display to be rearranged in the variable display start order is executed.

  In the pending reordering process (S1413 in FIG. 40), it is first determined whether it is a reorderable period (S1801). In the sortable period, gaming states other than the state with no hold established in the big hit game or different starting ports 63a and 63b (the state in which there is not one or more hold of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively) are arranged The exchangeable period is set.

  If it is determined that it is a sortable period (S1801: Yes), a display button operation display command is generated (S1802). When the display control device 114 receives this display button operation display command, the third symbol display device 81 displays the character "May be reorderable!" And the player can press the frame button 22. Informing a period that is The notification mode is not limited to this, and may be performed by voice or the like, or may be controlled to light a dedicated lamp or the like.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, by providing the sortable period, the player can easily recognize the timing at which the sort operation can be performed, and the frame switch 22 can be operated at an appropriate timing. it can. In addition, as long as the rearrangement possible period is not particularly provided, and the rearrangement is possible when the frame button 22 is pressed, the arrangement display may be naturally performed.

  It is determined whether the frame button 22 is operated (S1803). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is operated (S1803: Yes), the reordering flag 223k7 of all the pending areas in which the pending data of the follow reorder pending storage area 223k is stored is set to on. (S1804).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the reordering period is not reached (S1801: No) and when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not operated (S1803: No), this process is ended.

  By this configuration, when the player wants to rearrange, it is possible to rearrange only the reserved symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The player can know the actual variable display start order, and can know in advance the special symbol to be focused next (the special symbol to be the variable display start). Therefore, it is possible to play the game while assuming the display area to be viewed in advance, and to play the game smoothly.

  Further, in the configuration of the pachinko machine, since the distribution ball 630 is configured to easily win the game ball alternately by the distribution device 630, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured. The game is played evenly and the game can be played efficiently.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, sorting of the holding symbol is performed as a configuration to be executed based on the player operating the frame button 22, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and is executed whenever a new holding is stored. Naturally, it may be configured as well. By configuring in this manner, the player can always correctly recognize the fluctuation display start order by the holding symbols rearranged in the fluctuation start order.

  In this embodiment, the sortable period is other than a state in which there is no hold established in the jackpot game or different starting ports 63a and 63b (state in which there is no hold of one or more first special symbols and second special symbols). The game state has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be set as a sortable period even during a jackpot game, or conversely, a period in which a specific variable display mode is displayed It may be set to other than, etc., and may be determined as appropriate.

  When the jackpot game is set to a sortable period, it is necessary to sort in consideration of the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display temporarily stopped in the fluctuation display. Specifically, the fluctuation start time is calculated based on the determined fluctuation time (variation display mode) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol being suspended and the remaining fluctuation time during temporary stop. Then, the sorting order is determined, and sorting is performed based on the sorting order. By configuring in this way, even if a new hold display mode is displayed during the jackpot game, the hold display mode is combined with the display mode already displayed before the hold display mode is displayed. The sorting can be performed in the correct fluctuation start order, and the player can be notified of the correct fluctuation start order even in the jackpot gaming machine.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the reordering storage area 203u of the main control device 110 and the secondary reordering storage area 223k of the audio lamp control device 113 are configured to store data in which the reordering is performed mutually. Not only that, the main control device 110 is configured to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of various data (relevant judgment result, jackpot type, fluctuation pattern type, etc.) necessary for sorting by a prize command, Reordering may be performed only by the audio lamp control device 113.

  By configuring in this manner, even when a power failure occurs, main controller 110 backs up various data necessary for sorting in RAM 203, and when power is restored, the various processes in startup processing (FIG. 32) are performed. By outputting the data to the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113 can easily perform recovery from the power failure by performing sorting based on the various data.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol or the first reserved due to the remaining variation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol during the variation start and the variation pattern type of the data stored in the reordering storage area 203u 2 The variation start time of the special symbol was calculated to calculate the variation start order. Not only that, at the time of game ball winning, it decides information (time information) whether it is the fluctuation aspect longer than fixed time by deciding whether it is the fluctuation aspect which becomes reach or not, the time information and fluctuation The fluctuation start order may be roughly determined and rearranged from the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. By configuring in this way, it is determined whether or not it is a fluctuation mode that will be a reach at the time of winning (whether it is a long time fluctuation mode or a short time fluctuation mode), and the accurate fluctuation time (fluctuation mode) is Even with the pachinko machine 10 determined based on information such as the number of balls held at the start of fluctuation, it is possible to inform the player of a rough fluctuation start order.

  Therefore, the player may not be in the correct order of starting the change, but the fact that the sorting has been performed is included in the one in which the long-time fluctuation mode (the fluctuation mode to become reach) is suspended. Can play games with the expectation of a jackpot.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the slot machine and the game machine of the present invention, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment will be shown.

  Success or failure judgment means that executes the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment conditions, and executes the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment conditions First display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating the result of determination of success or failure of the first lottery game by means, in the order in which the first condition for acceptance judgment is satisfied, and second lottery game of the condition for success Second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating the result of the determination whether the second determination result is satisfied or not, and the first identification means for the first display means Display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of information on the second display means respectively, and a result of the pass / fail judgment by the pass / fail judgment means becomes a hit, and the display control means causes the first or second display means First or second identification In a gaming machine having a bonus game execution means for granting a bonus game which is advantageous to a player when information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, based on the establishment of the first success or failure determination condition. The second identification information corresponding to the satisfaction / decision condition that is satisfied is determined based on the establishment of the second validity / decision unit, which determines the dynamic display mode related to the time information of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfaction / decision condition that is satisfied. Dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode related to time information of the first and second identifications corresponding to the established success or failure determination conditions when the first or second The dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means and the fulfillment order of the qualification conditions combining the first and the second qualification conditions established until the dynamic display of the information is started. Information about The first information for each suspension information is distinguished while the suspension information storage means for storing the suspension information having at least the suspension information of the first pass / fail judgment condition and the second pass / fail judgment condition stored in the suspension information storage means Hold display means displayed in the distinguishable hold display mode, and the first or second success or failure judgment conditions are satisfied, the fulfillment order of the success or failure judgment conditions combining the success or failure judgment condition and the second success or failure judgment condition When new hold information is stored, it is based on the remaining dynamic display time of the first or second identification information in the dynamic display and the dynamic display mode for each hold information previously stored. Dynamic display start time information determining means for determining time information until the first or second identification information corresponding to new hold information becomes dynamic display start, and storing the information in the hold information storage means; That a predetermined condition is established Triggered by the dynamic display start time information determination unit, based on each dynamic display start time information stored in the hold information storage unit, the dynamic display mode displayed on the hold display unit, the dynamic display A game machine A1 comprising: rearranging means for rearranging in an order to start the game.

  According to the gaming machine A1, based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Further, based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. The dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first success or failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the success or failure judgment result of the second lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second success / failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Here, the first identification information is a first display means, and the second identification information is a second display means, and can be dynamically displayed by the display control means. And, when the result of judgment of success or failure by the success or failure judgment means becomes a hit and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing a hit by the display control means, a bonus game which is advantageous to the player is executed. It is carried out by means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. The dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode related to the time information of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied yes-no determination condition based on the establishment of the first yes-no decision condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second success or failure determination condition, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode related to the time information of the second identification information corresponding to the established success or failure determination condition. When the first or second identification information corresponding to the satisfied qualification condition is started when dynamic display is started when the first or second qualification condition is satisfied, the first propriety determination condition and the first 2 Hold information having at least the establishment order of the success / failure determination conditions including the success / failure determination conditions and the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit is stored in the hold information storage unit. Success or failure of the combination of the first pass / fail judgment condition and the second pass / fail judgment condition for each hold information while distinguishing the hold information of the first pass / fail judgment condition and the second pass / fail judgment condition stored in the hold information storage means. The establishment order of the determination conditions is performed by the suspension display means as the display of the distinguishable suspension display mode. When the first or second validity determination condition is satisfied and new hold information is stored, the remaining dynamic display time of the first or second identification information during dynamic display is stored first Based on the dynamic display mode for each hold information, the time information until the first or second identification information corresponding to the new hold information becomes the dynamic display start is determined by the dynamic display start time information determination means And stored in the pending information storage means. Then, when the predetermined condition is established, the hold displayed on the hold display unit is based on each dynamic display start time information stored in the hold information storage unit by the dynamic display start time determination unit. The display mode is rearranged by the rearrangement means in the order of starting the dynamic display. Thereby, for example, the hold information of the second lottery game is newly stored in a state where the hold information of the first lottery game is stored first. At this time, when the remaining dynamic display time of the first identification information in the dynamic display is longer than the remaining dynamic display time of the second identification information in the dynamic display, a newly stored second lottery game The start time of the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the hold information of 1 is more than the start time of the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the hold information of the first lottery game stored earlier It gets faster. However, since the hold display mode is sequentially displayed in the hold display mode indicating the order in which the success or failure judgment condition obtained by combining the first success / failure judgment condition and the second success / failure judgment condition is satisfied, the first lottery stored earlier The hold display mode of the newly stored second lottery game is displayed in the hold display mode indicating the order after the game hold information. Then, there may be a case where the actual start order of the dynamic display and the establishment order of the pass / fail judgment conditions differ, but when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the sorting means changes the actual dynamic display Sorted and displayed in the start order. Therefore, the player can also dynamically start displaying the first identification information or the second identification information in the order different from the order in which the actual success or failure judgment conditions are established. Since the hold display mode is rearranged, confusion of the player can be suppressed.

  A gaming machine A2 characterized in that it has condition distributing means for assisting that the first and second judgment conditions are met alternately in the gaming machine A1.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exerted. That is, it is assisted by the distributing means that the first and second judgment conditions are satisfied alternately. As a result, the first success or failure judgment condition and the second success or failure judgment condition are easily met equally, and by efficiently executing the first lottery game and the second lottery game, more games can be performed in a shorter time. It can be carried out.

  In the gaming machine of the gaming machine A1 or A2, when the first or second judgment condition is newly established and the hold information is stored in the hold information storage means, the sorting means holds the hold information The first or second information corresponding to the newly established holding information and the previously stored holding information, based on the dynamic display start time information corresponding to each holding information previously stored in the storage means. A game machine A3 characterized in that a dynamic display start order of identification information is determined, and the order is related to hold information and stored in the hold information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the first or second validity determination condition is newly established and the hold information is stored in the hold information storage means, the dynamic corresponding to each hold information previously stored in the hold information storage means Based on the display start time information, the dynamic display start order of the first or second identification information corresponding to the newly stored hold information and the previously stored hold information is determined, and the order is each hold It is stored in the hold information storage means by the sorting means in association with the information. Thus, the dynamic display start order is updated each time the first or second validity determination condition is satisfied and the hold information is stored. Therefore, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the hold display mode can be rearranged based on the updated dynamic display start order. Therefore, even when there is a change in the dynamic display start order, it becomes possible to rearrange the hold display mode in the corresponding dynamic display start order, and the player is notified of the correct dynamic display start order. Can.

  The game machine according to any one of the game machines A1 to A3 has operation means operable by the player, and the sorting means satisfies the predetermined condition when the operation means is operated. A game machine A4 characterized in that the hold display mode is rearranged.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are exerted. That is, the player has operation means operable by the player, and the rearrangement means rearranges the hold display mode on condition that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the operation means is operated. A game machine A4 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the operation means operable by the player is operated, the hold display mode is rearranged by the rearrangement means on the assumption that the predetermined condition is satisfied. Thus, it is possible to rearrange the hold display mode at the timing intended by the player, and to notify the player of the correct dynamic display start order at the timing when the player wants to know the correct dynamic display start order. Can.

  In the gaming machine of any one of gaming machines A1 to A4, the sorting means determines that the predetermined condition is established when the first or second success or failure judgment condition is newly established, the hold display A game machine A5 characterized in that the hold display mode displayed on the means is rearranged.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the first or second validity determination condition is newly satisfied, the hold display mode displayed on the hold display unit is rearranged by the rearrangement unit on the assumption that the predetermined condition is satisfied. As a result, when the new hold display mode is displayed, the hold display mode is rearranged, so that the player can know the correct dynamic display start order.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A5, in the special gaming state in which the first lottery game and the second lottery game, which are executed after the bonus game executing means execute the bonus game, are likely to be hit than the normal time The lottery information for drawing whether or not to shift is acquired based on the establishment of the first or second yes / no decision condition, the first or second yes / no decision condition is established, and the decision condition established And storing the lottery information in the suspension information storage unit in association with the suspension information, and storing the reservation information in the suspension information storage unit, the acceptance / rejection determination unit including the suspension information storage unit Until the dynamic display start of the first or second identification information corresponding to each of the hold information stored in the memory based on the dynamic display start time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means , It is determined by the game state lottery means whether the game state of the dynamic display start time information corresponding to the hold information is the special game state, and a preliminary determination is performed to determine in advance whether the acceptance or rejection is performed, the results are each hold In the case where the first or second identification information corresponding to each hold information stored in the hold information storage means becomes dynamically displayable while being stored in the hold information storage means in association with the information The decision is made formally based on the gaming state when the variation start becomes possible, and the dynamic display mode determination means corresponds to the hold information stored in the hold information storage means. Until the first or second identification information becomes able to start dynamic display, the success or failure judgment means determines the dynamic display mode based on the judgment result of the prior judgment stored in the hold information storage means, Retention When the first or second identification information corresponding to the pending information stored in the information storage means can start dynamic display, the dynamic display is performed based on the determination result of the pass / fail determination means executed in that case. A game machine B1 characterized by determining an aspect.

  According to the gaming machine B1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the following effects are exerted. That is, in order to make a lottery whether or not to shift to a special gaming state in which the first lottery game and the second lottery game, which are executed after the bonus game executing means execute the bonus game, are more likely to win than normal. The lottery information of is acquired by the gaming state lottery means based on the establishment of the first or second success or failure judgment condition. In addition, when the first or second success or failure judgment condition is satisfied, and the hold information corresponding to the satisfied judgment condition is stored, the lottery information is held by the gaming state lottery means in relation to the hold information. It is stored in the information storage means. Until the first or second identification information corresponding to each hold information stored in the hold information storage means becomes able to start dynamic display, based on the dynamic display start time decided by the dynamic display start time decision means It is judged by the game state lottery means whether the game state at the time of the dynamic display start corresponding to each hold information is the special game state, and the pre-judgment to perform the presumptive judgment in advance is executed by the pass / fail judgment means. Then, the result is stored in the hold storage means by the pass / fail judgment means in association with each hold information. On the other hand, when the first or second identification information corresponding to each hold information stored in the hold information storage means can start dynamic display, the pass / fail judgment based on the gaming state in that case is judged to be a pass / fail. Officially implemented by means. Until the first or second identification information corresponding to the pending information stored in the pending information storage means can start dynamic display, based on the determination result of the prior determination by the pass / fail decision means stored in the pending information storage means The dynamic display time is determined. On the other hand, when the first or second identification information corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold information storage means can start dynamic display, based on the judgment result of the pass / fail judgment means executed in that case. The dynamic display time is determined by the dynamic display time determination means. As a result, even if the hold information is newly stored and the dynamic display start order is changed, the gaming state at the start of the dynamic display is judged based on the correct dynamic display start order, and the propriety determination is performed. . Therefore, the dynamic display time can be determined in advance based on the correct validity determination result, and it is possible to determine the correct dynamic display start order also when a new success or failure determination condition is satisfied next.

  Success or failure judgment means that executes the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment conditions, and executes the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment conditions First display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating the result of determination of success or failure of the first lottery game by means, in the order in which the first condition for acceptance judgment is satisfied, and second lottery game of the condition for success Second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating the result of the determination whether the second determination result is satisfied or not, and the first identification means for the first display means Display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of information on the second display means respectively, and a result of the pass / fail judgment by the pass / fail judgment means becomes a hit, and the display control means causes the first or second display means First or second identification In the gaming machine having a bonus game execution means for providing a bonus game which is advantageous to the player when the information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, the first success / failure determination condition and the second success / failure condition The first or the first upper limit number of times up to a predetermined upper limit number of times when the first or second success or failure judgment condition is satisfied, which is assisted by the condition distributing unit assisting the establishment of the judgment condition alternately and the condition distribution unit [2] A game machine C1 having a reserve storage means for storing a right to play a lottery game.

  According to the gaming machine C1, based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Further, based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. The dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first success or failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the success or failure judgment result of the second lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second success / failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Here, the first identification information is a first display means, and the second identification information is a second display means, and can be dynamically displayed by the display control means. And, when the result of judgment of success or failure by the success or failure judgment means becomes a hit and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing a hit by the display control means, a bonus game which is advantageous to the player is executed. It is carried out by means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. It is assisted by the condition distributing means that the first and second judgment conditions are satisfied alternately. The right to perform the first or second lottery game up to a predetermined upper limit number is stored by the hold storage means when the first or second validity determination conditions are satisfied, assisted by the condition distribution means. As a result, the first success or failure judgment condition and the second success or failure judgment condition are easily met equally, and the right to play the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be stored uniformly, and the first lottery game is played. It is possible to prevent any one of the right and the right to play the second lottery game from being biased and being stored earlier up to the upper limit number. Therefore, to store the right to perform the first lottery game and the second lottery game up to the upper limit number respectively, it is possible to suppress the problem that the right more than the upper limit number is generated in either one and becomes invalid. it can.

  In the gaming machine of the gaming machine C1, when the gaming area and the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area enter, the first starting opening, which satisfies the first success or failure judgment condition, and the game flowing down the gaming area The ball has a second start-up opening where the second hit / fail determination condition is satisfied when the ball enters the ball, and the condition distributing means has game balls at the first start-up opening and the second start-up opening. A game machine C2 characterized by having a game ball guiding portion for assisting in entering alternately.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the gaming machine C1, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the game ball flowing down the game area enters the first starting opening, the first hit determination condition is satisfied, while when the game ball enters the second starting opening, the second hit determination condition is satisfied. Ru. It is assisted by the game ball guiding portion of the condition distributing means that the game balls alternately enter the first starting opening and the second starting opening. As a result, the player can easily cause the game ball to alternately enter the first starting port and the second starting port by causing the game ball to flow down to the game area, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game Can be performed efficiently, so that many lottery games can be performed in a shorter time.

  In the gaming machine of gaming machine C2, when the first or second judgment condition is newly established and the hold information is stored in the hold information storage means, the sorting means holds the hold information storage means Of the first or second identification information corresponding to the newly established holding information and the previously stored holding information, based on the dynamic display start time corresponding to each holding information previously stored in A game machine C3 characterized in that a dynamic display start order is determined, and the order is stored in the hold information storage means in association with the hold information.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the gaming machine C2, the following effects are exerted. That is, the gaming ball entered from the entrance of the condition distributing means is rotated by a predetermined angle in the first direction to the first starting opening through the first guiding path to the gaming ball by the gaming ball guiding portion After being guided, the game ball entered from the ball entry next is received while being rotated to a predetermined angle in the first direction, and is rotated at a predetermined angle in a second direction opposite to the first direction. The gaming ball is guided by the gaming ball guiding portion to the second starting opening through the second guiding path. Thereby, it becomes possible to distribute and guide game balls alternately to the first starting opening and the second starting opening using a common member, and a member for distributing to the first starting opening and the second starting opening respectively As compared with the case where is provided, the structure for distributing the game balls can be made compact.

  In the gaming machine of gaming machine C3, the gaming ball guiding portion of the condition distributing means is disposed at a position facing the gaming ball having entered the ball entrance while being rotated to the predetermined angle in the first direction. And the ball enters the ball entrance when the game machine ball receives the ball and enters the second direction, and the first passive part rotates to the predetermined angle, and the second direction rotates to the predetermined angle. A second passive unit is disposed at a position facing the gaming ball, receives the gaming ball having entered the ball, and rotates to a predetermined angle, and the gaming ball received by the first passive unit from the ball entry port is received Prevents the game ball from rotating in the first direction before the game ball enters the ball entry port after the game machine rotates in the second direction, or the second passive part enters the ball After receiving the game ball entered from the mouth and rotating it in the first direction, before the game ball enters the ball entry port next time Gaming machine C4, characterized in that a, a rotation restricting portion which prevents the pivoting in the second direction.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the gaming machine C3, the following effects are exerted. That is, the first passive portion of the gaming ball guiding portion is disposed at a position facing the gaming ball having entered the ball entrance with the gaming ball guiding portion of the condition distributing means being rotated to a predetermined angle in the first direction. When the first passive portion receives the entered game ball, it is rotated in the second direction to a predetermined angle. Further, the second passive part of the gaming ball guiding part is disposed at a position facing the gaming ball having entered the ball entrance with the gaming ball guiding part of the condition distributing means being rotated to a predetermined angle in the second direction. When the second passive portion receives the entered game ball, the game ball is rotated in the first direction to a predetermined angle. After the first passive part receives the game ball entered from the ball entrance and rotates in the second direction, it may then rotate in the first direction before the game ball enters the ball entrance. Or, after the second passive part receives the game ball having entered the ball from the ball entrance and is rotated in the first direction, it is then rotated in the second direction before the game ball enters the ball inlet. This is prevented by the rotation restricting portion. Thus, after the gaming ball guiding portion is rotated to guide the gaming ball to one of the guiding paths, the next gaming ball is rotated in the other direction before entering the ball, and then the ball is entered next. A game ball can also be prevented from having a problem that it is guided to the same route as the game ball entered in front of the game ball. Therefore, it becomes possible to guide the game ball entering the ball entrance to the first starting opening and the second starting opening more accurately alternately, and the right to carry out the first lottery game and the second lottery game is equalized. Can be stored.

  The gaming machine of the gaming machine C1 has a gaming area and a common starting opening which establishes the first or second pass / fail judgment condition when a game ball flowing down the gaming area enters the ball, The condition distributing means is characterized in that the first success or failure judgment condition and the second success or failure judgment condition are satisfied alternately in a controlled manner every time the game ball enters the common starting opening. Machine C5.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the gaming machine C1, the following effects are exerted. That is, each time the game ball flowing down the game area enters the common starting opening, establishment of the first and second judgment conditions is alternately distributed by the condition distributing means in a controlled manner. Thereby, the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be alternately performed with the common starting opening, and the gaming area can be configured compactly.

  In the gaming machine A1 to A5 or B1, after the execution of sorting display of the hold display mode on the hold display means by the sorting means, the first or second success or failure judgment condition is newly established. In this case, with the display order of the displayed pending display modes being rearranged, the pending display mode indicating the newly established first or second success or failure judgment condition is in the order in which the pending display modes are established. A game machine D1 characterized by being displayed on a display means.

  According to the gaming machine D1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5 and B1, the following effects are exerted. That is, after the execution of the rearrangement display of the suspension display mode by the suspension display means by the rearrangement means, when the first or second success or failure judgment condition is satisfied, the display order of the suspension display mode displayed in rearrangement is maintained In the hold state, the hold display mode indicating the newly established first or second pass / fail judgment condition is displayed on the hold display means in the order of the hold. As a result, even when the first or second validity determination condition is satisfied and the corresponding hold display mode is displayed after the execution of the sort display, the display order of the hold display modes displayed in the rear view is maintained. Thus, the player can correctly recognize the order of starting the dynamic display at the time of sorting. Therefore, the player must identify whether the display mode in which the sorting has been performed or the display mode in which the sorting is not performed is performed before or after the timing in which the display mode is displayed is before or after the sorting is performed. Can. Therefore, it can be easily recognized which order the hold display mode indicates.

  In the gaming machine of the gaming machine D1, the sorting display is performed in a state where the pending display mode in which the sorting display has been performed and the pending display mode in which the sorting display is not performed are mixedly displayed on the pending display means. When a predetermined condition which becomes an execution trigger of the means is newly established, the sorting means sorts all the pending display modes displayed on the pending display means in the order of starting the dynamic display. A game machine D2 characterized by being a game machine.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exerted. That is, in a state in which the pending display mode in which the sorting display has been performed and the pending display mode not yet executed are mixedly displayed on the pending display means, a predetermined condition that triggers the execution of the sorting means is newly added. If the condition is satisfied, all the pending display modes displayed on the pending display means are rearranged by the sorting means in the order of starting the dynamic display. As a result, even if the pending display modes of the reordering execution and the reordering non-execution are mixedly displayed, the reordering is executed again to arrange the order of starting the accurate dynamic display, It can be identified by the pending display mode after execution of replacement.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, the on-hold information storage means determines the on / off status by the on / off determination means based on the establishment of the first or second on / off determination condition. A normal hold storage area in which normal hold information including at least the decision information for use and the dynamic display determination information used for determining the dynamic display mode by the dynamic display mode determination means is stored, and the normal hold storage area Before the first or second identification information corresponding to the stored normal holding information can be displayed dynamically, based on the normal holding information, the result of the judgment of the appropriateness by the judgment unit and the determination of the dynamic display mode are made in advance Means for determining the dynamic display mode by the means and the dynamic display start time information by the dynamic display start time information determining means, and storing as sorting information Storage area, and when the first or second validity determination condition is newly established, based on the dynamic display start time information corresponding to each sorting information stored ahead of the sorting pending storage area. The first or second identification information corresponding to the normal hold information stored in the normal hold storage area newly established and the normal hold information previously stored in the normal hold storage area. A game machine E1 comprising: rearrangement order determination means for determining the order in which the dynamic display is started and storing the order in the rearrangement storage area.

  According to the gaming machine E1, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine described in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, the following effects are exerted. That is, based on the establishment of the first or second propriety determination condition, the normal suspension information having at least the propriety determination information used for the propriety determination and the dynamic display determination information used for determining the dynamic display mode is the suspension information storage It is stored in the normal storage area of the means. Before the first or second identification information corresponding to the normal hold information stored in the normal hold storage area can be dynamically displayed, a result of determination of success or failure and a dynamic display mode are made in advance based on the normal hold information. Dynamic display start time information is determined and stored as sorting information in the sorting storage area of the storage information storage means. When the first or second validity determination condition is newly established, the condition is newly established based on the dynamic display start time information corresponding to each sorting information stored ahead of the sorting pending storage area, and the normal holding is performed. Determining the order in which the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the normal hold information stored in the memory area and the normal hold information previously stored in the normal memory area is started, The order is stored in the rearrangement reserve storage area by the rearrangement order determining means. This makes it possible to separately process the data for performing the lottery game and the data for determining the rearrangement order, and to facilitate the process of determining the rearrangement order. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the processing for executing the rearrangement and the like, and it is possible to facilitate the development of the gaming machine.

  The gaming machine of the gaming machine E1 includes main control means for executing main control of the game and slave control means for executing game control according to a slave control signal output by the master control means, the main control The means has the pending information storage means, the sorting information is stored in the sorting pending storage area of the pending information storage means, and the sorting order is determined by the sorting order determining means based on the sorting information. Each time it is determined, a winning signal indicating each sorting order stored in the sorting reserve storage area is output to the slave control means, and the slave control means indicates the winning signal based on the winning signal. According to the secondary suspension information storage means having secondary secondary storage area in which each secondary sort order is stored, and the secondary display mode rearrangement based on the primary sequence stored in the secondary secondary storage area. Gaming machine E2, characterized in that it has a, and the rearrangement unit that row.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the control of the game is executed by the sub control means in accordance with the sub control signal from the main control means which executes the main control of the game. Reordering information is stored in the reordering storage area of the main control means, and stored in the reordering storage area every time the reordering order is determined by the reordering order determining means based on the reordering information. A winning signal indicating each sort order is output by the main control means to the secondary control means. Further, in the secondary control means, the respective rearranging orders indicated by the winning signal are stored in the secondary rearrangement hold storage area of the secondary hold information storage means. Then, based on the sorting order stored in the secondary sorting reserve storage area, the sorting of the reserve display mode is executed by the sorting means of the secondary control means. As a result, the main control means does not have to perform processing to rearrange the hold display mode even if a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the control load of the main control means can be reduced.

  The gaming machine of the gaming machine E1 includes main control means for executing main control of the game and slave control means for executing game control according to a slave control signal output by the master control means, the main control The means has the pending information storage means, and indicates each of the sorting information stored in the sorting pending storage area every time the sorting information is stored in the sorting pending storage area of the pending information storage means. A prize signal is output to the slave control means, and the slave control means includes a slave sort information storage means having a slave sort storage area in which each sort of sorting information indicated by the winning signal is stored based on the prize signal. And determining the sorting order based on the dynamic display start time in each sorting information of the secondary sorting reserve storage area, and storing the secondary sorting reserve storage area in the secondary sorting reserve storage area; ,Previous Gaming machine E3 based on the sort order stored in the slave rearrangement reserved memory area, and having a said rearrangement means for performing the rearrangement of the hold display mode.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the control of the game is executed by the sub control means in accordance with the sub control signal from the main control means which executes the main control of the game. Every time the sorting information is stored in the sorting storage area of the main control means, a winning signal indicating each sorting information stored in the sorting storage area is outputted by the main control means to the secondary control means. Further, in the secondary control means, the respective rearrangement information indicated by the winning signal is stored in the secondary rearrangement hold storage area of the secondary hold information storage means. Then, the sorting order is determined based on the dynamic display start time in the sorting information stored in the secondary sorting reserve storage area, and the secondary sorting reserve storage area according to the sorting order determination means of the control means It is memorized. Reordering of the hold display mode is executed by the reordering means of the sub control means based on the stored reordering order. As a result, the main control means does not have to determine the rearrangement order, and the secondary control means can determine the rearrangement order based on the winning signal, so that the control load on the main control means can be reduced. . Therefore, the reordering of the hold display mode can be executed with the control load of the main control means suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, or E1 to E3, the on-hold information storage unit determines the on-off state based on the establishment of the first or second on-off determination condition. Stored in a normal hold storage area in which the pass / fail judgment information used for the pass / fail judgment by the means and the dynamic display decision information used in the determination of the dynamic display mode by the dynamic display mode decision means Before the first or second identification information corresponding to each information can be displayed dynamically, based on the respective information in advance, the result of A reordering storage area in which a dynamic display mode and dynamic display start time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means are determined and stored as reordering information; When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the means stores the reordering valid information in the reordering pending storage area for each pending display mode displayed at that time, and the reordering pending storage area A gaming machine F1 for performing sorting of the hold display mode displayed on the hold display means based on each sort of sorting information.

  According to the gaming machine F1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, or E1 to E3, the following effects are exerted. That is, based on the establishment of the first or second success or failure judgment condition, the normality holding storage area of the holding information storage means is the success / failure determination information used for the success / failure determination and the dynamic display determination information used for determining the dynamic display mode. Is stored in Before the first or second identification information corresponding to each information stored in the normal storage area can be displayed dynamically, based on the respective information, a result of determination of success or failure and a dynamic display mode and a motion are made in advance. The target display start time information is determined and stored as sorting information in the sorting holding storage area of the holding information storage means. When a predetermined condition is satisfied, the reordering means stores the reordering effective information in the reordering pending storage area for each pending display mode displayed at that time, and the respective reordering pending storage areas Based on the sorting information, sorting of the hold display mode displayed on the hold display unit is performed. Therefore, the hold display mode displayed when the predetermined condition is established can be accurately rearranged in the order of starting the dynamic display.

  In the gaming machine of the gaming machine F1, the sorting means repeatedly updates and displays the hold display mode displayed on the hold display means for each predetermined update opportunity, and holds the hold display means to the hold display means. With regard to the display mode of the display mode, the hold display mode of the rearrangement hold storage area in which the rearrangement effective information is stored is rearranged and displayed in the order of starting the dynamic display, while the rearrangement effective information is stored. A gaming machine F2 characterized in that the pending display mode of the sorting pending storage area not being displayed is displayed in the order in which the first or second pass / fail determination condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine F1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the gaming machine F1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the hold display mode displayed on the hold display means is repeatedly updated every predetermined update opportunity and displayed by the sorting means. The pending display mode of the sorting pending display area in which the sorting valid information is stored is sorted by the order in which the dynamic display is started and displayed by the sorting means. On the other hand, the pending display mode in which the sorting effective information is not stored is displayed by the sorting means in the order in which the first or second yes / no decision condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to maintain and display the pending display mode in which the sorting is performed, in the order in which the dynamic display starts accurately. Therefore, it is possible to divide and display the pending display mode which has not been sorted and has not been sorted, and even if a new pending display mode is displayed after the sorting is executed, the dynamic of the pending display mode which has already been sorted The player can easily recognize the order in which the display is started.

  In the gaming machine A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, or E1 to E3, F1 or F2, the first lottery game and the second lottery are executed after the bonus game executing means executes the bonus game The lottery information for lottery whether or not to make a transition to a special gaming state in which the success or failure judgment with the game is likely to be hit is obtained on the basis of the establishment of the first or second success / failure judgment condition When storing the hold information corresponding to the 1st or 2nd success or failure judgment condition satisfied and the satisfied or not judgment condition satisfied, the game in which the lottery information is stored in the hold information storage means in relation to the held information The dynamic display start time information includes state lottery means, and when the first or second yes / no decision condition is newly established and the hold information is stored in the hold information storage means The game when it becomes possible to start the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the newly stored suspension information based on the dynamic display start time information determined by the deciding means The game state lottery means determines whether the state is the special game state, performs pre-judgment to make a pass / fail judgment in advance, stores the result in the hold information storage means, and the result of the pass / fail judgment is If it is a touch to shift to the special game state, and the order in which the dynamic display corresponding to the newly stored hold information is earlier than the hold information previously stored, the newly stored With respect to the hold information which becomes an order after the order to become the dynamic display start corresponding to the held information, whether the game state when starting the dynamic display is the special game state again, The game state lottery means Each of the determinations is performed to execute in advance a preliminary determination to perform a yes or no decision, and the result is stored in the suspension information storage unit, and the dynamic display mode determination unit is the suspension information storage unit Until the first or second identification information corresponding to the suspension information stored in the memory can be dynamically displayed, the acceptance determination unit determines whether or not new suspension information is stored in the suspension information storage unit. The dynamic display mode is determined in advance based on the determination result of the prior determination stored in the suspension information storage unit and stored in the suspension information storage unit while the suspension information stored in the suspension information storage unit is stored. When the first or second identification information corresponding to the information becomes able to start dynamic display, the dynamic display mode is determined based on the determination result of the propriety determination means executed in that case. To A game machine G1 to be characterized.

  According to the gaming machine G1, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2, the following effects are exerted. That is, in order to make a lottery whether or not to shift to a special gaming state in which the first lottery game and the second lottery game, which are executed after the bonus game executing means execute the bonus game, are more likely to win than normal. The lottery information of is selected by the gaming state lottery means based on the establishment of the first or second success / failure determination condition. Further, when the first or second success or failure judgment condition is satisfied, and the hold information corresponding to the satisfied or not judgment condition is stored, the lottery result is held by the gaming state lottery means in relation to the hold information. It is stored in the information storage means. When the first or second validity determination condition is newly established and the hold information is stored in the hold information storage means, based on the dynamic display start time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determination means The game state lottery means determines whether the game state when the first or second identification information corresponding to the newly stored hold information is able to start dynamic display is the special game state, in advance The pre-judging to make a pass / fail decision is executed by the pass / fail decision means, and the result is stored in the pending information storage means. Then, if the result is the transition to the special game state, and the order in which the dynamic display corresponding to the newly stored hold information is earlier than the hold information previously stored, then The game state lottery means respectively determines whether or not the game state when starting the dynamic display is the special game state again with respect to the hold information which becomes the order of, and the prior judgment to make a pass / fail judgment in advance is success or failure It is executed by the determination means, and the result is stored in the pending information storage means. Until new display information is stored in the suspension information storage unit, until the first or second identification information corresponding to the suspension information stored in the suspension information storage unit becomes capable of dynamic display start, The dynamic display mode is determined in advance by the dynamic display mode determination unit based on the determination result, and is stored in the hold information storage unit. On the other hand, when the first or second identification information corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold information storage means can start dynamic display, based on the judgment result of the pass / fail judgment means executed in that case. The dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. As a result, the hold information is newly stored, and the order of starting the dynamic display is changed, and even if the hold determination result of the hold information stored earlier is changed, the hold determination result is used. It can be re-judged in advance as appropriate. Therefore, the dynamic display mode can be determined again based on the latest result of the success or failure determination, and the order in which the dynamic display starts can be correctly determined. Therefore, the hold display modes can be rearranged in the order in which the dynamic display starts.

  The main control means for performing main control of the game, and the secondary control means for performing control of the game based on the secondary control signal from the main control means, the main control means is the first success or failure determination condition The second lottery game is executed based on the establishment of the second lottery condition based on the establishment of the first lottery game, and the sub-control unit is configured to execute the second lottery procedure based on the establishment of the second lottery condition; First display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating the result of determination of the success or failure of the first lottery game by the success / failure determination means of the main control means, in the order in which the first success / failure determination conditions are satisfied; The second display means is dynamically displayed with the second identification information indicating the success or failure judgment result of the second lottery game by the success or failure judgment means of the means in the order in which the second success or failure judgment condition is satisfied, and the first identification information The second display of the second identification information on the first display means And a display control unit capable of performing dynamic display control on each of the stages, and the judgment result of the judgment by the judgment unit becomes a hit, and the first or second display unit displays the first display unit by the display control unit. Alternatively, in the gaming machine to which a bonus game advantageous to the player is given when the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, the main control means is based on the judgment result of the success or failure judgment means. Dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the first or second identification information at a predetermined dynamic display time, and the dynamic display determined by the dynamic display mode determining means In the case where the display mode signal generation means generates the display mode signal based on the mode and outputs it to the secondary control means, and either the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit If, on the other hand, the first or second identification information is being displayed dynamically, an interruption signal instructing interruption of the dynamic display is generated, while based on the completion of the bonus game based on that hit And management signal generation means for generating a restart signal for instructing restart of the interrupted dynamic display, and the display control means of the slave control means displays the display based on the reception of the display mode signal. The dynamic display mode indicated by the mode signal is displayed dynamically on the first or second display means, and the slave control means determines the time of the dynamic display based on the reception of the display mode signal. Based on the dynamic display time measuring means for measuring, the slave time managing means for interrupting the measurement of the dynamic display time measuring means based on the reception of the interruption signal, and the reception of the resume signal. Suspended dynamic display The remaining remaining dynamic display time is determined from the measurement time of the dynamic display time measuring means, and the remaining of the first or second identification information interrupted according to the remaining dynamic display time A following redisplay mode determination means for determining a dynamic redisplay mode which is a dynamic display mode to be displayed during the dynamic display time of the game machine H1.

  According to the gaming machine H1, the control of the game is executed by the slave control means in accordance with the slave control signal from the main control means for executing the main control of the game. In the main control means, on the basis of the establishment of the first success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment on the first lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Further, based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Further, in the secondary control means, the dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the success / failure determination of the first lottery game by the success / failure determination means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first success / failure determination conditions are satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the success or failure judgment result of the second lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second success / failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Here, the first identification information is a first display means, and the second identification information is a second display means, and can be dynamically displayed by the display control means. Then, when the judgment result of the judgment by the judgment unit becomes a hit, and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit by the display control unit, a bonus game which is advantageous to the player is awarded. . Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. Further, in the main control means, the dynamic display mode determination means determines a dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the first or second identification information in a predetermined dynamic display time. A display mode signal is generated by the display mode signal generating means based on the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means, and is output to the slave control means. Then, when one of the first and second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a collision, the other first or second identification information is dynamically displayed, if An interruption signal indicating interruption is generated by the management signal generating means. On the other hand, on the basis of the end of the bonus game based on the winning, a restart signal instructing restart of the interrupted dynamic display is generated by the management signal generation means. In the slave control means, on the basis of the reception of the display mode signal, the dynamic display mode indicated by the display mode signal is displayed on the first or second display means by the display control means. Based on the reception of the display mode signal from the main control means, the time of the dynamic display is measured by the dynamic display time measuring means. The measurement of the dynamic display time measuring means is interrupted by the slave time managing means based on the reception of the interruption signal from the main control means. On the other hand, based on the reception of the resumption signal from the main control means, the remaining dynamic display time of the suspended dynamic display mode is determined from the measurement time of the dynamic display time measurement means, and the remaining The dynamic display mode which is a dynamic display mode to be displayed at the remaining dynamic display time of the first or second identification information which has been interrupted according to the dynamic display time of Be done. Therefore, when the dynamic display of the first or second identification information interrupted during the bonus game is started, the dynamic re-display mode according to the remaining time is determined. The lottery result can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner in the dynamic redisplay mode according to the display time. Also, even if the main control means does not select the dynamic re-displaying mode according to the remaining dynamic display time and instructs the slave control means, the slave control means performs the dynamic re-reading according to the remaining dynamic display time. Since the display mode is determined, the control load on the main control means can be reduced. Therefore, even with the gaming machine that simultaneously executes the first lottery game and the second lottery game, it is possible to suppress the load increase of the main control means and perform various effects of the game.

  In the gaming machine of the gaming machine H1, when it is determined that the remaining dynamic display time is equal to or less than the reference time, the driven redisplay mode determination means is configured by the dynamic display time within the reference time. While determining the short dynamic redisplay aspect which is the dynamic redisplay aspect, the dynamic display time being longer than the reference time if it is determined that the remaining dynamic display time is longer than the reference time A game machine H2 characterized by determining a normal dynamic re-display mode which is the dynamic re-display mode configured by a display time.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the gaming machine H1, the following effects are exerted. That is, when it is determined by the secondary control means that the remaining dynamic display time is equal to or less than the reference time, the short dynamic redisplay mode is a dynamic redisplay mode configured with the dynamic display time within the reference time. The display mode is determined by the driven redisplay mode determining means. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining dynamic display time is longer than the reference time, the normal dynamic redisplay mode is determined by the driven redisplay determination means. Thus, it is possible to determine the dynamic redisplay mode in accordance with the remaining dynamic display time. Therefore, even when the remaining dynamic display time is short, by determining the dedicated dynamic re-display mode, it is possible to inform the determination result of the lottery game so that the player can easily understand.

  A gaming machine according to any one of gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, C1 to C5, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2, G1, H1 or H2, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine I1. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display device may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

  A gaming machine I2 according to any one of gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, C1 to C5, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2, G1, H1 or H2 characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine . Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  In any one of gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, C1 to C5, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2, G1, H1 or H2, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine A gaming machine I3 characterized by being. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
22 frame button (operation means)
63a 1st starting opening (1st starting opening)
63b second starting port (second starting port)
81 3rd symbol display device (1st display means, 2nd display means)
114 Display control device (part of display control means)
201 MPU (judgment means)
630 Distribution device (condition distribution means)
640 passive distribution member (game ball guidance part)
640a, 640b accommodation unit (first passive unit, second passive unit)
640c magnet (part of rotation regulation part)
900a Base side magnet (part of rotation regulation part)
S103 (Bonus game execution means)

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when game balls enter a plurality of starting openings provided on the game board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and the dynamic display of the special symbol notifying the lottery result is also the runs have been proposed in the display device.

JP, 2005-319221, A

However, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game .

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises a first acquisition means for acquiring first information based on establishment of a first acquisition condition, and second information based on establishment of a second acquisition condition. Second acquisition means for acquiring, first judgment means for executing a judgment triggered by establishment of a first judgment condition based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means, and acquisition by the second acquisition means A second determination unit that executes determination based on establishment of a second determination condition based on the second information, and first identification information for indicating the determination result of the first information by the first determination unit; And display means capable of displaying second identification information for indicating the determination result of the second information by the second determination means, and displaying the first identification information dynamically on the display means for a predetermined first period. A first dynamic display means, and the second identification information on the display means And second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification during a predetermined second period, and the second dynamic display means dynamically displays the first identification information by the first dynamic display means. The second identification information can be dynamically displayed by the display means, and when the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed on the display means in a specific display mode, A specific game corresponding to the game is executed, and the first storage means capable of storing the first information acquired by the first acquisition means with the first predetermined number as the upper limit, and the above acquired by the second acquisition means A second storage unit capable of storing the second information with a second predetermined number as an upper limit; first storage number information capable of identifying the storage number of the first information stored in the first storage unit; A second storage means for storing the second information stored in the second storage means; Stored information display means for causing the display means to display the storage number information in a predetermined stored display mode, the first identification information corresponding to the first information stored in the first storage means, and the second storage An order discriminating means for discriminating a dynamic display order in which the second identification information corresponding to the second information stored in the means is dynamically displayed, and a discrimination result by the order discriminating means is a predetermined discrimination result And a display mode changing means for changing the storage display mode displayed on the display means to a specific storage display mode, and the specific storage display mode is determined by the order determining means. By rearranging the display position of the storage display mode for indicating the first storage number information and the display position of the storage display mode for indicating the second storage number information based on the target display order, Said first memory The display position of the storage display mode for indicating the number information is made different from the display position of the storage display mode for indicating the second storage number information.

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect , the first acquisition means for acquiring the first information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and the second acquisition for acquiring the second information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition Means, first determination means for performing determination based on establishment of the first determination condition based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means, and the second acquired by the second acquisition means A second determination unit that executes determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition based on information; first identification information for indicating a determination result of the first information by the first determination unit; and the second determination Display means capable of displaying second identification information for indicating the determination result of the second information by means, and first dynamic display for causing the display means to dynamically display the first identification information for a predetermined first period Means, and said display means for said second identification information for a predetermined second period And second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification by the second dynamic display means while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means It is configured to be able to dynamically display information, and when the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode on the display means, specific games corresponding to each are executed. A first storage unit capable of storing the first information acquired by the first acquisition unit up to a first predetermined number, and a second storage unit acquired by the second acquisition unit; A second storage unit capable of storing the upper limit of the predetermined number of data in the upper limit, first storage number information capable of identifying the storage number of the first information stored in the first storage unit, and the second storage unit And second storage number information capable of identifying the storage number of the second information. Stored information display means to be displayed on the display means in a predetermined stored display mode, the first identification information corresponding to the first information stored in the first storage means, and the stored in the second storage means Order determining means for determining a dynamic display order in which the second identification information corresponding to the second information is dynamically displayed, and the display means when the determination result by the order determining means is a predetermined determination result The display mode changing means for changing the storage display mode displayed on the display mode to the specific storage display mode, and the specific storage display mode is based on the dynamic display order determined by the order determination means The first storage number information by rearranging a display position of the storage display mode for indicating the first storage number information and a display position of the storage display mode for indicating the second storage number information To indicate The display position of the storage display mode is different from the display position of the storage display mode for indicating the second storage number information.

This has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. (A) is the figure which saw through the inside from the front side of the distribution apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the figure which saw through the inside from the back side of the distribution apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display device in a 1st embodiment, (b) is a reservation symbol display displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in a 1st embodiment It is the figure which showed typically the display mode before rearranging and after rearranging. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the various counters in 1st Embodiment, a special symbol holding ball storage area, a special symbol holding ball execution area, a normal symbol holding ball storage area, and a normal symbol holding ball execution area. (A) is a figure which showed typically the content of ROM of the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed the big hit random number table in 1st Embodiment typically, (C) is a figure which showed typically the jackpot classification table in 1st Embodiment, (d) is a figure which showed typically the random symbol per symbol table in 1st Embodiment typically. (A) is a figure which showed typically the rearrangement reserve storage area in 1st Embodiment, (b) is a figure which showed the secondary rearrangement reserve storage area in 1st Embodiment typically. . (A) is a figure which showed typically the normal time special hitting variation pattern table in a 1st embodiment typically, and (b) showed the normal time special deviation variation pattern table in a 1st embodiment typically FIG. (A) is a figure which showed typically the time reduction and probability change special hitting change pattern table in 1st Embodiment, (b) is a model which shows time deviation and probability change special deviation change pattern table in 1st Embodiment. FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the process of rearrangement of the reservation symbol display in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the process of rearrangement of the reservation symbol display in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start processing performed by MPU in the main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit judging processing performed by MPU in the main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection processing performed by MPU in the main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change stop processing performed by MPU in the main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation start process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol change stop processing performed by MPU in the main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st prefetch process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st prefetch update process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prefetch process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prefetch update process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol change process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding number display update process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flow chart which showed change display setting processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 1st embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the temporary fluctuation | variation stop process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation rearrangement process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 40, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63a, 63b, 67, etc. is detachably mounted from the back side. Balls are played by balls flowing down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 6) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is an open / close shaft. The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of a resin part for decoration, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be viewed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box-like shape with the upper surface opened and protruding upward, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination causes the ball inserted into the upper plate 17 to be guided to the ball firing unit 112a. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when rearranging the reserved symbol displays (Ds1 to Ds8) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2) described later.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or blinking according to the change of the gaming state at the time of the jackpot or the predetermined reach, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front surface frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time.

  A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side of the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen. 2), and the like can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player for driving a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed, and driving of the ball launch unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Sensor 51a, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 based on a change in electric resistance (Not shown) is built in. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of operation, and the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is then driven to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "dollar box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails for guiding balls, windmills and rails 61, 62, a first starting opening 63a, a first 2 The starting opening 63b, the first variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge portion is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The first start opening 63a, the second start opening 63b, the first variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and from the front side of the game board 13 It is fixed by wood screws etc. The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front of the game board 13, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, a belt-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is formed. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is formed by dividing two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 into a substantially circular area (a winning opening etc. is disposed, and a shot ball is (Flowing down area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated. In addition, a resin-made arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. It is driven in and fixed to the plate 60.

  A sorting winning device 630 is provided at the lower center of the game area. FIG. 4A is a perspective view of the sorting winning device 630 as viewed from the front. FIG. 4B is a perspective view of the sorting winning device 630 as viewed from the back.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, in the sorting winning device 630, an ordinary electric wheeled product 64 is provided at the top. In the normal state, the ordinary electric character 64 is disposed with the opposing wings 64a and 64b standing upward at an interval (about 11 mm in diameter of the game ball) in which the game balls can enter approximately one ball. . The route through which the game ball enters the sorting device 630 is only the route passing between the blades 64a and 64b of the ordinary electric character 64 in the normal state (the blades 64a and 64b standing upward). The player first shoots the game ball so that the game ball passes between the blades 64a and 64b of the ordinary electric character 64.

  When the game ball enters the distribution device 630, the passive distribution member 640 is disposed, and the accommodation ball 640a or 640b of the passive distribution member 640 receives the entered game ball. When the game ball is received by the housing section 640a, the passive distribution member 640 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front (see FIG. 4A) due to the weight of the game ball, and the game ball is moved to the first starting opening. Guide to 63a. Here, the passive distribution members 640 are configured to be rotatable about 90 degrees around the left and right, respectively, and a magnet 640 c is provided on the boundary wall between the housing portion 640 a and the housing portion 640 b.

  In the base body 900 provided on the back side of the sorting winning device 630, the magnet 640c of the passive sorting member 640 is disposed on the center line between the blades 64a and 64b of the ordinary electric role piece 64 and the base side magnet 900a is disposed. It is done. As shown in a top view of the sorting winning device 630 shown in FIG. 4C, the magnet 640c of the passive sorting member 640 and the base-side magnet 900a are configured to have mutually opposing polarities. In detail, the base-side magnet 900a is formed of a rod-like magnet fixed to the base body 900, and is configured to generate a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) at its tip. The base-side magnet 900 a is disposed and fixed so that its tip end faces the passive distribution member 640 side.

  The magnet 640c of the passive distribution unit 640 is also formed of a rod-shaped magnet in the same manner as the base side magnet 900a, and is fixed to the passive distribution member 640 so that the tip end faces the base side magnet 900a. At a position where the passive distribution member 640 rotates and the boundary wall of the housing portion 640a and the housing portion 640b is directly above (the center line of the interval at which the opposing wings 64a and 64b can enter the ball approximately one ball) The base magnet 900a and the magnet 640c of the passive distribution member 640 come closest to each other (the tips thereof face each other). Here, since the magnets are arranged to have the same polarity (for example, the N pole and the N pole), the repulsion case, the stop of the boundary wall of the passive distribution member 640 may be at a position where it is just upward It will be maintained in the position rotated to either the left or right.

  As a result, when the magnet 640c is at a position (upper position) where the magnet 640c is on the center line between the blade 64a and the blade 64b of the normal motorized product 64, the passive distribution member 640 Due to repulsion, the passive distribution member 640 rotates to either the left or right side, and one of the housing portion 640 a and the housing portion 640 b receives the game ball entering the distribution device 630 (upper side of the gaming machine) Will turn to Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of ball clogging due to the entering game ball coming into contact with the boundary wall between the accommodation portion 640a and the accommodation portion 640b.

  Further, for example, the housing portion 640a receives the gaming ball and rotates about 90 degrees to the left by the repulsion of the magnet 640c and the base-side magnet 900c, so that the gaming ball is guided to the first starting opening 63a. It is possible to prevent the distributing member 640 from rotating to the right (the housing portion 640a faces upward). As a result, after guiding the gaming ball to the first starting opening 63a, the accommodation portion 640b is in the state of facing upward, and then the gaming ball having entered the sorting device 630 is received by the accommodation portion 640b, and the gaming ball is The passive distribution member 640 is rotated about 180 degrees to the right by the weight of to guide the gaming ball to the second starting opening 63b. Thus, the passive distribution member 640 can alternately guide the gaming balls entering the distribution device 630 to the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b. Therefore, it is possible to evenly distribute the game balls to the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b and make a prize, and to be described later, a lottery game (hereinafter referred to as the first drawing It is possible to efficiently execute a lottery game (hereinafter, referred to as a second lottery game) resulting from the winning of the second start opening 63b.

  On the central left side of the game board 13, a normal symbol start port 67 is provided. The normal symbol start port 67 is formed of a start port having a sensor capable of detecting passage of the game ball in a gate type. When the game ball passes through the normal symbol start opening 67, a lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed. In the lottery performed for the game ball having passed to the normal symbol starting opening 67, a pass / fail determination of whether or not a normal symbol is hit is performed.

  When the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variation display of the normal symbol is started in the second symbol display portion 88 provided in the variable display device unit 80, which will be described later, "o" and "x" After the symbols are alternately turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds), a normal symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol of "o" or "x") indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed (lit display). When the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port 67 while the variable display is being performed in the second symbol display portion 88, the number of times of passage is held up to four times, and the number of holding balls is the first symbol display device 37 Displayed by.

  When it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol, the second symbol display portion 88 is lighted and displayed as "o", which is a symbol indicating that the lottery of the normal symbol is a hit. When the symbol which is a hit is displayed, the normal motorized symbol 64 is operated, and the blades 64a and 64b of the normal motorized symbol 64, which are normally maintained in the upright position, are substantially vertically erected. By moving the game ball into a substantially V-shape (reverse C shape) and guiding the game balls to the blades 64a and 64b, it is easy to enter the game balls into the sorting device 630 for a predetermined time (1.2 s in this embodiment). Become. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is dislocated, "x" which is a symbol indicating that the lottery of the normal symbol is out is lit and displayed on the second symbol display section 88.

  A first symbol display provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side top (the upper right of FIG. 2) of the game area A device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a illuminates the number of holding balls which is the number of balls (holding balls) for which the variable display has not been executed among the balls winning in the first starting opening 63a, the second starting opening 63b, and the normal symbol starting opening 67. It is indicated by the state. In addition, the number of rounds in the jackpot and the error indication are also indicated by the corresponding lighting state.

  The 7-segment display 37 b is configured by two 7-segment LEDs on the left and right. On the left side of the seven-segment LED, the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is variably displayed (dynamically displayed). Specifically, the variable display (in the present embodiment, the central segment of the seven segments blinks) until the fluctuation time (dynamic display time) has elapsed, which is determined based on the winning of the first start opening 63a. After that, it is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating the determination result. When the determination result is out, the symbol "-" is displayed, which indicates the outset in which one central segment is lighted. On the other hand, when the determination result is a hit, a symbol different from the symbol indicating the detachment such as the symbols "3" and "7" corresponding to the hit is displayed. The second lottery game is also configured in the same manner as the first lottery game. The LEDs 37a are configured such that the light emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the light emission colors can indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

  Moreover, although the fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation mode or a dynamic display mode) in the pachinko machine 10 will be described later, a fluctuation time is set for each fluctuation mode, and corresponds to a dynamic display mode regarding time information. Furthermore, the variation patterns can be divided into a relatively long variation pattern with a relatively long variation time and a short variation pattern with a relatively short variation time, as a reach variation pattern and a non-reach variation pattern. In this way, even if roughly classified according to a certain standard of time (here, reach, non-reach, or reference time (for example, whether it is longer than 10 seconds or not)), the dynamic regarding the time information is also It corresponds to the display mode.

  As will be described later, regarding the time information until the fluctuation start time, the time at which the accurate fluctuation start is also applicable, and the above-mentioned rough fluctuation pattern time information (for example, whether it is a long time fluctuation pattern Information on time information (for example, the number of long-term fluctuation patterns performed until the start of fluctuation, etc.) determined based on whether or not

  In the present pachinko machine 10, in the lottery performed for the winning of the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b, while performing the success or failure determination (big hit lottery) whether or not the big hit, also the determination of the big hit type Do. As jackpot types determined here, 15R normal jackpots, 15R probability variation jackpots, and 2R probability variation jackpots are prepared. The jackpot symbol displayed on the LED 37b is a symbol indicating the jackpot type (in the present embodiment, "9" for 15R normal jackpot, "7" for 15R probability variation jackpot, "3" for 2R probability variation jackpot, for example) Is displayed).

  Here, “15R normal jackpot” means that the maximum number of rounds is a jackpot of 15 rounds, and after the jackpot, a special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 8 (b)) for low probability, which will be described later. It is the hit when the game is set. The "15R probability variation jackpot" is the jackpot of the maximum round number of 15 rounds, and after the jackpot, a special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (FIG. 8 (b)) for high probability time, which will be described later, is set. It is. The "2R probability variation jackpot" is the jackpot of the maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds, and after the jackpot, the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (FIG. 8 (b)) for high probability time, which will be described later, is set. It is.

  In the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 79 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winnings (start winnings) to the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b as a trigger, while being synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display 37, the third symbol (first A third symbol display device 81 configured of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") for performing variable display of a special symbol and a second special symbol is provided.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display of 8-inch size, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 described later, as shown in FIG. 5A, the left side In the display area Dm1, three symbol rows on the left, middle and right are displayed, showing a first special symbol which is one of the third symbols. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol (first special symbol) is variably displayed on the left display area Dm1 of the third symbol display device 81 ((1) Dynamic display). In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanied by the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, while the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. It makes a decorative display according to it. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like. Moreover, also in the 2nd special symbol which is one of the 3rd symbol, it is displayed similarly to the 1st special symbol in the right side display area Dm2.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 5, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 5 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 5 (a) is a view schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG.5 (b) is the figure which illustrated the reordering front and after reordering of the reservation symbol display in an actual display screen.

  The third symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is respectively constituted by 10 types of special symbols attached with the numbers from "0" to "9". Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main controller 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbol is aligned (for example, "777") variation display is performed, and the variation display The jackpot is configured to occur after the session is over.

  As shown in FIG. 5 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is mainly divided into upper and lower parts, and the third symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is displayed in the upper display area Dm. And a display area for displaying the holding symbol (the number of holdings of the first lottery game and the second lottery game) in the lower display area Ds. The upper display area Dm is configured to be displayable by being divided into the left side display area Dm1 and the right side display area Dm2. Mainly, in the left side display area Dm1, the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game based on the winning of the first starting opening 63a is variably displayed. On the other hand, in the right side display area Dm2, the second special symbol indicating the determination result of the second lottery game based on the winning of the second starting opening 63b is variably displayed.

  The left display area Dm1 displays three symbol rows L1, L2 and L3 for left, middle and right, respectively. In each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending order or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, and variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each symbol row L1 to L3. In particular, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order in the left symbol row L1, and the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order in the middle symbol row L2 and the right symbol row L3. On the other hand, in the right side display area Dm2, the second special symbol is displayed in the same manner as the first special symbol, symbol rows R1, R2 and R3 are displayed, and variable display is similarly performed.

  In the left side display area Dm1 and the right side display area Dm2, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line U1. If the third symbol is stopped on the effective line by the combination of the big hit symbols (in this embodiment, the combination of the same main symbols), the big hit moving image is displayed as the big hit.

  On the other hand, the lower display area Ds is provided laterally longer than the upper display area Dm, and is further equally divided into eight reserved areas Ds1 to Ds8 of small areas in the left-right direction.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 5B, a total of three main symbols of the special symbol (third symbol) are displayed in the upper display region Dm in the left display region Dm1 and the right display region Dm2. Ru.

  In the present embodiment, winnings on the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b are respectively suspended up to four times. When the gaming ball wins in the first starting opening 63a while the first special symbol is variably displayed, the start of the first lottery game based on the winning is suspended, and the reserved symbol display area (Ds1 to Ds8 of the lower display area Ds) In the display area of the display area of the display area of the lowest number in the area where the reserved symbol is not displayed ("○" which is the reserved symbol of the first lottery game is displayed in the reserved symbol display area of the left number) .

  In addition, if the game ball wins in the second starting opening 63b while the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the "●" which is the holding symbol for the second lottery game is lowered, as in the case of winning in the first starting opening 63a. Displayed in the reserved symbol display area (Ds1 to Ds8) of the side display area Ds.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will be continued. When the game balls enter the distribution winning device 630, the game balls are distributed in order to the first start opening 63a and the second start opening 63b by the distribution member 640 (see FIG. 4). In the state where the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, and when there is no hold in the first lottery game, if the first start port 63a is won, whether or not the second special symbol is in the variable display Regardless of, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed after being variably displayed in the left display area Dm1. On the other hand, when the game ball wins in the second starting opening 63b, the second special symbol is variably displayed regardless of whether or not the first special symbol is being variably displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously configured to allow variable display simultaneously in the left side display area Dm1 and the right side display area Dm2. Therefore, the game machine balls that are alternately won are distributed to the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b by the distribution winning device 630, so that the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. it can. Although it will be described later, since the first lottery game and the second lottery game are each executed by the lottery whether or not to execute the big hit game, the case of the big hit game lottery opportunity is executed only in the first lottery game The number of times of drawing can be increased by comparison, and the chance of the player getting a big hit can be increased.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the pachinko machine 10 comprised by two, the 1st lottery game and the 2nd lottery game, was explained, it is not restricted to it, 3 or 4 or more lottery games and the starting corresponding to it Naturally, it is also possible to provide a mouth and simultaneously configure each lottery result to be able to change display.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the sorting winning device 630 has a mechanical configuration (the sorting configuration of the gaming balls by the passive sorting member 640), but only one starting opening and every time the gaming balls win, Naturally, it may be configured to be alternately distributed to the start timing of the first lottery game and the start timing of the second lottery game. By configuring in this manner, it is not necessary to provide a mechanism for distributing the game balls on the game board surface, and the game area can be effectively used.

  When the game ball wins on the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b, the first starting opening switch or the second starting opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the gaming board 13 is turned on. Due to the turning on of the first starting opening switch and the second starting opening switch, a lottery for a big hit is made by the main control device 110, and a display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls are won.

  If one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the jackpot, the other variable symbol is temporarily displayed in a variable display, the variable display is temporarily interrupted, and the jackpot game ( For example, in the case of 15 rounds usually a big hit, after the 15 rounds of jackpot game is finished, the fluctuation display of the special symbol is continued for the remaining fluctuation time.

  The remaining variable time variable display is displayed in a change mode dedicated to the remaining variable display so that the player can know that the remaining variable display is the remaining variable display for the suspended variable display. Further, as the variation mode dedicated to the remaining variation display, the variation display mode is selected in accordance with the remaining variation time. Specifically, when the remaining fluctuation time is equal to or less than the reference time (3 seconds or less in the present embodiment), the character "display the lottery result of the fluctuation display which has been temporarily stopped!" 3 After displaying on the symbol display device 81 for the remaining fluctuation time, stop display is performed in a display mode indicating the determination result. Then, when the determination result is stopped and displayed, the characters “The lottery result of the temporary display has been displayed!” Are displayed, and continue to be displayed until the next change is started.

  On the other hand, when the remaining fluctuation time is longer than the reference time (3s in the present embodiment), all the main symbols constituting the special symbol are variably displayed at a constant speed, and the character "temporarily stopped fluctuation" A notification mode indicating that the display is changing! Is displayed. After that, when the remaining fluctuation time has passed, the main symbols are simultaneously stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the determination result.

  By configuring in this manner, the player can recognize that it is a continuation of the fluctuation display of the special symbol interrupted halfway, and can recognize that it is a lottery result of the fluctuation display which is interrupted. it can. Therefore, even if the variable display is interrupted on the way, the player can be prevented from playing the game with dissatisfaction, doubts and the like that the lottery has disappeared on the way.

  In addition, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a big hit, if the other special symbol is in the state of stopping the variable display, a new variable display Start is prohibited. When the big hit game is over, the variable display is set to be started again based on the winning on the corresponding starting openings 63a and 63b.

  As a result, it is possible to prevent the problem that the occurrence of the jackpot is overlapped and the player can not concentrate on the jackpot game because the lottery game is executed in the other special symbol even during the jackpot.

  In addition, when the remaining fluctuation time is short, even if the continuation of the interrupted fluctuation mode is displayed, there is a problem that the player may miss it or it may be too short to understand the notification result. However, in the configuration of the pachinko machine 10, when the remaining time is within the reference time (3 s in this embodiment), the notification result is displayed immediately after notifying the player that the lottery result is to be displayed. Therefore, the player can recognize that the notification result which has been interrupted (temporary stop) is displayed.

  Furthermore, even after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, a character notifying that the suspended variable display is stopped and displayed is displayed, so the remaining fluctuation time is very short (for example, within 1s). Also, the player can recognize that the suspended variable display is effective and the determination result is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, even when the remaining fluctuation time is longer than the reference time (3s in the present embodiment), the player is notified of the fact that the notification result being interrupted (temporarily stopped) is being displayed in a fluctuation manner. The person can easily recognize that the suspended variable display was effective without disappearing.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been suspended is resumed, the character is informed of that to the character, but the present invention is not particularly limited thereto. Of course, it may be configured to notify by a lamp or the like. In addition, as shown in the display mode that shows that the player has resumed (for example, displayed as an animation notifying that the variable display has been resumed by the character etc.), the suspended change Of course, notification may be made in a display mode dedicated to the resumption of display. By doing this, the player can correctly recognize that the suspended variable display has been resumed.

  Also, in the present embodiment, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is a big hit, if the other special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the variable display is interrupted. Although it is configured to stop the fluctuation display, but not limited to that, during the jackpot game, measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted, but the fluctuation display of the special symbol is continued as it is, and the fluctuation time is measured after the jackpot game May be configured to change the display of the special symbol.

  By configuring in this way, since the special symbol is continuously changed and displayed during the jackpot game, the player can confirm that the other change display is continued without disappearing, You can play the jackpot game with peace of mind.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is a big hit, if the other special symbol is in the variable display mode, the variable display is interrupted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display may be continued without interruption, and the lottery game may be executed as usual.

  By configuring in this way, even during the jackpot game, it is possible to further perform the lottery game, and it is possible to play more lottery games in a short time, and the player performs many lottery games. It will be possible to do. In such a configuration, when one of the special symbols during the big hit game is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a hit, the execution of the big hit game is delayed until one big hit game is ended (stock ), The player can play the jackpot game continuously.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation display mode in which the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 has been interrupted is displayed in the fluctuation mode exclusively for remaining fluctuation display. Not only that, the remaining variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed by the first symbol display device 37 may be displayed in a variation mode dedicated to the remaining variation display. Specifically, when the remaining variable display is performed on the 7-segment display 37b, the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed while being blinked. Alternatively, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed by being lit with the remaining color (for example, blue etc.) dedicated to the remaining variable display, thereby displaying the variable. By doing this, the remaining variation display is displayed on the player not only for the third symbol display device 81 but also for the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed on the 7-segment display 37b. Can be notified.

  Further, as in the case of the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the variation display mode may naturally be changed according to the remaining variation time.

  In addition, during the interruption, the first special symbol or the second special symbol may be blinked in a predetermined display mode “for example, alphabet h” in a predetermined cycle. In this way, by configuring, it is possible to inform the player that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (suspended).

  A horizontally long rectangular shaped variable winning device 65 is disposed on the lower right side of the game area. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery regarding the first lottery game or the second lottery game in the main control device 110 becomes the big win, the first stop pattern of the big hit is made after the predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed. While turning on the symbol display device 37, the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit is displayed in the corresponding display area (the left display region Dm1 or the right display region Dm2) of the third symbol display device 81, and occurrence of a big hit is shown . Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  The specific winning hole 65a is closed when a predetermined time passes, and after the closing, the specific winning hole 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The open / close operation of the variable winning device 65 is determined by the determined type of jackpot, and for example, in the case of 15R normal jackpot, it is possible to repeat at most 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is one form of the bonus game state advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as the provision of the game value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, when the variable winning device 65 is stopped and displayed with the first special symbol or the second special symbol indicating a hit based on winning in the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b, The open / close operation is set based on the jackpot type, and the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time or until a predetermined condition is satisfied (in the embodiment, until 30 seconds pass or 10 balls are won). Be done.

  The variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening / closing drive forward on the lower side of the opening / closing plate. . The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large open port solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball is easy to win in the specified winning port 65a. Operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  In the left and right corners of the lower side of the game board 13, adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for attaching a certificate, an identification label and the like are provided. Can be viewed through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not won any of the winning openings 63a, 63b, 65a, 79 is guided to the ball discharge path (not shown) through the out port 66. A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 6) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3). ing. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 6), for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  The main control unit 110 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display unit 88. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 7) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 7, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters etc. are MPU201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform the setting of the display of the 1st symbol display device 37 and the 3rd symbol display device 81, the 2nd symbol display part 88, etc. Used in

  In the setting of the display of the jackpot lottery and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a special symbol random number counter C1 used for lottery of the jackpot and a special hit type counter C2 used for selection of the jackpot symbol A variation pattern determination counter C3, an initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set an initial value of the special hit random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS1 used to select a variation pattern are used. Further, the random number counter C4 is used for lottery of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol display portion 88), and the initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the ordinary random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time updating is performed, and the value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 14), and some counters are not included in the main processing (S1000) (see FIG. 17). It is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although details will be described later, each counter value is stored in the RAM 203 for the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c1 where the counter value is stored for winning for the first starting opening 63a and the winning for the second starting opening 63b. The second special symbol holding ball execution area 203c2 is provided. In the present embodiment, the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b are each provided with a maximum of four holding balls, and a maximum of eight holding balls can be stored. Therefore, when the game ball wins during the period when it is possible to draw the special symbol, such as when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable display or when the big hit of the special symbol is not being played, each counter value Is stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c1, and when the gaming ball is won in the second starting opening 63b, each counter value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203c2. On the other hand, during a period in which the lottery of special symbols such as during the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed, or during the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not possible, the game ball can be used as the first starting opening 63a or In the case where the second starting opening 63b is won, if the number of holdings for the starting opening that has won is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment), each counter value is acquired and the starting opening is won Are stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to. In addition, when the number of holdings for the winning starting opening is the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) or more, each counter value etc. is not acquired but the winning balls (in the present embodiment, 5 game balls) Only) is treated as an invalid ball to be paid out to the player.

  In the present embodiment, although the upper limit value of the number of holding balls is four for each of the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b, it is not limited thereto, but may be four each, or the upper limit value You may choose not to

  Each counter shown in FIG. 7 will be described in detail. The special random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), and after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 399) It has a back configuration. In particular, when the special hit random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special hit random number counter C1.

  The initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the special random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the special random number counter C1 is a loop counter which can take values of 0 to 399, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) is executed, and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (S1200) (see FIG. 33).

  The value of the special hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the ball is won in the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b (starting winning combination) At timing, it is stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c1 or the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203c2 corresponding to the winning starting opening of the RAM 203. The value of the jackpot random number is set by the jackpot random number table 202a (FIG. 8 (b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, and the value of the special punch random number counter C1 is set by the jackpot random number table 202a. It is determined that the jackpot is matched if the value of the random number that will be the jackpot (in the present embodiment, “7” at low probability, “0 to 9 at high probability”).

  The special per random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this special per random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (per wins) that will be the big win is 1 at low probability, its value “7” is 10 at high probability, its value “0 to 9” is big hit It is stored in the random number table 202a.

  The special hit type counter C2 is for determining the jackpot type in the case of a big hit, and is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and the maximum value (99 in the present embodiment) After reaching, it is configured to return to 0. The value of the special hit type counter C2 is, for example, regularly (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the ball wins in the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b (starting winning combination) At the timing, the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c1 or the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203c2 of the RAM 203 corresponding to the winning starting opening is stored.

  Here, if the value of the special per random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c1 or the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203c2 is not a large random number, that is, it is a random number falling out For example, the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display effect and the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") are those at the time of deviation. On the other hand, if it is a random number in which the value of the special random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c1 or the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203c2 is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern or stop in the fluctuation display effect The type is that of the jackpot. In this case, the variation pattern at the big hit and the stop type are determined corresponding to the big hit type indicated by the value of the special hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball execution area 203c.

  The value of the special hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. The jackpot type is determined based on the special hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b (see FIG. 8C) stored in the ROM 202. Here, as shown in FIG. 8A, the ROM 202 stores various tables. FIG. 8B is a diagram schematically showing an example of the first jackpot random number counter table 202a, and FIG. 8C an example of the jackpot type table 202b. The jackpot type table 202 b (FIG. 8C) is a table in which the jackpot type is associated with the value of the special hit type counter C2.

  As the jackpot type, as described above, the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds Special symbol big hit random number table 202a (refer to FIG. 8 (b)) for low probability time after the big hit game is set "15R normal big hit", maximum The number of rounds is 15 rounds and special symbol big hit random number table 202a (refer to FIG. 8 (b)) for high probability time is set after the big hit game "15R probability variation big hit", maximum round number is high probability after big hit game in 2 rounds There is a "2R probability variation jackpot" in which a special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 8B) for the time is set.

  In the jackpot type table 202b, the value of the special hit type counter C2 that determines the jackpot type is associated with each jackpot type. In the example of FIG. 8C, the value "60 to 99" of the special hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R normal jackpot, and the value "0 to 49" of the special hit type counter C2 for the 15R probability variation jackpot Are associated, and the value “50 to 59” of the special hit type counter C2 is associated with the 2R probability variation jackpot.

  The first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c1 or the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203c2 in which the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is stored when the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is a value that makes a big hit The jackpot type associated with the value of the special hit type counter C2 stored in is determined from the jackpot type table 202b. For example, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is "20", 15R probability variation jackpot is determined as the big hit type, and if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is "80", 15R normal big hit as the big hit type) It is determined.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, 15R normal jackpot is selected with a probability of about 40% when it is a jackpot, and 15R probability variation jackpot is selected with a probability of 50%, and 2R probability variation jackpot with a probability of 10%. A jackpot type table 202b is defined to be selected.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description of the various counters will be continued. The fluctuation pattern determination counter C3 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 100, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 100).

  The values of the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are, for example, periodically updated (once in each timer interrupt processing in the present embodiment), and the ball is the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening. The first special symbol or the second special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner at the timing of winning (start winning) at 63b, and is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b When various counter values of the holding balls are not stored, they are stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c1 or the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203c2 of the RAM 203.

  FIG. 10A is a diagram schematically showing an example of the normal-time special hit variation pattern table 202d stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 10 (a), the special hit variation pattern table 202d for normal use is a case where the special symbol big hit random number table 202a for high probability is set in the big hit random number table 202a (hereinafter referred to as a normal gaming state) The 15R jackpot only and the 2R probability variation jackpot referred to when the 15R jackpot is determined if the 15R jackpot is determined if the 15R jackpot is determined if the 2R probability jackpot is determined. Is divided into groups based on the 2R probability variation jackpot referred to in the case where is determined, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups. If the value of the special random number counter C1 is a value that makes a big hit (per win value), it is stored in the execution area according to the big hit type corresponding to the value of the special hit type counter C2 stored in the same execution area The fluctuation pattern group is selected from the fluctuation pattern group corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Then, the variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3 stored in the execution area.

  There are various types of normal reach, various types of super reach, and various types of premier reach in the 15R jackpot, and the correspondence with the value of fluctuation type counter CS1 is 0 to 10 for normal reach, 11 to 95 for various super reach, and 96 for various Premier reach. It is about 100. The Norlech variety is a reach where the fluctuation time is short, and after the short reach, the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned (so-called, the symbol is aligned with a stop at the bitter end). A variation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after reaching a variation time longer than normal reach (for example, a reach extending from long reach or normal reach), and various Premier Reach variations are longer than super reach The first pattern (or the third pattern) is aligned after the time reach (for example, the reach that develops further after the super reach or the special reach where the destination from the normal reach differs from the super reach, etc.) Is a variation pattern not selected.

  In addition, "reach various" means that there are many things that effect contents differ also in each reach, for example, in the super reach, the reach which changes the back image rapidly and is displayed, and a certain character There is a reach to be displayed suddenly, etc. In addition, there are multiple reach with different effect contents such as one to which a notice effect before the start of variable display is added, and one to which an effect to be a big hit by re-change display is added.

  In the case of the 2R probability variation jackpot, the 2R probability variation dedicated variation pattern is selected regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3. The 2R probability variation dedicated variation pattern is, for example, a special variation pattern in which the special symbol is stopped at "341" to notify that the 2R probability variation has been won.

  FIG. 10B is a diagram schematically showing an example of the normal out-of-time extraneous change pattern table 202 e stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 10 (b), the special outlier fluctuation pattern table 202e in the normal game state is a normal reach which is relatively out of various types of normal outliers that become completely out as a stop type at the time of outliers, and a normal reach is relatively short. It consists of various types of normal reach (short) that are out of the normal reach, various types of normal reach that are relatively out of normal reach with a relatively long fluctuation time, and various types of super reach that are out of super reach.

  When the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “0 to 29”, the correspondence between the fluctuation type counter CS1 and each fluctuation pattern group is normally out of various types, and in the case of “30 to 60”, normal reach (short The various types of super reach are determined in the case of various types of "61 to 89", in the case of various types of normal reach (long) and of "90 to 100".

  For various types of out-of-normal-time, normal out-of-range A and normal out-of-range B are set in which the variable display ends in a short time and reach is not established. When the value of the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3 is "0 to 100", the fluctuation pattern of the normal deviation B is selected when the normal deviation A is "101 to 198". In addition, a variation pattern of normal reach shorts A to C is set in various out-of-order normal reach (short) types in which the reach is established but the variation time is short. If the value of the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3 is "0 to 70", if the normal reach short A is "71 to 128", the normal reach short B is "129 to 198". The variation patterns of the normal reach short C are respectively selected. Similarly, fluctuation patterns are selected for various normal reach lengths and various super reach types.

  FIG. 11A is a view schematically showing the time variation / precise variation special hit variation pattern table 202 d stored in the ROM 202. FIG. 11B is a view schematically showing the time-shortening / probability-variation special deviation fluctuation pattern table 202 e stored in the ROM 202. When the special symbol big hit random number table 202a for high probability is set in the big hit random number table 202a in the big hit random number table 202a and the special hit variation pattern table 202d for short time and probability change special hit change pattern table 202d It is a table for a variation pattern selection which is selected when the state is set to the probability variation gaming state) and the time reduction counter 203k is set to a value of "0" or more (hereinafter, the gaming state is set to the time reduction gaming state). .

  The selection of the variation pattern is similar to that of the normal special hit variation pattern table 202d and the normal extra deviation variation pattern table 202e, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. In addition, about special hitting fluctuation pattern table 202d and special outlier fluctuation pattern table 202e, although only one type was explained here, special hitting fluctuation pattern table 202d and special for the first special symbol and the second special symbol respectively Outset fluctuation pattern table 202e is set, and the distribution of fluctuation pattern determination counter C3 is changed between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol Thus, even if the value of the same variation pattern determination counter C3 is acquired, the same variation pattern is not selected. By configuring in this manner, different variation patterns can be easily selected for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and various effects can be made.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description of the various counters will be continued. The ordinary random number counter C4 (see FIG. 8D) is configured as a loop counter which is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). At the timing when the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening 67, it is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h (see FIG. 7) of the RAM 203. And the value of the random number which becomes the big hit of the ordinary symbol is set by the ordinary symbol random number table 202c (FIG. 8 (d)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, and the value of the ordinary random number counter C4 is When it matches the value of the random number which becomes a hit set by the normal symbol per random number table 202c, it is determined that the normal symbol is hit.

  Also, when the per-round random number counter C4 makes one revolution, the value of the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the per-round normal random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the normal random number counter C4 is updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed the normal symbol start port 67 (through gate) . The number of random numbers to be won is 24, in the normal gaming state, and the range is “5 to 28”. Also, in the high probability gaming state, it is 200, and its range is “5 to 204”. That is, in the normal gaming state, it is determined to be won when the value of the acquired ordinary hit random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", and in the high probability gaming state, the value of the acquired ordinary hit random number counter C4 Is determined to be won when the symbol is in the range of "5-204", and the symbol of "o" is displayed on the second symbol display portion 88 as a stop symbol (second symbol) and the symbol of the ordinary electric role item 64 is displayed. In the normal gaming state, the blades 64a and 64b are opened twice for a predetermined time (1.2 s in the present embodiment) and in the high probability gaming state for a predetermined time (1 s in the present embodiment). The ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the ordinary random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (S1200) (see FIG. 33).

  When the gaming ball passes the normal symbol starting port 67, the variation display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is not in progress, and when each counter value based on the holding ball is not stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h, A random number value is acquired from the normal hit random number counter C4 in the normal symbol holding ball execution area 203i and stored in the normal hit random number counter storage area 203i1. Also, when the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner or when the random number value corresponding to the holding ball stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h is less than the upper limit (4 pieces in this embodiment) Is stored in the normal hit random number counter storage area 203h1 of the number of times of holding (normal symbol hold 1 to 4) corresponding to the random number value acquired from the normal hit random number counter C4. In addition, when a random number value is stored in each area, the normal symbol flag 203j is set to ON, and the variable display of the normal symbol is stopped based on the random number value, or the previous hold is made by digesting the hold. When data is shifted to the area, it is set to off. Here, when the data is shifted, the normal symbol flag of the newly shifted and stored reserved area is set to on. Whether or not the data is stored in the reserve area, or whether the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner is determined depending on which reserve area or the normal symbol flag of the execution area is on.

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control unit 110 causes the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the value of the counter or the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display unit 88 can be executed.

  In addition, in this embodiment, it was comprised so that a common various counter value might be selected about the lottery of a 1st lottery game and a 2nd lottery game, but a 1st lottery game (1st special symbol) and a 2nd lottery With the game (the second special symbol), it sets various counters for exclusive use, respectively and updates with different value by making the update opportunity and the initial value etc of the various counters of the 1st lottery game and the 2nd lottery game different. Naturally, it may be configured by the counter value to be calculated.

  In this way, by configuring, even when the counter value is acquired at the same opportunity in the lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is possible to acquire counter values of different values, It is possible to suppress a failure that the fluctuation pattern selected by the 1 special symbol and the 2nd special symbol and the judgment result of success or failure are synchronized.

  In addition, even if the variation pattern is selected from the common variation pattern table for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is possible to suppress the problem that the selected variation pattern is synchronized, and various effects. It can be performed. Further, storage data of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be suppressed, and an inexpensive configuration (using a RAM with a small storage area or the like) can be made.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 is a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored in addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 6, various flags and counters, I / O And a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (S1200) (see FIG. 33), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 32) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  RAM 203 is the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c, the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d, the first special symbol holding ball number Counter 203e, second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f, normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g, normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h, normal symbol holding ball execution area 203i, normal symbol flag 203j, time reduction counter 203k, probability variation flag 203m, First big hit flag 203o, second big hit flag 203p, first fluctuation stop flag 203q, second fluctuation stop flag 203r, first fluctuation time storage area 203s, second fluctuation time storage area 203t, reordering storage area 203u, others It has at least memory area 203v .

  The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a storage area for storing various counter values obtained based on winning in the first starting opening 63a up to the upper limit number (four in the present embodiment). is there. Further, the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b stores various counter values obtained based on the game ball winning in the second starting opening 63b up to the upper limit number (four in this embodiment). Storage area for

  The first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c is a storage area in which various counter values for starting variable display of the first special symbol are stored, and the first special symbol is the first special symbol when the variable display is stopped. When various counter values are stored in the holding ball storage area 203a, the storage area is a storage area where the various counter values are shifted and stored. The second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d is a storage area in which various counter values for starting variable display of the second special symbol are stored, and the details are the same as the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c. .

  The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c, and the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d are for counters as the start winning combination is detected. The values of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the change pattern determination counter C3 and the change type counter CS1 acquired from the buffer (see FIG. 7) are respectively stored. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won the first starting opening 63a in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), the MPU 201 obtains the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 from the counter buffer, and The special hit random number counter storage area 203a1, the special hit type counter storage area 203a2, the fluctuation pattern determination counter 203a3 and the fluctuation type counter storage area 203a4 of the holding ball storage area 203a are respectively stored. On the other hand, when it is detected that the ball has won the second starting opening 63b, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are obtained from the counter buffer and each corresponding, as in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. They are similarly stored in the area (not shown).

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuation effect, the above-described first to execute processing such as a jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81, etc. Of the data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to each start winning combination stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, it corresponds to one start winning combination The data is shifted to this special symbol holding ball execution area 203c. Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 203 e and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203 f are detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) which is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. The number of holding balls (number of waits) of the fluctuation display effect (the fluctuation display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the winning of the opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b Each is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f are set to zero as an initial value by the initial setting process (S1112 in FIG. 32) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, each time the start winning is detected and the number of balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value 4 respectively. On the other hand, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203a and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203b are decremented by one each time the variable display effect is executed.

  In addition, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e (that is, the holding ball number) is a counter value in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a based on the game ball having won in the first starting opening 63a. Is stored, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the first special symbol holding ball number command output from the main control device 110. The first special symbol holding ball number command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the starting winning combination is detected and the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203 e is incremented by one. It is.

  In addition, the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f (that is, the holding ball number) is a counter value in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b based on the game ball having won in the second starting opening 63b. Is notified, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the second special symbol holding ball number command output from the main control device 110. The second special symbol holding ball number command is sent from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the starting winning combination is detected and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f is incremented by one. It is.

  If the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer are respectively stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c or the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d, the MPU 201 1 Refer to the data stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area 203c or the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d in the first change start process (Fig. 16, S203) or the second change start process (Fig. 20, S206) Then, based on the reference data, a jackpot lottery is performed, and the fluctuation pattern and the stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. In the first symbol display device 37, under the control of the main control device 110, the variation display effect is performed based on the determined variation pattern and the stop type.

  Further, the variation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the first or second change pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, in the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation display effect is performed based on the fluctuation pattern and the stop type notified by the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command.

  In the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g, the gaming ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening 67 detected in the timer interrupt process (refer to FIG. 14) which is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds (hereinafter referred to as "start winning" The variable display effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 (based on the second symbol display unit 88 of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display effect performed by the second symbol display device 88) It is a counter which counts the number of pending balls (waiting number) of each up to four times. The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is a counter that stores the total number of holding balls stored based on the passage of the gaming ball through the normal symbol starting opening 67. By the initial setting process (S1112 in FIG. 32) of the RAM 203 after power on, zero is set as an initial value. Then, each time the start winning is detected and the number of balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value 4. On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is decremented by 1 each time the variable display effect is executed (see FIG. 29, S106).

  The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h is a storage area in which the normal hit random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 7) is detected along with the detection of the start winning to the normal symbol start port 67. When the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 detects that the ball has passed the normal symbol starting port 67 (start winning) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), the counter buffer normally receives the random number counter C4. A value is acquired and stored in the normal hit random number counter storage area 203h1 of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h. The normal symbol flag 203 j is set to ON in the normal symbol flag storage area 203 h 2 and stored (stored). The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h has four holding areas so that data (the value of the counter C4, normal symbol flag 203j) corresponding to one start winning can be stored (held) up to four times. There is. In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h, the data of the holding ball is stored in the order from the earliest holding area among the holding areas where the data is vacant, in the order of passing (start winning) to the normal symbol starting opening 67 Be done.

  In addition, when it is detected that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuation indication production of normal design on the basis of starting winning a prize, normal counter design sphere execution area 203i, each counter value is housed, the winning lottery of the normal design and the 1st It is a memory for storing data (value of the counter C4) to be referred to in processing such as setting of display (variation pattern) of the symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, when the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation display effect of the normal symbol, in order to execute processing such as winning lottery or setting of display of the second symbol display unit 88 or the second symbol display device 88 Of the data corresponding to each start winning combination stored in the above-described normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h (general hit random number counter C4 value), data corresponding to one starting winning combination, this normal symbol holding ball Shift to execution area 203i. Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The normal symbol flag 203j is a flag indicating that the data of the normal random number counter C4 is stored and indicating that the symbol is being held, and is a flag indicating that the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. It is set to ON when the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area 203i or the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h. Also, if the value of the normal hit counter C4 is shifted to the next pending area (the pending area corresponding to the pending count for which the pending count has been reduced and the number of pending tasks reduced), the value of the pending area before being shifted The normal symbol flag 203j is set to off, while the normal symbol flag 203j of the reserved area that has been shifted and stored is set to on. Further, when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is subjected to the fluctuation stop processing, the normal symbol flag 203j is set to off.

  The time saving counter 203k is a counter area where the time saving count 100 is set after the 15R normal jackpot game is executed. When the number of times of time saving is set, a random number per table for high probability time is set in the normal pattern per random number table 202c until the number of times of time saving is set to 0. Also, when the symbol "o" indicating the hit of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display portion 88, the open time (in the present embodiment, the wings 64a and 64b of the normal motorized character 64 are longer than the normal gaming state) , 1s) The operation of opening is repeated twice. Hereinafter, this gaming state is referred to as a time saving gaming state.

  The hour reduction counter 203k is decremented by one each time the first special symbol or the second special symbol stops fluctuating display, and when the value of the time reduction counter 203k becomes 0, it shifts from the time reduction gaming state to the normal gaming state, and the ordinary symbol When the normal symbol per random symbol table for low probability of per random number counter 202c is set, and the symbol "○" showing the normal symbol hit is displayed on the second symbol display section 88, the open time is 0.2 s With the setting of the number of times of opening, the blades 64a and 64b of the ordinary electric character 64 are opened.

  The probability change flag 203m is a flag indicating that the gaming state is a high probability gaming state. In the first special symbol or the second special symbol, a flag that is set on based on the end of the jackpot game when it is notified that the 15R probability variation big hit game is won and the 15R probability variation big hit game is executed It is. On the other hand, when the probability change flag 203m is set to ON and the stop display is made with the first special symbol or the second special symbol to indicate the jackpot (all types), it is set to OFF, and after the jackpot game, by the jackpot type It is set to on if it is a 15R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot.

  The first jackpot flag 203o is a flag that is set to ON when it is determined that the value of the acquired special hitting random number counter C1 is a hit based on the winning of the first starting opening 63a. In addition, when the jackpot game ends, it is set to off.

  The second jackpot flag 203p is a flag that is set to ON when it is determined that the value of the acquired special hitting random number counter C1 is a hit based on winning in the second starting opening 63b. In addition, when the jackpot game ends, it is set to off.

  The first change stop flag 203 q is a flag indicating that the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is determined to be a hit while the first special symbol is in a change display. In a second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 21, S717) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later, it is set to ON. Further, in the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 19, S603), the variable display of the first special symbol is set to OFF when the temporary stop processing is performed.

  The second stop flag 203 r is a flag indicating that the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is determined to be a hit while the second special symbol is variably displayed. In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S <b> 407) to be executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later, the flag is set to ON. Further, in the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 23, S 803), the variable display of the second special symbol is set to OFF when the temporary stop process is executed.

  The first variation time storage area 203s is a storage area where the variation time of the first special symbol is counted (measured). The first variation time storage area 203s counts the variation time (counts the number of interrupts) when the first special symbol is displayed for variation display, and the variation time (2 ms in one interruption) is measured.

  The second variation time storage area 203t is a storage area where the variation time of the second special symbol is counted (measured). When the second special symbol is started to change, the second change time storage area 203t counts the change time (counts the number of interrupts), and the change time (2 ms in one interrupt) is measured.

  In the present embodiment, the first variation time storage area 203s and the second variation time storage area 203t measure the variation time by counting the number of interrupts, but the invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the time measurement data may be acquired as needed to measure the fluctuation time. In addition, it is also possible to store the fluctuation time in which the fluctuation display is performed in advance and to subtract that value as needed.

  The rearrangement reserve storage area 203u is the first special symbol reserve ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserve ball storage area 203b in the first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second pre-reading process (FIG. 27, S 914). Storage area in which each determination result determined based on each data of reservation areas 1 to 4 stored in is stored.

  FIG. 9A is a view schematically showing the rearrangement hold storage area 203 u. Reordering storage area 203u corresponds to the pending data storage area in which each determination data corresponding to each suspension frequency of suspension areas 1 to 8 is stored, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol during variation display And each determination data is stored in the during-changing data storage area.

  In each reserve area 1 to 8 of pending data, a success / failure determination result storage area 203u1, a big hit type storage area 203u2, a variation pattern type storage area 203u3, a variation order storage area 203u4, a variation start time storage area 203u5, a prefetch probability change flag 203u6 Are provided respectively. The storage areas 1 to 8 are sequentially stored from the storage area 1 in the order in which the respective storage balls are established (the overall formation order in which the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b are combined). That is, with the pachinko machine 10, the holding areas 1 to 8 combine the holding ball of the first special symbol and the holding ball of the second special symbol, and indicate the formation order in which the holding ball is established.

  In the variable display data storage area, in correspondence with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a pass / fail judgment result storage area 203u1, a big hit type storage area 203u2, a variation pattern storage area 203u3, and a prefetch probability change flag 203u6 are provided respectively. It is done.

  Judgment result storage area 203u1 is the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second pre-reading process (FIG. 27, S 914). Is a storage area in which the result of the determination in advance of the success or failure of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in is stored.

  The jackpot type storage area 203u2 is in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second pre-reading process (FIG. 27, S 914). It is a storage area in which the jackpot type determined by the stored special hit type counter C2 is stored.

  The variation pattern type storage area 203u3 is the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second pre-reading process (FIG. 27, S 914). The storage area is a storage area in which the type of the determined variation pattern is stored based on various data stored in. This variation pattern is data that can identify which variation pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the data of the holding area is either the first special symbol or the second special symbol It is also used as data to identify whether it is data of

  The variable display order storage area 203u4 is the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second pre-reading process (FIG. 27, S 914). Is a storage area in which the actual variable display start order in the determined holding areas 1 to 8 is stored based on various data stored in the storage area. In addition, specifically, the fluctuation display start order is determined by calculating the fluctuation start time of the newly stored holding ball, and comparing it with the fluctuation start time of each holding ball stored in advance. .

  The variation start time storage area 203u5 is the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second pre-reading process (FIG. 27, S 914). Is a storage area in which the time until each data of the calculated reserve areas 1 to 8 actually starts variable display is stored based on the various data stored in. It should be noted that, when this fluctuation display start time is stored in the hold area, it is updated as needed in other processing (S112) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110.

  It is predicted that the type of stored jackpot type storage area 203k2 is 15R probability variation jackpot or 2R probability variation jackpot in the first prefetch update process (FIG. 26, S933) to be described later (predetermined (predicted) Storage area that is set to ON and stored. In addition, every time data is shifted to and stored in the upper reservation area, all the areas before the shift are cleared to 0, so that the pre-read probability change flag storage area 203 u 6 is set to off. That is, the pre-read probability variation flag storage area 203u6, which has been set to ON once, is shifted to the in-fluctuation data storage area, and is overwritten by (shifted) new data in the in-fluctuation data storage area. . In addition, in the state where the game machine is powered on and the process of clearing the RAM is executed, the initial value is set to off.

  When power failure occurs in the pachinko machine 10, each piece of data in the sorting reserve storage area 203u is backed up and stored in a backup area (not shown) of the RAM 203. Then, when the power is turned on again, it is read out from the stored backup area and set.

  The other memory area 203v is an area for temporarily storing and storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110.

  As described above, when the game ball is won in the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b and a holding ball is generated, each of the holding balls according to the formation order of the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b. Various determination data of the holding ball are stored. Therefore, the winning a prize command is generated based on the sorting reserve storage area 203u, and the voice lamp control device 113 establishes the holding combining the first special symbol and the second special symbol based on the winning command. A command to be output to the display control device 114 can be generated so as to perform the hold symbol display in order. Therefore, it is possible to display the holding symbol display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 in the holding order of holding the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  Further, since the variable display start order of each hold is also determined and stored in relation to the establishment order, the voice lamp control device 113 is also received by generating a winning command based on the variable display start order. Based on the win command, it is possible to determine the holding order of each hold and the actual variable display start order.

  In addition, since the fluctuation start time of each hold is stored in each hold area, and the time is managed (updated as time passes), it is easy to start the fluctuation display start order of the newly stored hold data. It can be determined.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is opened and closed forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display portion 88, and the specified winning opening 65a as an axis. A solenoid 209 composed of a large opening solenoid for driving the motor or a solenoid for driving the motorized part is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including switches and sensors (not shown), and a RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115 described later. Various processing is executed based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 22) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation stop handle 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is off (condition that it is not operated), the operation handle The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33, the display lamp 34), Setting control of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as variable display). The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main control unit 110, the display control unit 114, the audio output unit 226, the lamp display unit 227, the vibration sensor 228, the frame button 22 and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and displays the winning order displayed in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 when the frame button 22 is operated by the player. The voice output device 226 is controlled to instruct the display control device 114 so that the reserved symbol display being displayed is rearranged and displayed in the order of the variable display start.

  Further, the vibration sensor 228 is attached to the back surface of the game board 213. In the pachinko machine 10, since winning in the winning opening is an important factor in determining the gaming state, it is necessary to change the flow of balls by vibration and to prevent the winning in the winning opening intentionally. Therefore, when it is determined from the output of the vibration sensor 228 that the player or the like has given vibration to the pachinko machine 10, an error command for transmitting the vibration error is transmitted to the display control device 114. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and includes an error type including an error type. It transmits to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to an error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

  The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a command storage area 223a, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b1, a second special symbol holding ball number counter 223b2, a first change start flag 223c1, a second change start flag 223c2, a second 1 stop type selection flag 223d1, second stop type selection flag 223d2, second variation stop flag 223e, second variation stop flag 223f, first variation resume flag 223g, second variation resume flag 223h, first variation A variation time storage area 223i, a second variation time storage area 223j, a second post-sorting storage area 223k, and another memory area 223m are provided.

  The command storage area 223a is an area temporarily stored until various commands output from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113 are processed. In detail, it is configured by a ring buffer, and data read / write is performed by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 36) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination process is performed. , And the command is analyzed and processing according to the command is performed.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b1 is, like the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203a of the main control unit 110, the first special performed in the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81) It is a counter which is a fluctuation display (dynamic display) of a symbol and counts the number of holding balls (the number of waits) of the fluctuation display effect held in the main control unit 110 up to four times.

  The second special symbol holding ball number counter 223b2 is, like the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203a of the main control unit 110, the second special performed in the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81) It is a counter which is a fluctuation display (dynamic display) of a symbol and counts the number of holding balls (the number of waits) of the fluctuation display effect held in the main control unit 110 up to four times.

  The first fluctuation start flag 223c1 is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is set to ON when the first fluctuation pattern command for notifying of the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. (FIG. 36, S1502). On the other hand, when the setting of the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 is made (FIG. 38, S1602).

  The second fluctuation start flag 223c2 is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is set to ON when the second fluctuation pattern command for notifying the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. (FIG. 36, S1505). On the other hand, when the setting of the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 is made (FIG. 38, S1602).

  The first stop type selection flag 223d1 is set to ON when the first stop type command for notifying the change stop type of the first special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received (FIG. 36, S1508). On the other hand, it is turned off when the setting of the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 is made (FIG. 38, S1612).

  The second stop type selection flag 223d2 is set to ON when the second stop type command for notifying the change stop type of the second special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received (FIG. 36, S1508). On the other hand, it is turned off when the setting of the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 is made (FIG. 38, S1612).

  The first variation stop flag 223e is a flag indicating that the first special symbol is temporarily stopped. When the temporary first fluctuation stop command is received from the main control device 110, it is set to ON (FIG. 36, S1516). On the other hand, when processing for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is executed, it is set to be off (FIG. 39, S1702).

  The second variation stop flag 223f is a flag indicating that the second special symbol is temporarily stopped. When the temporary second fluctuation stop command is received from the main control device 110, it is set to ON (FIG. 36, S1516). On the other hand, when the processing for stopping the variation display of the second special symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is executed, it is set to be off (FIG. 39, S1706).

  The first variation resuming flag 223g is a flag indicating that the variation display of the first special symbol that has been temporarily stopped is resumed. When the first special symbol variation restart command is received from the main control unit 110, the sub first restart flag 223g is set to ON (FIG. 36, S1518). On the other hand, when the process of restarting the variable display of the first special symbol of the third symbol display device 81 is executed, it is set to be off (FIG. 39, S1710).

  The second variation resumption flag 223h is a flag indicating that the variation display of the second special symbol that has been temporarily stopped is resumed. When the second special symbol variation restart command is received from the main control unit 110, the second restart flag 223h is set to ON (FIG. 36, S1518). On the other hand, when the process of restarting the variable display of the second special symbol of the third symbol display device 81 is executed, it is set to be off (FIG. 39, S1714).

  The first variation time storage area 223i is a storage area in which a value obtained by measuring the variation time of the first special symbol is stored. This storage area is stored at a value synchronized with the first variation time storage area 203 s of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110. Based on the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, 1 is added every 1 ms and the fluctuation time actually displayed is stored.

  The second variation time storage area 223j is a storage area in which a value obtained by measuring the variation time of the second special symbol is stored. This storage area is stored at a value synchronized with the second fluctuation time storage area 203t of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110. Based on the variation display start of the second special symbol, 1 is added every 1 ms, and the variation time actually changed and stored is stored.

  As shown in FIG. 9 (b), the secondary sort reserve storage area 223k has data similar to the sort reserve storage area 203u of the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 based on the winning command output from the main controller 110. Is a storage area stored based on the winning command output from the main control unit 110 to the sound lamp control unit 113.

  FIG. 9B is a view schematically showing the sub sort reserve storage area 223 k. The follow sort reserve storage area 223k stores various data of the first special symbol and the second special symbol while being variably displayed by the third symbol display device 81 and the reserve area for pending data from the reserve area 1 to the reserve area 8 And a storage area of data during variable display. The respective reserve areas are a success / failure determination result storage area 223k1, a big hit type storage area 223k2, a variation pattern type storage area 223k3, a variation order storage area 223k4, a variation start time storage area 223k5, a second reading probability variation flag storage area 223k6, a sorting flag 223k7 The respective data extracted from the received winning command are stored in the corresponding reserved area. In addition, each time the display variation pattern command for starting the variation display of the special symbol is generated, the data of the reserve area of the follow sort reserve storage area 223k is shifted and stored in the immediately preceding reserve area. In addition, in the case of the first special symbol, the hold data of the reserve area 1 is in the storage area of the first special symbol in the changing data storage area, and in the case of the second special symbol, the second special symbol in the changing data The data are respectively shifted and stored in the storage area.

  Judgment result storage area 223k1 is the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second pre-reading process (FIG. 27, S 914). It is a storage area that is extracted and stored from the received winning command as a result of having determined in advance whether the special hit random number counter C1 stored in the data has passed or not. Information on the result of determination of success or failure extracted from the winning command is one of the results of determination of result on or off of the holding areas 1 to 8 corresponding to the number of holding times (the corresponding holding area of the rearrangement holding memory area 203u of the main controller 110). It is stored in 223k1.

  The jackpot type storage area 223k2 is in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second pre-reading process (FIG. 27, S 914). It is a storage area that is extracted and stored from the received winning command, the jackpot type determined by the stored special hit type counter C2.

  The variation pattern type storage area 223k3 is the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second pre-reading process (FIG. 27, S 914). It is a storage area stored by extracting the type of the determined fluctuation pattern from the received winning command based on various data stored in. This variation pattern is data that can identify which variation pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the data of the holding area is either the first special symbol or the second special symbol It is also used as data to identify whether it is data of

  The variation order storage area 223k4 is in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second pre-reading process (FIG. 27, S 914). This is a storage area which is extracted and stored from the received winning command based on the stored various data and the actual change display start order in the determined holding areas 1 to 8.

  The variation start time storage area 223k5 is the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second pre-reading process (FIG. 27, S 914). Based on various data stored in the storage area, the time until each data of the reserved areas 1 to 8 actually calculated starts changing display from the received winning command is a storage area to be stored . Note that this variable display start time is updated as needed in the hold number display process (FIG. 35, S1406) of the main process (FIG. 35, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 when stored in the hold area. Ru.

  In the present embodiment, the winning command is a command indicating the time until the calculated data of each of the holding areas 1 to 8 actually start fluctuating display, but the invention is not limited thereto. Each counter value for calculating time (for example, the kind of the selected fluctuation pattern, the counter value for calculating the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol during fluctuation (such as the number of interruptions)) and the start of fluctuation display It is good also as a command corresponding to time until it becomes.

  The secondary reading probability change flag storage area 223k6 is a storage area that is set to ON and stored when the type of the stored big hit type storage area 223k2 is 15R probability variation big hit or 2R probability variation big hit.

  The sorting flag 223k7 indicates that the player is the holding symbol (the holding symbol display displayed when the frame button 22 is operated) for which the player has requested the sorting of the holding symbol display by operating the frame button 22. It is a flag.

  As described above, when the game ball is won in the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63a and a holding ball is generated, the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b are based on the data extracted from the winning command. The various determination data of each holding ball are memorize | stored according to the formation order of the holding ball which put together. Therefore, the display control device is such that the voice lamp control device 113 performs the holding symbol display in the holding order of holding the first special symbol and the second special symbol based on the data of the follow sort holding storage area 223k. A command to be output to 114 can be generated. Therefore, it is possible to display the holding symbol display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 in the holding order of holding the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  In addition, based on the winning command, the follow sort hold storage area 223k is updated with data synchronized with the sort hold storage area 203u of the main control unit 110, and there is a change in hold data (new hold being established, etc.) Also, data can be synchronized and updated sequentially.

  The other memory area 223 m is an area for temporarily storing and storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch (see FIG. 3, 122) (see FIG. 3). And a RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and a backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is outputted to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 22) properly.

  When a power failure occurs, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 stores each data of the reordering storage area 203 u as backup data in the backup area of the RAM 203. Then, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 again, each backed up data of the rearrangement suspension storage area 203u is read out from the backup area, and each corresponding suspension area of the rearrangement suspension storage area 203u or being changed It is stored in the data storage area.

  Then, in the start-up process (FIG. 32), similar to the winning command generated in the first pre-reading update process (FIG. 26, S939), based on the reordering storage area 203u stored and read back up data. All the winning commands are generated and output to the voice lamp control device 113, whereby data synchronized with the same sorting storage area 203u is set in the secondary sorting storage area 223k.

  Further, in the start-up process (FIG. 32), by transmitting a prize command to the voice lamp control device 113, the data of the sorting reserve storage area 203u and the secondary sort reserve storage area 223k are also recovered from the time of power failure. Although the configuration for synchronizing has been described, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 backs up each data of the slave sort reserving storage area 223k to the RAM 223 when a power failure occurs as well as the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Naturally, it may be stored as

  The RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 has the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) (see FIG. 3) depressed when the power is turned on (power is applied while pressing the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122)). In this case, it is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

  The MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 executes control processing such as detection of winning of special symbols and ordinary symbols, and various lotterys such as winning and selection of fluctuation patterns for the winnings. Therefore, the control load of the MPU 201 is large, and in order to stably execute control of the pachinko machine 10, as in the present embodiment, the lottery of whether to set the game operation suggestion setting is sub-controlled The control load of the main control device 110 can be lightened by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 corresponding to the device.

  The control substrate of the main controller 110 and the audio lamp controller 113 is covered by a box called a substrate box, which is formed of a transparent plastic base member and a lid member. The substrate box is crimped by a member for preventing fraud called a "sealing member" so that the base member and the lid member can not be easily separated. Generally, when the base member and the lid member are fitted together, the sealing member inserts a pin-shaped sealing member into a through hole provided through a part of the base member and the lid member (? It is difficult to separate the base member and the lid member only by a method that leaves an opening mark such as whether the member forming the through hole is broken or the sealing member is broken by clamping. .

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a ROM 234, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241.

  The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via a bus line 240. An output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. In addition, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, even if the pachinko machine 10 is another model in which the jackpot lottery probability and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot are different models, the model of the specification with exactly the same symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Since the display control device 114 is a common part, cost reduction is achieved.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the ROM 234, and the image controller 237 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described. First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, various processes are executed according to the control program stored in the ROM 234.

  As described above, the ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the ROM 234 after system reset release via the bus line 240, and executes the control program stored in the ROM 234. The ROM 234 is connected to the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the ROM 234 to the work RAM 233. The MPU 231 outputs the image data transferred to the work RAM 233 to the third symbol display device 81 as needed, and performs display control of the third symbol display device 81.

  When the game ball enters the distribution device 630 and is distributed by the passive distribution member 640 and the game ball is won in the first starting opening 63a, each counter value (C1 to C3 and CS1) is acquired and acquired After the lottery and the determination of the fluctuation pattern and the like are performed based on the respective counter values, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol corresponding to the first lottery game is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 Variable display (dynamic display). In addition, when the game ball enters the distribution device 630 during the variable display of the first special symbol, the game ball is distributed by the passive distribution device 640 and wins the second starting opening 63b. When the game ball wins in the second starting opening 63b, each counter value (C1 to C3) is displayed for fluctuating display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second lottery play machine, as in the case of winning in the first starting opening 63a. And CS1) are acquired, and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured to be simultaneously variable display by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, respectively. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37, in the 7-segment LED on the left side of the two 7-segment LEDs of the 7-segment display 37b, the variation display corresponding to the first special symbol is executed, and the 7 on the right In the segment LED, the variable display corresponding to the second special symbol is executed.

  Further, in the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 5A, the variable display corresponding to the first special symbol is executed on the left side display area Dm1, and the second special on the right side display area Dm2. The variable display corresponding to the symbol is executed. By configuring in this manner, variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed, and the player can efficiently execute the first lottery game and the second lottery game. .

  When the game ball wins in the first starting opening 63a while the first special symbol is variably displayed (the remaining fluctuation time is set), the respective counter values (C1 to C3 and CS1) acquired based on the winnings Since the first lottery game for variably displaying the lottery result can not be executed immediately, each counter value is stored (stored) in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. When each counter value is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, an aspect (for example, one of the holding number "1" of the first special symbols of the plurality of light emitting diodes 37a of the first symbol display device 37) The light emitting diode lights up in red). When each counter value is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is updated (the number of holding balls is incremented by 1).

  When each counter value is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 outputs a winning command to the voice lamp control device 113. In the winning command, it is possible to identify which of the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b the winning is to be made, and it is possible to identify what number of holding balls (holding number).

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the prize command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the pending information such as the number of pending items and information about the starting opening which has won from the received command, and based on the pending information, the third symbol display device A process of displaying a reserved symbol in the reserved symbol display area (Ds1 to Ds8) corresponding to the lower display region Ds at 81 is executed. If this holding symbol is a holding symbol corresponding to the holding information of the first special symbol (the first starting opening 63a) as shown in FIG. 5 (b), the "特別" is the second special symbol (the second starting symbol (the second starting symbol). If it is a holding symbol corresponding to the holding information of the mouth 63b), "●" is displayed for each holding information (one holding symbol for one holding symbol) if it is a holding symbol.

  Similarly, while the second special symbol is variably displayed (the remaining fluctuation time is set), when the game ball wins in the second starting opening 63b, each counter value is acquired, and the second special symbol holding ball storage area The value is stored (stored) in 203b, and the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f is updated. Then, the holding symbol indicating that the holding information is stored is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  The reserved symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are displayed in a comprehensive winning order in which the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b are combined with the game balls that have won. One example shown in FIG. 12 will be specifically described. First, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are in a variable display, the first special symbol has a remaining 10s variation time, and the second special symbol has a remaining 5s variation time. It shows. In the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81, a pending symbol “in the pending symbol display area Ds1 indicating that it is the pending information of the second special symbol (pending information based on winning in the second starting opening 63b)“ ● "" indicates that the holding symbol display area Ds2 is the holding information of the first special symbol The holding symbol "○" indicates that the holding symbol display area Ds3 is the holding information of the second special symbol " A held symbol “o” indicating that “●” is the held information of the first special symbol is displayed in the held symbol display area Ds4. In this case, it is shown that the order of holding symbol display area Ds4 is from the holding symbol display area Ds1 in order from the holding symbol display area Ds1 in the order in which the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b are won.

  In other words, after the game ball wins in the second start opening 63b, it wins in the first start opening 63a, and then the game ball wins in the second start opening 63b and then the first start opening 63a. It shows that it did.

  As shown in FIG. 12, in each reserve data, the variation time of the variation pattern selected when the suspension becomes the variation start is predicted and stored in advance (the type of the variation pattern to be determined is stored) Has been Then, since it is the suspension of the second special symbol stored in the winning order first (the reserve area 1 is appropriate in the rearrangement suspension storage area 203u), the remaining of the second special symbol currently displayed in a variable display When the fluctuation time (5 s) elapses, the fluctuation display start time is calculated to be 5 seconds after, since the fluctuation display starts. Also, since it is the suspension of the first special symbol that is stored in the second winning order (in the rearrangement suspension storage area 203u, the suspension area 2 is appropriate), the remainder of the first special symbol currently displayed in a variable display When the fluctuation time (10 s) elapses, the fluctuation display start time is calculated to be 10 seconds after, since the fluctuation display starts. Next, since it is the suspension of the second special symbol that is stored in the third winning order (in the rearrangement suspension storage area 203u, the suspension area 3 is appropriate), the second special symbol currently displayed in a variable display When the fluctuation time (40 s) of the suspension data stored first in the winning sequence elapses in the remaining fluctuation time (5 s), the fluctuation display start time is calculated, so the fluctuation display start time is calculated to be 45 seconds later. Next, since it is the suspension of the first special symbol that is stored in the fourth winning sequence (in the rearrangement suspension storage area 203u, the suspension area 4 is appropriate), the first special symbol currently displayed in variation is When the fluctuation time (10 s) of the suspension data stored second in the winning order elapses in the remaining fluctuation time (10 s), the fluctuation display start time is calculated, so the fluctuation display start time is calculated to be 20 seconds later.

  In this manner, the fluctuation display start time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is calculated in the order of establishment in the sorting reserve storage area 203u, and the fluctuation display start time is, in ascending order, based on the fluctuation display start time. And the variable display order is assigned.

  When the player operates the frame button 22 at this timing, the holding symbol display of the third symbol display device 81 is shown in the sort display mode shown in FIG. The symbol display is rearranged with the reserved symbol display of the second special symbol in the winning order third (the winning symbol display of the fourth winning order is cut in front of the reserved symbol display of the winning order third) and displayed.

  FIG. 13 shows that the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 performs the first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second pre-reading process (FIG. 25) when the gaming ball is won in the first starting opening 63 a 1s after the state of FIG. 27, it is the figure which showed typically the process which determines the fluctuation | variation display start order of the retention symbol newly memorize | stored in S914).

  Since FIG. 13 shows the state after 1 s from FIG. 12, the first special symbol in the variation display has a remaining variation time of 9 s, and the second special symbol has a remaining variation time of 4 s. In addition, the fluctuation start time of each reserve area of the sort reserve storage area 203u is also updated.

  Holding of the newly established first starting opening 63a (first special symbol) is the fifth winning order, and each data is stored in the holding area 5 in the rearrangement holding storage area 203u. First, the same as the newly stored first special symbol, the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the fluctuation display, and the fluctuation fluctuation time of the first special symbol of winning order 2 and 4 are newly added, respectively. The time when the hold of the first special symbol that has been established (stored) becomes the variable display start is calculated (in this case, 24 s).

  Next, as shown in the rearrangement schematic diagram of FIG. 13, the post-reordering order (variation display start order) is added in the order of the start of the fluctuation display based on the fluctuation display start time of each reserve area. At this time, when the player operates the frame button 22 to request the sorting of the reserved symbol display, as shown in the display mode after sorting in FIG. 13, the winning symbol fourth and fifth reserved symbols are displayed. Is rearranged with the third winning symbol display in the winning order (the fourth and fifth winning symbol displays in the winning order are cut in front of the third pending symbol display in the winning order) and displayed.

  In this manner, each time a suspension occurs, the variable display start time is calculated, and the sort order is determined, whereby the player performs an operation (the operation of the frame button 22) to request the sort. In the case of having made, it is possible to quickly display the reserved symbol display after sorting.

  Also, the fluctuation patterns of the 15R probability variation jackpot and the 15R normal jackpot tend to be longer than the fluctuation patterns selected when the variation time is out. As shown in FIG. 13, the first hold of the winning order has a long fluctuation time of 40 seconds. Therefore, the holding of the same second special symbol established after that, the variable display start time will be later than the holding of the first special symbol established later, and if reordering, a long fluctuation time is selected Behind the held symbol display, a type (difference between the first special symbol and the second special symbol) different from the hold whose long fluctuation time is selected is displayed collectively. Therefore, the more the number of the held symbol display displayed by cutting into the subsequent held symbol display area of the held symbol display, the more the player holds the expectation of the big hit for the previous held symbol display, and the player Sorting can be done with the expectation of a jackpot. Therefore, the interest in the game increases and the game can be continued without getting tired.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process (FIG. 32) activated upon power-on and a main process (FIG. 33, S1200) executed after the startup process (this embodiment) There is a timer interrupt process (Fig. 14) activated in 2 ms cycle) and an NMI interrupt process (Fig. 31) activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. The timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the start-up process (FIG. 32) and the main process (FIG. 33, S1200) will be described.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. As the MPU 201 executes this timer interrupt process, various processes to be performed periodically are performed.

  In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S101). In the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) and the main process (FIG. 33, S1200), a command etc. to be transmitted to the payout control device 111, the audio lamp control device 113, etc. is generated based on various processes. It temporarily stores in the ring buffer for command transmission. In the external output process of S101, output data such as a command stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side.

  For example, the ball holding ball number command set in the start winning process (S108 in FIG. 24) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, the determination command and the like set in the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  Next, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S102), and then, the special winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened or closed in the big hit state. A large opening opening / closing process is performed (S103). That is, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has passed or whether the specified winning opening 65a has a prescribed number of balls. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning hole 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning hole 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds.

  Next, the processing for reading various winning switches is executed (S104). That is, while reading the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, the state of the switches is determined to store detection information (winning detection information). Further, based on the winning detection information, a prize ball command corresponding to the acquired ball number to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. As a result, the winning ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process to be executed next.

  Next, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S105). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1 and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), and the updated value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is changed to the RAM 203. In the corresponding counter buffer area.

  Further, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the variation pattern determination counter C3, the change type counter CS1, and the normal hit random number counter C4 are updated (S106). Specifically, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the variation pattern determination counter C3, the stop type counter CS1, and the normal hit random number counter C4 are respectively incremented by 1, and their counter values are maximum In the embodiment, when reaching 399, 99, 100, 198, 239), they are cleared to 0 respectively. Also, when the special per-random number counter C1 or the per-normal random number counter C4 makes one revolution, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 or the common initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is the special per-random number counter C1 or the per-normal random number counter The initial value of C4 is read, and the initial value is set to the special random number counter C1 or the ordinary random number counter C4. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a process for displaying the first special symbol and the second special symbol by the first symbol display device 37, and a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, etc. (S107), and then, a start winning process is executed in association with the winning of the first start opening 63a or the second start opening 63b (S108). The details of the special symbol variation process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIG. 15, and the details of the start winning process (S108) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After executing the start winning process (S108), execute the normal symbol variation process which is the variation process of the normal symbol for the game ball having passed the normal symbol starting opening 67 (S109), and then the normal symbol starting aperture 67 Through gate processing for the game ball having passed (S10). The details of the normal symbol variation processing (S109) will be described later with reference to FIG. 29, and the details of the through gate processing (S110) will be described later with reference to FIG. A launch control process for executing control relating to the launch of the game ball is executed (S111), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S112), and the timer interrupt process is ended. In the launch control process (S111), the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the ball is released under the condition that the strike stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of the firing. Then, when the ball firing is on, the information of the ball firing signal is set in the command transmitting ring buffer provided in the work RAM 203 in order to send the ball firing signal to the firing control device 112. As a result, the ball emission signal is transmitted to the emission control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the processing of S101 of the timer interruption process to be executed next.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 15, the special symbol variation process (S107) which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S107). The special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) performs various determinations and determinations on the first special symbol and the second special symbol based on the acquired counter values, and the variation display determined by the predetermined control In the aspect, the variable display can be simultaneously controlled by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, or the control of stopping display in the display mode indicating the determination result is executed. The special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) will be described below.

  In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107), it is first determined whether or not a jackpot game is in progress (S201). If it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S201: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (S201: No), it is determined whether the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S202). When it is determined that the variable display of the first special symbol is being performed (S202: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process is executed (S204). The first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 17, S204) will be described in detail later, but when the specified fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the fluctuation display has elapsed, a symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game The process of stopping the variable display and the second special symbol is stopped by the symbol indicating the big hit, and when the jackpot game of the second lottery game is executed, the process of temporarily stopping the first special symbol in the variable display Is executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not in the variable display (S202: No), the first special symbol variation start process is executed (S203). The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203) will be described in detail later, but when the first special symbol is temporarily stopped, while processing for resuming the variable display is executed, the temporary stop If the first special symbol holding ball number storage area 203a does not store holding data (various counter values), the jackpot determination based on the holding data and the selection process of the variation pattern are executed. .

  After the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S107) is executed, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is being variably displayed (S205). When it is determined that the second special symbol is in the variable display mode, the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 23, S207) is executed. The second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 23, S207) will be described in detail later, but similarly to the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 19, S204), the specified fluctuation of the second special symbol during the fluctuation display When time passes, the process of stopping the fluctuation display with the symbol indicating the determination result of the second lottery game and the fluctuation display being stopped with the first special symbol indicating the jackpot, the jackpot game of the first lottery game is executed When being done, processing of temporarily stopping the second special symbol in the variable display is executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special symbol is not in the variable display mode, the second special symbol variation start process is executed (S206). This second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 20, S206) will be described later in detail, but, similar to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203), the second special symbol is temporarily stopped. Is the process of resuming the variable display while the temporary data (various counter values) is stored in the second special symbol holding ball number storage area 203b when it is not temporarily stopped, The jackpot determination based on the pending data and the selection process of the variation pattern are executed. Thereafter, this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the first special symbol variation start process (S203), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107), will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (S203).

  In the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203), first, it is determined whether the first special symbol is temporarily stopped (S301). Whether or not the first special symbol is temporarily stopped is determined by whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped although the variation time (variation pattern) is set. . If it is determined that the first special symbol is temporarily stopped (S301: Yes), the measurement of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is resumed (S302). For the variation time of this first special symbol, when the variation pattern etc. is selected when the variation display etc. is started in the first special symbol variation display selection process (FIG. 18, S310) described later. The measurement start of the fluctuation time is set to. When the variation pattern is selected, a variation pattern command is output to the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation display of the first special symbol is started. Further, the main control device 110 starts variable display of the first special symbol of the first display device 37 accordingly. The variable display of the first special symbol (the 7-segment LED on the left side of the 7-segment display 37b) in the first symbol display device 37 is resumed (S303). A first special symbol variation restart command is set to instruct the voice lamp control device 113 to resume variable display of the first special symbol during temporary stop (S304). Thereafter, this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not temporarily stopped (S301: No), the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is acquired (S305). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S306). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S306: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S308) . A process of sequentially shifting data stored in the hold area 1 to the hold area 4 of the first special symbol hold ball number storage area 203a toward the execution area (S308). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in such a way as holding area 1 → execution area, holding area 2 → holding area 1, holding area 3 → holding area 2, holding area 4 → holding area 3 and so on.

  Next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S309). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309) will be described in detail later, the game is set based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 shifted to the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c Based on the state, a jackpot determination of whether or not a jackpot is performed. When it is determined that the determination result is a big hit, the second fluctuation stop flag 203r is set to on. Thereby, it is possible to recognize that the big hit game is started after the first special symbol is variably displayed and stopped and displayed, and the second special symbol in the variably displayed can be temporarily suspended during the jackpot game of the first special symbol. It can be done.

  Next, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S310). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 18, S310) will be described later in detail, but based on the result of the pass / fail determination based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c. Is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on each counter value.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S309), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203), will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S309).

  In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c is acquired (S401). It is determined whether the gaming state is a high probability gaming state (during a definite change) (S402). Whether the gaming state is the high probability gaming state or not is determined depending on whether the probability change flag 203m is set to on. When it is determined that the probability change flag 203m is on (that is, the gaming state is high probability gaming state (during a definite change)) (S402: Yes), based on the special symbol big hit random number table 202a for high probability, It is determined whether the value of the special winning random number counter C1 matches the large hitting random number value, and the lottery result is obtained (S403). On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability change flag 203m is off (that is, the gaming state is not the low probability gaming state (not positive variation)) (S402: No), the special symbol big hit random number table 202a for low probability Based on the determination, it is determined whether the value of the special winning random number counter C1 matches the jackpot random number value, and the lottery result is acquired (S404).

  It is determined whether the lottery result is a jackpot (S405). If it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot (S405: Yes), the second fluctuation stop flag 203r is set to ON (S407). Thereby, in the big hit determination of the first special symbol, the determination result becomes a big hit, and when the variation display of the first special symbol notifying the determination result is stopped and displayed, temporarily if the second special symbol is changing. The variable display will be stopped.

  In this way, by setting the second fluctuation stop flag 203r to ON before the start of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, at the time of the fluctuation table stop of the first special symbol, whether to make the temporary stop of the second special symbol As compared with the case where it is judged whether or not it is possible to prevent the problem that the control processing is concentrated at the time of the fluctuation stop.

  A big hit symbol is set in the first symbol display device 37 based on the acquired value of the special hit type counter C2, and the first jackpot flag 203o is set on (S408). Thereby, in the first symbol display device 37, a symbol based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 (for example, "7" for 15R probability variation jackpot) is set to the left 7-segment LED of the 7-segment display 37b .

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result is off (S405: No), the first symbol display device 37 is detached and the symbol is set (S409). In the present embodiment, in the case of detachment, “−” indicating detachment is set to the left 7-segment LED of the 7-segment display 37 b of the first symbol display device 37. Here, each symbol set in the first symbol display device 37 is a process for setting a symbol to be displayed in a stopped state when the variable display is stopped.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S310), which is one of the first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 16, S203), will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S310).

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 18, S310), first, it is determined whether the result determined in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309) is a big hit (S310) ). The determination of whether or not the jackpot is made is determined by whether or not the first jackpot flag 203o is set to on. If it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON (S501: Yes), the special hit variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the game state is set (S502). When the gaming state is the normal gaming state (in the low probability gaming state and not in the time saving mode), the normal time special winning variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10A) is set. Further, when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state or the short time (the time reduction counter 203k is larger than 0), the time saving / probability changing special hit variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11A) is set.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is off (S501: No), the special out-of-order variation pattern table according to the gaming state is set. When the gaming state is the normal gaming state (in the low probability gaming state and not in the time saving mode), the normal special off variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10 (b)) is set. Further, when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state or the short time (time reduction counter 203k is larger than 0), the time reduction / probability variation special deviation variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11B) is set.

  The jackpot type table is determined according to the jackpot type based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 (S504). The jackpot classification table is composed of a 15R jackpot table and a 2R jackpot table, the 15R jackpot table is determined in the case of 15R probability jackpot and 15R regular jackpot, and the 2R jackpot table is determined in the case of 2R probability jackpot . Based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol suspension execution area 203c, the fluctuation pattern type is selected (decided) from the selected fluctuation pattern table (S505).

  The variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3 (S506). Here, a variation pattern command for notifying the selected variation pattern to the audio lamp control device 113 is also set. The first stop type command is set based on the determined stop type (S507). The measurement start of the first variation time, which is the variation time of the first special symbol, is set.

  By starting measurement of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol together with the setting of fluctuation pattern command, the fluctuation time can be measured at the same time as the fluctuation start of the first special symbol, and the fluctuation time can be measured, and the fluctuation time is measured accurately can do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the first special symbol variation stop processing (S204), which is one of the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 15, S107), will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation stop process (S204).

  In the first special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 19, S204), first, it is determined whether the first variation stop flag 203q is set to ON (S601). If it is determined that the first change stop flag 203 q is set to ON (S601: Yes), it is determined whether the change time of the second special symbol is the end time (S602). If it is determined that the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is the end time (S602: Yes), a temporary first fluctuation stop command is issued to instruct the voice lamp control device 113 to temporarily stop the first special symbol. The first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is temporarily stopped, and the first fluctuation stop flag 203 q is set to be off (S 603). Then, the measurement of the first variation time is interrupted (S604).

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to temporarily stop the first special symbol as well as the timing at which the second special symbol is stopped changing with the determination symbol that is a hit. Thus, the player can play the game concentrating on the jackpot game in the second lottery game.

  Further, since the measurement of the first fluctuation time is also interrupted in accordance with the timing of the temporary stop, it is possible to accurately measure the remaining fluctuation time after the jackpot game.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the first special symbol is temporarily stopped, the third symbol display device 81 stops the display mode in which the player can know that the first special symbol is temporarily stopped. Is displayed. Specifically, a character such as "The first special symbol is temporarily stopped" is displayed, or the player keeps changing display in the display mode in which the three main symbols on the left, center and right that make up the special symbol are shaken. Informing that the temporary stop is in progress. Moreover, the display mode which alert | reports temporary stop is not restricted to this, You may be notification modes other than that.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is not the end time (that is, fluctuation display is in progress) (S602: No), the processing of S605 is executed. If it is determined that the first change stop flag 203 q is off (S601: No), it is determined whether the change time of the first special symbol during the change display is the end time (S605).

  If it is determined that the variation time of the first special symbol is not the end time (S605: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation time of the first special symbol is the end time (S605: Yes), it is determined whether the first jackpot flag 203o is set (S606). If it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is set (S606: Yes), the probability variation flag 203m is set to OFF (S607). Various settings for the jackpot game are made based on the determined variation stop type (S 608). Specifically, in the case of 15R probability variation big hit, 15R normal big hit, the number of rounds where the big hit game is executed is set to 15 times, and the maximum opening time of the specified winning opening 65a in one round is set to 30s Ru. Further, in the case of the 2R probability variation jackpot, the number of rounds in which the jackpot game is executed is set to two, and the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a in one round is set to 2 s.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is off (S606: No), it is determined whether the time reduction counter 203k is a value larger than "0" (S609). If it is determined that the time saving counter 203k is a value larger than "0" (S609: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203 is decremented by 1 (S610). That is, the time saving counter 203k is decremented by one each time the first special symbol changes and is displayed once. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving counter 203k is a value smaller than 0 (that is, 0) (S609: No), the processing of S611 is executed.

  A first determination command instructing the sound lamp control device 113 to stop the change display of the first special symbol is set (S611). The first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the determined result of acceptance or rejection (S612). The value of the first fluctuation time storage area 203s is cleared to 0, and the first fluctuation time measurement value is cleared to 0 (S613). After this, this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the second special symbol variation start process (S206) which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation start process (S206).

  In the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 20, S206), the first special symbol for each of the processes from S301 to S310 with respect to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203) described above. , 1st fluctuation time measurement restart, 1st symbol display device 37, 1st special symbol fluctuation restart command, 1st special symbol holding ball number counter value (N1), 1st special symbol holding ball storage area, 1st special symbol In the jackpot determination process, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process in each process from S701 to S710, the second special symbol, the second variation time measurement resumption, the second symbol display device 37, the second special symbol holding ball number counter It is the same as the value (N2), the second special symbol holding ball storage area, the second special symbol jackpot determination process, and the second special symbol variation pattern selection process, except that they are respectively changed except that they are changed, so Substantially.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S709) which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 20, S206) will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S709).

  In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 21, S709), the first special symbol holding ball execution area for the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309) described above with respect to the processing of S401. In the process of S711, in the second special symbol holding ball execution area, the second variation stop flag and the first jackpot flag for each process from S407 to S408 are the first variation in each process from S717 to S718. The description is omitted because it is the same except that the stop flag and the second jackpot flag are respectively changed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the second special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S710), which is one of the second special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 20, S206), will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S710).

  In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22, S710), the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 18, S310) described above is the first for each of the processes from S507 to S508. The respective processes from the stop type command and the first fluctuation time measurement start to S727 to S728 are the same except that they are respectively changed to the first stop type command and the first fluctuation time measurement start, and therefore the explanation thereof is the same. I omit it.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the second special symbol variation stop processing (S207) which is one of the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 15, S107) will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation stop process (S207).

  In the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 23, S207), the first fluctuation stop with respect to each processing from S601 to S604 with respect to the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 19, S204) described above. In each process from S801 to S804, the flag, the first special symbol, the temporary first fluctuation stop command, and the first fluctuation time measurement suspension are the second fluctuation stop flag, the second special symbol, the temporary second fluctuation stop command, the second For each processing from S611 to S613, the first confirmation command, the first special symbol, and the first fluctuation time measurement value for each processing from S811 to S813 are changed to the suspension time measurement suspension, and the second confirmation command is performed. Since it is the same except that the second special symbol and the second variation time measurement value are respectively changed, the description is omitted.

  As described above, since the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the control of the second special symbol is independently and parallelly executable, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be simultaneously changed and displayed. It can be done. Therefore, it is possible to execute more special symbol lottery games within a predetermined time, and it is possible to increase the probability that a jackpot is given to the player within the predetermined time. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

  Moreover, compared with the pachinko machine 10 in which the lottery game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed by either one, the pachinko machine 10 has variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Even if it is relatively short, in either of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol becomes easy to be executed, and by raising the efficiency of the game, It is possible to suppress the problem that the state in which the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner is long.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the lottery game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed by either one, when the sorting device 630 is provided as in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time is relatively increased. If you do not shorten it, many overflows will not occur. However, as in the present embodiment, in the configuration in which the lottery game is performed with both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, even if the fluctuation having a long fluctuation time is selected, the fluctuation of the special symbol is also performed on the other Can be performed many times in a short time because of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to show the player an effect of a sufficient fluctuation time as needed, and to prevent the player from getting bored more with the game.

  In addition, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously changed and displayed and the lottery game is executed, if a big hit game occurs in one of the first or second special symbols, the other is selected. Since the variable display of the special symbol is temporarily stopped, the player can concentrate on the jackpot game and play the game.

  In addition, since the temporarily stopped special symbol is stopped in a display mode or a notification mode that shows the player that the temporary stop is in progress, the player can not lose the lottery game which was in the process of the variable display. It can be grasped and can play a big hit game in peace.

  In addition, since the sorting device 630 is provided in the pachinko machine 10, the first starting port 63a and the second starting port 63b are easily winning alternately, and the first starting port 63a or the second starting port 63a is configured. If the winning is biased to one of the openings 63b and the other starting opening with a small amount of holding is attempted to achieve a winning, the game ball also reaches the upper limit of the number of holdings in one starting opening 63a, 63b. It is possible to suppress the problem that many invalid balls are generated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the start winning process (S108) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S108). In the start winning process (FIG. 24, S108), it is determined whether or not the gaming ball has won in the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b, and when the winning is achieved, the hold upper limit number (first starting opening 63a, It is a process which stores each acquired counter value in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b up to 4) in each of the 2 starting openings 63b. In addition, when each counter value acquired based on the holding ball is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, respectively, the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a Or based on each counter value memorized by each of the 2nd special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, processing which predicts a success / failure determination result, a variation pattern selected, etc. in advance is performed. The start winning process (FIG. 24, S108) will be described below.

  In the start winning process (FIG. 24, S108), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won in the first start opening 63a (start winning) (S901). Here, the winning of the first starting opening 63a is detected. If it is determined that the ball has won in the first starting opening 63a (there is a starting winning) (S901: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is acquired (S902). It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S903). It is determined whether this is less than four, which is the upper limit value of the number of reservations for the first starting port 63a (that is, is the number of reservations being stored to the upper limit value). When it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S903: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e (S904). A ball holding ball number command for notifying the sounding lamp control device 113 of the number of holding balls is set (S 905). Each value of special hit random number counter C1, special hit type counter C2, fluctuation pattern judgment counter C3 and fluctuation type counter CS1 which are various counter values are read out (obtained) from the counter buffer, and the special symbol holding ball of RAM 203 is held. The special hit random number counter storage area 203c1, the special hit type counter storage area 203c2, the fluctuation pattern determination counter storage area 203c3 and the fluctuation type counter storage area 203c4 of the execution area 203c are respectively reserved (stored) (S906).

  Next, a first prefetch process is performed (S 907). The first read-ahead process (FIG. 25, S108) will be described in detail later, but the first special display is stored with the variable display start order based on the respective counter values newly stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. The combination of the symbol and the second special symbol is used to determine in advance what number it is in advance, and further, from the variation display order and each stored counter value, the result of determination of success or failure, the variation pattern to be determined, the stop type, etc. A process of determining

  Next, with respect to each processing of S908 to S914, the same processing as the processing performed for the winning of the gaming ball to the first starting opening 63a performed in each processing of S901 to S907 is the second processing. The only difference is that the process is performed for the starting opening 63b, so the detailed description will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the first prefetch process (S907) which is one process of the start winning process (S108 in FIG. 24) will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this first pre-reading process (S 907).

  In the first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S 907), first, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the variation which are various counter values from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol hold storage area 203a. The values of the pattern determination counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 are read out. The read data is stored in an area having the smallest winning order among the vacant storage areas of the sorting reserve storage area 203u, and variable display based on the newly stored suspension data (each counter value) is started The variable display start time is calculated (S922).

  This fluctuation start time, as shown in FIG. 12, is a special symbol in the fluctuation display corresponding to the newly stored holding data (if it is the holding data based on the first starting opening 63a, the first special symbol, the second If it is a reserve data based on the special symbol 63b, each reserve data previously stored is determined based on the remaining fluctuation time of the second special symbol) and the same starting opening 63a, 63b as the newly stored reserve data. It is calculated by adding the respective fluctuation time.

  Here, if the newly stored pending data is the pending data based on the first starting port 63a, the newly stored pending data is a previously held data based on the same starting port as the newly stored pending data. (Based on the first special symbol) pending data based on the first starting opening 63a stored in the first storage, while if the newly stored pending data is pending data based on the second starting opening 63b, it is stored first Data (corresponding to the second special symbol) based on the second start port 63b being held.

  When the variable display start time is calculated, the post-rearrangement order is renumbered in the ascending order of the variable display start time of all the suspension data stored in the rearrangement hold storage area 203 u (S 923). Here, with regard to the renumbering of the variable display start time, in the present embodiment, the renumbering is performed for all the pending data, but the present invention is not limited thereto. When the newly displayed variable data display start order of suspended data is interrupted by the variable data display start sequence of the previously stored data, it is natural that only the change order is renumbered. Good.

  It is determined whether or not the pre-read certainty change flag 203 u 6 immediately preceding the change display start order of the newly stored pending data is set to ON (S 924). If it is determined that the prefetching probability change flag 203 u 6 immediately before the fluctuation display start order of the newly stored reserved data is set to ON (S 924: Yes), the special symbol big hit random number for high probability time Based on the jackpot determination value of the table 202a, the success or failure of the first special symbol is predicted, and the determination result is stored in the corresponding rearrangement storage area 203u (S925). On the other hand, when it is determined that the prefetch read only change flag 203 u 6 immediately before the variable display start order of the newly stored reserved data is off (S 924: No), the special symbol big hit random number table for low probability time Based on the jackpot determination value of 202a, the success or failure of the first special symbol is predicted, and the determination result is stored in the corresponding rearrangement storage area 203u (S927).

  The first read ahead update process is executed (S926). The first prefetch update process (FIG. 26, S926) will be described in detail later, but in the order in which the variable display is actually started, the result of the pass / fail judgment of the hold data (various counter values) stored in the rearrangement hold storage area 203u. , The jackpot type (whether or not it is a positive change) and the change pattern (change time) are stored (updated).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the first prefetch update process (S926) which is one process of the first prefetch process (S907 in FIG. 25) will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this first prefetch update process (S926).

  In the first prefetch update process (S926 in FIG. 26), first, it is determined whether the success / failure determination result predicted in the process of S925 in the first prefetch process (S907 in FIG. 25) is a jackpot (S931). If it is determined that the success or failure judgment result predicted by the process of S925 in the first pre-reading process (S 907 in FIG. 25) was a big hit (S931: Yes), the predicted big hit is a positive change big hit (15R positive change big hit or 2R) It is determined whether or not the probability variation jackpot (S932). If it is determined that the predicted jackpot is a probable variation jackpot (S 932: Yes), the prefetch probability change flag 203 u 6 of the rearrangement hold storage area 203 u corresponding to the newly stored hold data is set to ON (S 933) . Note that when data is shifted to and stored in the upper reservation area, the data in the reservation area before being shifted is cleared to 0 when the data is shifted and stored in the upper reservation area, and therefore, the prefetch error variation n flag 203 u 6 is set to off. Clogged, pre-read error flag 203u6, which is set to ON once, is shifted to the hold area in order, and it is turned off by being overwritten (0 clear) when the next new data is shifted in the in-transition data storage area. It is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the predicted jackpot is not a definite variation jackpot (that is, 15R is usually a jackpot) (S932: No), the processing of S934 is executed.

  The special hit type counter C2 for the hold data newly stored from the special hit change pattern table 202d corresponding to the gaming state at the start of the change display (certainly changed or not or not) The fluctuation pattern determined at the start of the fluctuation display is predicted based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S934).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the success or failure judgment result predicted in the process of S925 in the first pre-reading process (S 907 in FIG. 25) is out of step (S931: No), the gaming state (probability change or short Determined based on the values of the variation pattern determination counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 newly stored in the suspension data from the special outlier variation pattern table 202e corresponding to whether or not A variation pattern is predicted (S935).

  The predicted success or failure, the stop type, and the variation pattern are stored in the area corresponding to the winning order in the rearrangement hold storage area 203 u (corresponding to the newly stored hold data) (S 936). It is determined whether or not the fluctuation display start order of the suspension data newly stored in the rearrangement suspension storage area 203u is stored (changed in order) into the fluctuation display start order stored previously (S937) . When it is determined that the fluctuation display start order of the suspension data newly stored in the rearrangement suspension storage area 203 u is interrupted (or changed in order) and stored in the fluctuation display start order stored previously. (S937: Yes) For the hold data after the fluctuation display start order of the newly stored hold data, the yes / no, the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern are predicted again and updated (S938). Voice lamp control device for each data corresponding to all the pending data stored in the sorting pending storage area 203u based on the pass / fail type, the variation pattern, the winning sequence, the variation display start sequence, and the prefetching probability change flag u6 A winning command for notifying to 113 is generated for each pending data (S939).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the second prefetch process (S914) which is one process of the start winning process (S108 in FIG. 24) will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing this second pre-reading process (S914).

  The second pre-reading process (FIG. 27, S914) pre-reads pending data based on the fact that the above-described first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S 907) is won in the first starting opening 63a and is stored. While the variable display start order of the held data is determined to perform various determinations, the held data stored in advance is prefetched based on the held data based on the winning of the second start port 63b. The same processing is executed except that the variable display start order is determined and processing is performed to make various determinations, and thus the detailed description will be omitted.

  The first prefetch update process (FIG. 26, S926) described above is also performed on the second prefetch update process (S946), which is one process of the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, 914) shown in FIG. (1) Various selection data are predicted based on the fluctuation display start order of the suspension data based on winning in the starting opening 63a, and it is processing to generate a winning command, while winning in the second starting opening 63b The same processing is executed except that it is different from the processing of predicting various selection data and generating a winning command based on the fluctuation display start order of the suspension data based on the same, so the detailed description is omitted. Do.

  In this manner, the game ball is won in the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b, and various counter values are newly stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. When (held data is stored), the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, S 914) is executed. The newly stored pending data is stored in the sorting pending ball storage area 203u in the order in which the variable display starts in the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, S 914). Since it is determined in comparison with the fluctuation display start time of each held data being played, the game state (whether or not the probability change is in progress) is accurately determined when the fluctuation display of the stored held data is started can do. Therefore, it is possible to accurately determine the success / failure determination result, the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern displayed in a fluctuating manner. Therefore, the first prefetching process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second is also performed next when the pending data is newly stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. The fluctuation display start time of the newly stored suspension data can be accurately predicted based on the fluctuation time (variation pattern) of each suspension data predicted in the prefetch process (FIG. 27, S914). As a result, the correct variation display start order can be predicted.

  In addition, when the variable display start order of the newly stored hold data is stored in the variable display start order of the hold data previously stored (the order is earlier), the newly stored hold is stored. For each hold data of the variable display start order after the data, the gaming state at the start of the variable display is predicted again by the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, S 907) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, S 914) Since the prediction (prefetching) of the pass / fail, the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern is performed, the winning command can be generated based on the more accurate prediction result. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the accurate prediction result of the stored pending data from the winning command.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, normal symbol variation processing (S109) which is one processing of timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S109). The normal symbol variation process (S109) is a process for controlling the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display unit 88, the open time of the ordinary electric power role object 64, and the like.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the current symbol is in the middle of the normal symbol (second symbol). (S1001). The middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol) includes the period from when the second symbol display portion 88 displays a display indicating a hit until the opening / closing control of the normal motorized symbol 64 is performed. If it is determined that a normal symbol (the second symbol) is being hit (S1001: Yes), the present processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (the second symbol) is not in contact (S1001: No), it is determined whether or not the normal symbol of the second symbol display portion 88 is being variably displayed (S1002). If it is determined that the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner (S1002: Yes), it is determined whether the variation time of the normal symbol being executed in the second symbol display unit 88 has elapsed ( S1003). Here, the fluctuation time is a time set in advance by the processing of S1017 and the processing of S1018, which will be described later, before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display unit 88.

  In the process of S1003, when the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S1003: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1003 that the variation time of the normal symbol being variably displayed has elapsed (S1003: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display section 88 is set (S1004) . In the process of S1004, when the lottery of the normal symbol becomes a hit, and the display mode is set by the process of S1018, the "O" symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display portion 88 as the second symbol (lighting display Set to be On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is out and the display mode at the time of disconnection is set by the process of S1017, the "x" symbol is displayed in the second symbol display section 88 as the second symbol, and the stop display (lighting It is set to be displayed. When the stop display is set by the process of S1004, the fluctuation display in the second symbol display unit 88 is ended, and the stop symbol (the second symbol) is the first in the display mode set in the process of S1017 and S1018. 2 The stop display (lighting display) is made on the symbol display unit 88.

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a hit (S1005). If it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol this time is a hit (S1005: Yes), the start of the open / close control of the ordinary electric role item 64 is set (1006). On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol this time is out (S1005: No), this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1002, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the variable display (S1002: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g (number M of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S1007). After the process of S1007, the process of S1023 is performed.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is larger than 0 (S1008). When it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is 0 (S1008: No), the present process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is not 0 (S1008: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S1009).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h is shifted (S1010). In the process of S1010, the data stored in the normal symbol holding 1 to the normal symbol holding 4 of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h is shifted in order toward the execution area. More specifically, normal symbol holding 1 → execution area, normal symbol holding 2 → normal symbol holding 1, normal symbol holding 3 → normal symbol holding 2, normal symbol holding 4 → normal symbol holding 4 etc. Shift data After shifting the data, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area 203i is acquired (S1011).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203k is 1 or more (that is, is not 0) (S1012). When it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203k is 0 (that is, it is not in time reduction) (S1012: No), the hit determination value of the random symbol per random symbol table (FIG. 8 (d)) for low probability time Based on the result of step S1013, the result of the judgment is obtained (S1013). On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the hour reduction counter 203 k is not 0 (that is, it is in the middle of a minute) (S1012: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in progress ( S1014). When it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being played (S1014: Yes), the processing of S1013 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not in the jackpot (S1014: No), the hit judgment value of the normal symbol per random symbol table (FIG. 8 (d)) for high probability is used. Based on the determination result, the result of the determination is obtained (S1015).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second symbol (normal symbol) is a hit (S1016). When it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (normal symbol) is not a hit (that is, it is out) (S1016: No), a display mode of "x" which is a display mode at the time of out is set (S1017). On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (normal symbol) is a hit (that is, it is a hit) (S1016: Yes), the display mode of "o" which is the display mode at the time of hit is It is set (S1018).

  It is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203k is 1 or more (that is, whether the gaming state is time saving (including positive change)) (S1019). If it is determined that the time is not short (S1019: No), the open time of the blades 64a and 64b of the normal motorized character 64 is set to 0.2 s, and the open frequency is set to 1 (S1020).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the time is short (S1019: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in progress (S1021). If it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being played (S1021: Yes), the processing of S1020 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not in progress (S1021: No), the opening time of the blades 64a and 64b of the ordinary electric character 64 is 1s, and the number of times of opening is two. It is set (S1020).

  It is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203k is 1 or more (that is, whether the gaming state is time saving (including a definite change)) (S1023). When it is determined that the time is short (S1023: Yes), the variation time of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is set to 3s (S1024). On the other hand, when it is determined that the time is not short (S1023: No), the variation time of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is set to 30 s (S1025).

  Next, the through gate passing process (S110) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S110). This through gate passing process (S110) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and it is determined whether the gaming ball has passed through the normal symbol starting opening 67 and there is a passing of the gaming ball. This is processing for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the normal random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process (FIG. 30, S110), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the normal symbol starting port (gate) 67 (S1031). Here, the fact that the gaming ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed the normal symbol starting opening 67 (S1031: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is acquired (S1032). Then, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S1033).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal symbol starting port (gate) 67 (S1031: No), or even if the ball has passed the normal symbol starting port 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is If it is not less than 4 (S1033: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes the normal symbol starting opening 67 (S1031: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is less than 4 (S1033: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number counter The value (M) of 203 g is incremented by 1 (S1034). Then, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 updated in S106 of the timer interrupt processing described above and the first normal symbol flag in the free reservation area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h of the RAM 203 (normal symbol holding 1 to normal symbol) It is stored in the first area of hold 4) (S1035). In the process of S1035, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203g is referred to, and if the value is 0, the area of the normal symbol holding 1 is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the area of normal symbol hold 2 is the case, if the value is 2, the area of normal symbol hold 3 is the first, and if the value is 3, the area of normal symbol hold 4 is the first Area.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control under execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1041), and ends the NMI interrupt processing Do.

  The above-described NMI interrupt processing is also executed by the payout and emission control device 111 in the same manner, and the power disconnection occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout etc., the blackout signal SG1 is outputted from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control under execution. Start the NMI interrupt processing.

  Next, referring to FIG. 32, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this start-up process.

  This start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on. In the start-up process (FIG. 32), first, an initial setting process associated with power on is executed (S1101). For example, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Subsequently, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a weight process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S1102). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1103).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S1104), and if it is turned on (S1104: Yes), the process proceeds to S1110. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is not turned on (S1104: No), it is further determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (11605). (S1105: No), since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power-off has not ended normally, the processing also shifts to S1110 in this case.

  If the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1105: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1106), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1107: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so the process also proceeds to S1110 in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S1110, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 to be the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1110). When receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and can start the payout control of the gaming ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1111, S1112) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) when initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the time of opening of a hall. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the initialization process (S1111, S1112) of the RAM 203 is executed.

  In addition, the initialization process (S1111, S1112) of the RAM 203 is also executed similarly when the occurrence of power-off is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.). . In the initialization process of the RAM (S1111, S1112), the use area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1111), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1112). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S1113.

  On the other hand, since the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is not turned on (S1104: No), power supply interruption occurrence information is stored (S1105: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) If it is normal (S1107: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared (S1108) while keeping the data backed up in the RAM 203. Next, a payout recovery command at power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of driving power supply interruption is transmitted (S1109), and the process shifts to the processing of S1113. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout recovery command, it holds the data stored in the RAM 213, and can start the payout control of the gaming balls.

  Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S1113). Thereafter, the interrupt is permitted (S914). Then, the process proceeds to main processing (S1200) described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the main process (S1200) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 after the above-described start-up process will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this main processing (S1200). In the main process (S1200), the process of updating the counter and the process of powering off are roughly executed.

  In the main processing (FIG. 33, S1200), first, in timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 14), output data such as a command stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 is The external output processing to be transmitted to the control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1201).

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1202). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (100 in the present embodiment). Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer 202b of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1203). The display control process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1204).

  Next, display control processing of a second symbol (for example, a symbol of “o” or “x”) by the second symbol display unit 88 is executed (S1205). Simply stated, on the condition that the ball has passed the normal symbol opening (through gate) 67, the second random number counter C4 value is acquired at the timing when it passes, and the second symbol display section 88 The variable display of the second symbol is implemented. Then, the lottery of the second symbol is carried out based on the value of the normal random number counter C4, and when the second symbol is hit, the ordinary electric wheeled product 64 is opened for a predetermined time.

  After that, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1206), and if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1206: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous main processing (S1207) If the predetermined time has already passed (S1207: Yes), the process proceeds to S1201, and the above-described S1201 and subsequent steps are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S1207: No), the initial time within the predetermined time is reached, ie, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process. The value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1208, S1209).

  First, updating of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 is executed (S1208). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 239 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated values of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1202 (S1209).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1201 to S1205 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but is variably displayed. Therefore, by repeatedly executing updating of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 using such remaining time, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the special hit random number counter C1) The initial value of the random number counter C4 can be updated at random, and the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated randomly.

  Further, in the process of S1206, if the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1206: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 31 has been executed, so that the processing at the time of the power-off after S1210 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is inhibited (S1210), and a power-off command indicating that the power is shut off is sent to another control device (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). And transmit (S1211). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1212), the access to the RAM 203 is inhibited (S1213), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1206 is at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1201 to S1205 or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S1208 and S1209 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of main controller 110, since the occurrence information of the power-off is confirmed at the timing when each setting is finished, when returning from the power-off state, the process is performed after the end of the start-up process. It is possible to start from the process of S1201. That is, as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process, the process can be started from the process of S1201. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1201. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or runaway.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 34 to 40, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The processes of the MPU 221 can be roughly classified into a start-up process that is started up with the power on and a main process (S1400) that is executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 34, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is performed, first, an initial setting process is performed according to the power on (S1301). Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether the power-off process flag is on or not, the power-on process of S1418 (see FIG. 35) is performed due to a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called "temporary power failure") of the current start-up process. It is judged whether or not it is started during the execution of (S1302). As described later with reference to FIG. 35, when the power-off command is received from the main control device 110 (see S1415 in FIG. 35), the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process of S1418. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1418 is being executed can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1302: No), the current start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off of S1418 occurs. It was started after completing execution of the process, or was started after reset (only without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) by resetting only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1303).

  Confirmation of data corruption in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55 AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1306. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55 AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if "55 AAh", the data destruction of the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1303: Yes), the process proceeds to S1304 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1303: No), the process proceeds to S1308.

  In addition, since the keyword of "55AAh" is not memorize | stored in the specific area | region of RAM223 when the start-up process this time is started after the power supply was cut off completely (The memory of RAM223 is lost by power-off. ) Is judged to be data destruction of the RAM 223 (S1303: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1304. On the other hand, the current start-up process is started after completing the execution of the power-off process in S1418 after a momentary power failure has occurred, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. In the case where it is started to start, since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1303: No), and the process proceeds to S1308.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1302: Yes), the current start-up process is performed after the instantaneous power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off process of S1418, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since the control can not be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1304 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1304, the storage area of the whole range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1304). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”, and if “0FFh”, it is determined that it is normal. The writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” next to “0FFh”. By the read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1305: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1306). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether there is data corruption in the RAM 223 or not. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the reading / writing check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1305: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1307), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S1308, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S1308). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1418 is performed (see FIG. 35, S1417). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1418 is performed, the process of S1308 is performed instantaneously when the power-off flag is turned on until the process of S1308 is performed. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1418 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1109), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1310). The permission is set (S1113), and the process proceeds to the main processing (S1400). The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing a command or the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason for reaching the processing of S1308 in the state where the power-off flag is turned off is that, for example, the current startup processing is started after the power is completely shut off, and the processing of S1304 to S1306 is performed. It is a case where the processing is reached or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: No), S1309, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1310, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1310).

  The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1309 is that, when the process of S1308 is reached via the processes of S1304 to S1306, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1304. If the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data of the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, and the audio lamp control device 113 is stored. It is because control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the main processing (S1400) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the start-up processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this main processing (S1400). When the main process (S1400) is performed, it is first determined whether or not one millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process (S1400) was started or the process of S1401 was performed last time (S1400). S1401), if 1 millisecond or more has not elapsed (S1401: No), the processing of S1402 to S1410 is not performed, and the processing shifts to the processing of S1411. In the process of S1401, the process of determining whether 1 millisecond has elapsed is a process relating to display (rendering) in S1402 to S1410, and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the variation display process of S1411 and the command determination process of S1412 in a short cycle. Since the process of S1414 is executed in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1414 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Setting based on the variable display effect can be performed without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1401 (S1401: Yes), first, various commands to the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1403 to S1414 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 ( S1402). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to become the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1409 described later (S1403), and then the power on notification process is executed (S1404). The power on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is made by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. It will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S1405 without performing notification by the power on notification process.

  In the process of S1405, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the number-of-helds display update process is executed (S1406). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is sent to 114. In the number-of-holds display update processing (S1406), although described later in detail, processing of updating the display of the held symbol display of the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the data of the follow sort hold storage area 223k. .

  Thereafter, the frame button input monitoring and rendering process is executed (S1407). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, the input whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process set to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  In addition, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a rearranging possible period (period in which a large hit game and a state without a hold are omitted) described later, the hold symbol display displayed in the hold establishment order starts variable display It is sorted and displayed in order.

  When the frame button input monitoring and rendering process is finished, next, the lamp editing process is executed (S1408), and then the sound editing and output process is executed (S1409). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the electric decoration portions 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1409, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1410). Thereafter, the process proceeds to the process of S1411. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. The lamp editing process of S1408 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. In addition, the sound editing / output processing of S1409 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1411, in order to display the variation display effect in the third symbol display device 81, a variation pattern command for display is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is displayed control device 114 The variable display setting process, which is a process to be set to transmit the image data, is executed. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the fluctuation display setting process (S1411), a temporary fluctuation stop process is executed (S1412). In this temporary fluctuation stop process (S1412), a temporary first fluctuation stop command indicating temporary stop of the first special symbol from the main controller 110 or a temporary second fluctuation stop command indicating temporary stop of the second special symbol On the basis of having received the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Details of the temporary variation stop process (S1412) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the temporary fluctuation stop process (S1412), a hold reordering process is executed (S1413). In this pending sorting process, based on the winning command output from the main control unit 110, the pending symbol display is sorted and displayed based on the player's button operation from the winning order to the variable display start order. Execute the process The details of the pending reordering process (S1413) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the pending reordering process (S1413), a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control apparatus 110 (S1414). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1414 ends, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1415). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1415 (S1415: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on (S1417), and the power-off process is executed (S1418). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1419), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is inhibited, and each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of occurrence information of power-off is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1415 (S1415: No), whether the RAM 223 is destroyed or not is determined based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1416) and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1416: No), the process returns to S1401, and the main process (S1400) is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1416: Yes), the processing is endlessly looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, since the main process (S1400) is not executed if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a clerk or the like in the hall to ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, notification of the destruction of the RAM may be performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, a command determination process (S1414) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1414). This command determination process (S1414) is executed in the main process (S1400) (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, the command received from the main control device 110 Determine The details of the command determination process (S1414) will be described below.

  In the command determination process (FIG. 36, S1414), first, the first command received from the main control apparatus 110 among the unprocessed commands is read out and analyzed from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, and the main control apparatus 110 Further, it is determined whether the first variation pattern command has been received (S1501). Here, the first change pattern command is a special symbol indicating a change display mode for changing and displaying the first special symbol. When it is determined that the first fluctuation pattern command has been received (S1501: Yes), the first fluctuation start flag 223c1 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1502). A variation pattern type is extracted from the received first variation pattern command (S1503). The variation pattern type extracted here is identifiably stored in the other memory area 223m of the RAM 223 as being the variation pattern type of the first special symbol, and is displayed in the variation display setting process (FIG. 38, S1411) described later. It is used when setting the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol that notifies the control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the first special symbol and the variation pattern type of the first special symbol.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the first variation pattern command has not been received (S1501: No), it is determined whether the second variation pattern command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1505). Here, the second change pattern command is a special symbol indicating a change display mode for changing and displaying the second special symbol. When it is determined that the second fluctuation pattern command has been received (S1504: Yes), the second fluctuation start flag 223c2 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1505). A variation pattern type is extracted from the received second variation pattern command (S1506). The variation pattern type extracted here is identifiably stored in the other memory area 223m of the RAM 223 to be the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and is displayed in the variation display setting process (FIG. 38, S1411) described later. It is used when setting the variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol that notifies the control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the second special symbol and the variation pattern type of the second special symbol.

  If it is determined that the second variation pattern command has not been received (S1504: No), it is determined whether the first or second type-of-stop command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1507). If it is determined that the first or second type-of-stop command has been received (S1507: Yes), if the first type-of-stop command has been received, the first type-of-stop selection flag is set to ON. When the second stop type command is received, the second stop type selection flag is set to on. (S1508). A stop type (either 15R probability big hit, 15R normal big hit, 2R probability big hit) is extracted from the received first stop type command or second stop type command (S1506). The extracted stop type is stored in the other memory area 223 m of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the stop type extracted from the first stop type command can distinguish that it is the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the second stop type command is the stop type of the second special symbol Are stored so as to be identifiable.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first or second stop type command has not been received (S1507: No), it is determined whether or not the ball holding ball number command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1510). If it is determined that the holding ball number command has been received (S1510: Yes), the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110 or the second special symbol holding ball included in the received holding ball number command The value of the number counter f (ie, the number of balls held for the variable display effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol held in the main controller 110) is extracted, and the number of balls held for the first special symbol is the voice lamp The first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b1 of the control device 113 is stored, and the second special symbol holding ball number is stored in the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223b2 (S1511).

  Here, since the holding ball number command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 when the ball wins (start winning) at the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b, whenever there is a starting winning combination , By the process of S1508, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b1 and the second special symbol holding ball counter 223b2 of the voice lamp control device 113 to the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110 and the first (2) It can be adjusted to the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203f. Therefore, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b1 or the second special symbol holding ball counter 223b2 of the voice lamp control device 113 is the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Or even if it deviates from the value of the second special symbol holding ball counter 203f, correct the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b1 or the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223b2 of the voice lamp control device 113 at the start winning detection Can be adjusted to the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e of the main control unit 110 or the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f.

  If it is determined that the hold ball number command has not been received (S1510: No), it is determined whether a winning command has been received (S1512). If it is determined that the winning command has been received (S1512: Yes), the information of each holding area of the rearrangement hold storage area 203u of the main control device 110 is extracted from the received command (S1510). Here, the information of each reserve area in the rearrangement reserve storage area 203 u to be extracted is the time until it becomes the variation display order, the variation display order, the variation display start, the success / failure determination result for each suspension, for each reserve .

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S1512: No), it is determined whether the temporary first change stop command or the temporary second change stop command has been received (S1515). If it is determined that the temporary first change stop command or the temporary second change stop command is received (S1515: Yes), if the temporary first change stop command is received, the sub first change stop flag 223e If the temporary second change stop command is received, the sub second change stop flag 223f is set on (S1516).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the temporary first change stop command or the temporary second change stop command is not received (S1515: No), the first special symbol change restart command or the second special symbol change restart command is received. It is judged whether or not (S1517). When it is determined that the first special symbol variation resume command or the second special symbol variation resume command is received (S1517: Yes), the first special symbol variation resume command corresponding to the received command is received. In the case, the first variation resumption flag 223g is set to on. Also, when the second special symbol variation resume command is received, the sub second variation resume flag 223h is set to ON (S1518).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol variation resume command or the second special symbol variation resume command is not received (S1517: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S1519).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the pending number display update process (S1406) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing this pending number display update process (S1406). This pending number display updating process (S1406) is a process for updating the pending symbol display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the data of each pending area of the sub sort pending storage area 223k. .

  In the pending number display updating process (FIG. 37, S1406), first, the variation display start time of the variation start time storage area 223k5 of each pending area of the follow sort pending storage area 223k is updated. The execution cycle of this process (1 ms in this embodiment) is subtracted from each piece of time data stored in the change start time storage area 223k5. Further, the update of the variable display start time is not limited to this, and may be performed by providing an RTC or the like, or may be another method.

  The hold symbol display corresponding to the hold area in which the sort flag 223k7 of the follow sort hold memory area 223k is on is a hold corresponding to the hold area in which the sort flag 223k7 is off in the variable display start order. In the symbol display, the holding symbol display is displayed in the holding order.

  Here, the reordering flag 223k7 is operated (in the present embodiment, the frame button 22 in a reorderable period) in the pending reordering process (S1413 in FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 described later. When pressed, it is set to ON in all pending areas where pending data is stored. As a result, all displayed pending symbol displays are sorted and displayed based on the pending variable display start order from the pending order of holding. On the other hand, after the sorting flag 223k7 is set to ON, regarding the newly stored hold, the sorting flag 223k7 is off, so the order established without being sorted, ie, the third symbol display device 81 Displayed at the end of the display of the pending symbol displayed on.

  Therefore, when the player operates the frame button 22 in order to rearrange the holding symbol display, the holding symbol display displayed at that time is rearranged in the variable display start order, and thereafter Also, while the display of the sorted symbol display is maintained in the variable display start order, the display of the symbol display corresponding to the newly stored (occurred) hold is displayed first in the formation order for the display of the hold symbol corresponding to the hold. Since it is displayed at the tail end without being interrupted and displayed on the held symbol display being played, the player can suppress a defect that confuses the order in which the current display is displayed. Can.

  Further, as described above, by rearranging only the reserved symbol display displayed when the frame button 22 is operated, it is possible to inform the variable display start order only when the player wants to know.

  Also, in the case of a 15R probability variation jackpot or a 15R normal jackpot, a relatively long fluctuation pattern is selected. Therefore, the change display start time is delayed for the hold established at the same starting opening 63a, 63b as the hold that is a big hit. Therefore, the case where the variable display start time is earlier occurs in the case of the suspension with the late establishment order occurring at the start ports 63a and 63b different from the suspension that becomes the big hit. In such a case, when sorting of the reserved symbols is performed, the reserved symbols whose order of establishment is late are interrupted and displayed before the reserved symbols whose order of establishment is earlier than that (the reserved symbol display area Ds1 side) Ru. Therefore, when the player operates the frame button 22 to rearrange the holding symbol display, when the holding symbol of the late formation order is interrupted and displayed before the holding symbol of the early formation order, Among the holding symbols displayed before the holding symbol displayed by the interruption, it may be a big hit about the holding that occurred in the winning opening to the starting opening 63a, 63b different from the holding symbol displayed by the interruption You can have expectations.

  Therefore, when the player operates the frame button 22, he or she thinks that there may be a jackpot in the holding symbol display, and can operate the frame button in anticipation of changing the arrangement order. The frame button 22 can be operated with a sense of expectation for the jackpot.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the variable display setting process (S1411) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process (S1411). The variable display setting process (FIG. 38, S1411) is a process of the main process (S1400) (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variation display setting process (FIG. 38, S1411) is based on the first or second variation pattern command received from main controller 110 in order to cause variation display effect to be displayed on third symbol display device 81. Then, a variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is generated, and processing for transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Also, based on the extracted stop type (15R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot), a process of setting a first or second display type command for display to notify the display control device 114 of the stop classification. Run.

  In the fluctuation display setting process (S1411 in FIG. 38), first, it is determined whether the first fluctuation start flag 223c1 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1601). Then, if it is determined that the first change start flag 223c1 is off (S1601: No), since the first change pattern command is not received from the main control device 110, the process of S1606 is executed. Do. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first fluctuation start flag 223c1 is on (S1601: Yes), the first fluctuation start flag 223c is set to be off (S1602).

  In the process of S1603, the variation pattern in the variation display effect of the first special symbol extracted from the first variation pattern command in the process of S1503 of the command determination process (FIG. 36, S1414) is acquired from the other memory area 223m of the RAM 223 Thus, the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol is generated (S1603). In addition, the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol is configured to be distinguishable whether it is a variation pattern command for display corresponding to the first special symbol or a variation pattern command for the second special symbol. Specifically, if the upper 2 bits of the upper byte of the display variation pattern command of 2 bytes configuration is "10", it indicates that it corresponds to the first special symbol, and if it is "01" the second special symbol It is configured to indicate that it corresponds to

  The variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol set in the process of S1603 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is output by the command output process (S1402) of the main process (FIG. 35, S1400). It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the display control device 114 corresponds to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the first special symbol indicated by the variation pattern command for display. Display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbol is performed.

  Here, when the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the variation display mode indicated by the received display variation pattern command is displayed in the left display area Dm1 of the third symbol display device 81, The first special symbol (the third symbol) is variably displayed (dynamically displayed). With the setting of the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the holding ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set display variation pattern command is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the holding sphere of the first special symbol In accordance with the setting of display), the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b1 is decreased by 1, and the holding data stored in the follow sort holding memory area 223k is in the immediately preceding holding area It is shifted (S1604). More specifically, the first special symbol or the second special symbol of the data under pending area 1 → variable display, pending area 2 → pending area 1, pending area 3 → pending area 2, pending area 4 → pending area 3, pending The data in each area is shifted in such a manner as area 5 → reserve area 4, reserve area 6 → reserve area 5, reserve area 7 → reserve area 6, reserve area 8 → reserve area 7, and so on.

  The measurement of the variation time of the first special symbol is started using the first variation time storage area 223i (S1605).

  It is judged whether the second fluctuation start flag 223c2 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1606). When it is determined that the second fluctuation start flag 223c2 is not on (that is, off) (S1606: No), the first fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110. Therefore, the process of S1611 is performed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the second fluctuation start flag 223c2 is on (S1606: Yes), the second fluctuation start flag 223c2 is set to be off (S1607).

  In the process of S1506 in the command determination process (FIG. 36, S1414), the variation pattern in the variation display effect of the second special symbol extracted from the second variation pattern command is acquired from the other memory area 223m of the RAM 223, A variation pattern command for display of a special symbol is generated (S1608).

  The variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol set in the process of S1608 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is output by the command output process (S1402) of the main process (FIG. 35, S1400). It is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the display variation pattern command of the second special symbol, a special pattern corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the second special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command Display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbol is performed.

  Here, when the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command of the second special symbol, the variation display mode indicated by the received display variation pattern command is displayed in the right side display area Dm2 of the third symbol display device 81, The second special symbol (the third symbol) is variably displayed (dynamically displayed). With the setting of the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the holding ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set display variation pattern command is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the holding sphere of the second special symbol In accordance with the setting of display), the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223b2 is decremented by 1, and the holding data stored in the follow sort holding memory area 223k is in the immediately preceding holding area It is shifted (S1609). More specifically, the first special symbol or the second special symbol of the data under pending area 1 → variable display, pending area 2 → pending area 1, pending area 3 → pending area 2, pending area 4 → pending area 3, pending The data in each area is shifted in such a manner as area 5 → reserve area 4, reserve area 6 → reserve area 5, reserve area 7 → reserve area 6, reserve area 8 → reserve area 7, and so on.

  Measurement of the variation time of the second special symbol is started using the second variation time storage area 223j (S1610).

  It is determined whether the first stop type selection flag 223d1 or the second stop type selection flag 223d2 is set to ON (S1611). If it is determined that the first stop type selection flag 223d1 and the second stop type selection flag 223d2 are not set to on (that is, off) (S1611: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the first stop type selection flag 223d1 or the second stop type selection flag 223d2 is on (S1611: Yes), if the first stop type selection flag 223d1 is on, If the first stop type selection flag 223d1 is set to off and the second stop type selection flag 223d2 is on, the second stop type selection flag 223d2 is set to off (S1612).

  In the process of S1509 of the command determination process (S1414 in FIG. 36), the stop type extracted from the received first stop type command or the second stop type command is set (S1613). If the set stop type is the stop type of the first special symbol, the display control device 114 in the stop type (15R probability variation hit, 15R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot based on the stop type A first display type stop command for notifying “is there?” Is generated. In addition, when the stop type which is set is the stop type of the 2nd special symbol, in the display control device 114 stop type (15R probability big hit, 15R normal big hit, 2R probability big hit either) based on the stop type ) Is generated (S1614). The first or second stop type command notified from the main control unit 110 is for notifying the jackpot type when the jackpot is reached, and is notified even if the determination result is out of order. . If the determination result is out, the out type is not referred to and the out pattern is set.

  By being configured in this manner, the audio lamp control device 113 can control the display control device 114 so as to change and display both the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time.

  In addition, based on the variation pattern of the first special symbol or the second special symbol being set, a dedicated command for shifting from the main control device 110 by also shifting the data of the follow sort reserving storage area 223k. The control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced without the need to control transmission.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the temporary fluctuation stop process (S1412) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this temporary change stop process (S1412). This temporary fluctuation stop process (FIG. 39, S1412) is a process of the main process (S1400) (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, in the temporary fluctuation stop process (FIG. 39, S1412), one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 is a big hit, and the other variable display is During the jackpot game, processing for temporary stop is executed.

  In temporary fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 39, S1412), first, it is judged if the second fluctuation stop flag 223e is set to ON. If it is determined that the first variation stop flag 223e is set to ON (S1701: Yes), the first variation stop flag 223e is set to OFF (S1702).

  A first display temporary stop command is generated (S1703). The first temporary stop command for display is a command for controlling the display control device 114 so as to temporarily stop the first special symbol being variably displayed by the third symbol display device 81. When setting the first temporary stop command for display, the display control device 114 causes the first special symbol (main symbol in the left, right, and left main symbols) to be slightly shaken and displayed after stopping the variable display of the first special symbol. Then, the player is notified that the variable display is temporarily stopped. In addition, by displaying the characters "the first special symbol is temporarily stopped" in the left display area Dm1 of the third symbol display device 81, it is easier for the player to understand, and it is temporarily assumed that the variable display is stopped. It is configured to notify.

  In this way, the player can recognize that the special symbol in the variable display has been temporarily stopped due to the occurrence of the jackpot, and the lottery in the variable display may disappear or be invalidated. You can play with peace of mind by preventing you from becoming anxious.

  In addition, the display mode of the temporary stop is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, and the first special symbol may be erased from the left side display area Dm, and the character may be notified of temporary stop using only characters. Naturally, other configurations may be adopted.

  When the display first temporary stop command is set, the measurement of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol measured in the subordinate first fluctuation time storage area 223i is interrupted (temporarily stopped).

  By configuring in this way, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol can be accurately managed, and even when the fluctuation display is resumed, the fluctuation display can be accurately performed with the remaining fluctuation time.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the first variation stop flag 223e is not set to on (ie, is off) (S1701: No), is the second variation stop flag 223f set to on? It is determined (S1705). If it is determined that the second variation stop flag 223f is set to ON (S1705: Yes), the second variation stop flag 223f is set to OFF (S1706), and the second temporary stop command for display Are generated (S1707). Similarly to the first display temporary stop command, the second display temporary stop command controls the display control device 114 so that the second special symbol currently displayed in the variable display on the third symbol display device 81 is temporarily stopped in the variable display. Is a command to Similarly to the first special symbol, the second special symbol is also temporarily stopped in the display mode of the temporary stop.

  When the second temporary stop command for display is set, the measurement of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol measured in the second fluctuation time storage area 223j is interrupted (temporarily stopped).

  By configuring in this way, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol can be accurately managed, and even when the fluctuation display is resumed, the fluctuation display can be accurately performed with the remaining fluctuation time.

  It is determined whether the second variation resumption flag 223g is set to ON (S1709). If it is determined that the sub first fluctuation resumption flag 223g is set to on (S1709: Yes), the sub first fluctuation resumption flag 223g is set to off (S1710).

  It is determined whether the measured variation time of the first special symbol stored in the second variation time storage area 223i is 3 seconds or less (S1711). If it is determined that the measured remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol stored in the second fluctuation time storage area 223i is 3 seconds or less (S1711: Yes), the first short fluctuation mode for display A resume command is set (S1712). When this display first short variation mode restart command is set, it is output to the display control device 114. This display first short fluctuation mode restart command displays the characters "Display the lottery result of the fluctuation display which has been temporarily stopped" on the display control device 114 in the left display area Dm1 for the remaining fluctuation time. Then, based on the confirmation command output from the main control unit 110, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the lottery result. In addition, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the character display will change to the characters “I displayed the lottery result of the variable display that had been temporarily stopped!” And will continue to be displayed until the next fluctuation is started .

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the measured variation time of the first special symbol stored in the second variation time storage area 223i is longer than 3 s (S1711: No), the first normal variation mode for display is resumed. A command is set (S1713). When this display first normal variation mode restart command is set, it is output to the display control device 114. This display first normal variation mode restart command displays the characters "temporarily stopped variation display in change!" In the left side display area Dm1 for the remaining variation time, and all of the first special symbols are displayed. After displaying the main symbols (3 symbols on the left, right and left) in a fluctuating manner during the remaining fluctuation time, the first special symbol is displayed with a symbol indicating the lottery result based on the confirmation command output from the main control device 110 Stop display. Next, measurement of the fluctuation time in the first fluctuation time memory area 223i is resumed (S1714).

  By configuring in this manner, the audio lamp control is performed even if main controller 110 does not perform processing for instructing the remaining variation mode to be displayed on third symbol display device 81 according to the remaining variation time. Since the device 113 determines the remaining fluctuation time and selects the remaining fluctuation manner, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  In addition, when the remaining fluctuation time is short, even if the continuation of the interrupted fluctuation mode is displayed, there is a problem that the player may miss it or it may be too short to understand the notification result. However, in the configuration of the pachinko machine 10, when the remaining time is within the reference time (3 s in this embodiment), the notification result is displayed immediately after notifying the player that the lottery result is to be displayed. Therefore, the player can recognize that the notification result which has been interrupted (temporary stop) is displayed.

  Furthermore, even after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, a character notifying that the suspended variable display is stopped and displayed is displayed, so the remaining fluctuation time is very short (for example, within 1s). Also, the player can recognize that the suspended variable display is effective and the determination result is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, even when the remaining fluctuation time is longer than the reference time (3s in the present embodiment), the player is notified of the fact that the notification result being interrupted (temporarily stopped) is being displayed in a fluctuation manner. The person can easily recognize that the suspended variable display was effective without disappearing.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the sub first variation resumption flag 223g is off (S1709: No), it is determined whether the sub second variation resumption flag 223h is set to on (S1715). If it is determined that the sub second variation resumption flag 223h is set to on (S1715: Yes), the sub second variation resumption flag 223g is set to off (S1716).

  It is determined whether the measured remaining fluctuation time of the second special symbol stored in the second variation time storage area 223j is 3 seconds or less (S1717). If it is determined that the remaining measured variation time of the second special symbol stored in the second variation time storage area 223j is 3 seconds or less (S1717: Yes), the second short variation mode for display A resume command is set (S1718). When this display second short variation mode restart command is set, it is output to the display control device 114. The second short fluctuation mode restart command for display displays the characters “Display the lottery result of the temporary display that has been temporarily stopped” on the display control device 114 for the remaining fluctuation time in the right display area Dm 2 Then, based on the confirmation command output from the main control unit 110, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the lottery result. In addition, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the character display will change to the characters "The result of the temporary display of the variable display which has been temporarily stopped!" And will continue to be displayed until the next fluctuation is started. .

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the measured variation time of the second special symbol stored in the second variation time storage area 223j is longer than 3 s (S1717: No), the second normal variation mode for display is resumed. A command is set (S1719). When this display second normal variation mode restart command is set, it is output to the display control device 114. This second normal variation mode restart command for display displays the character "temporarily stopped variation display during variation!" In the right side display area Dm2 during the remaining variation time, and all of the second special symbols are displayed. After displaying the main symbols (3 symbols on the left, right and left) in a fluctuating manner during the remaining fluctuation time, the second special symbol is displayed with a symbol indicating the lottery result based on the confirmation command output from the main control unit 110 Stop display. Next, measurement of the fluctuation time in the second fluctuation time memory area 223j is resumed (S1720). On the other hand, when it is determined that the second variation resumption flag 223h is off (S1715: No), this process ends.

  By configuring in this manner, the audio lamp control is performed even if main controller 110 does not perform processing for instructing the remaining variation mode to be displayed on third symbol display device 81 according to the remaining variation time. Since the device 113 determines the remaining fluctuation time and selects the remaining fluctuation manner, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  In addition, when the remaining fluctuation time is short, even if the continuation of the interrupted fluctuation mode is displayed, there is a problem that the player may miss it or it may be too short to understand the notification result. However, in the configuration of the pachinko machine 10, when the remaining time is within the reference time (3 s in this embodiment), the notification result is displayed immediately after notifying the player that the lottery result is to be displayed. Therefore, the player can recognize that the notification result which has been interrupted (temporary stop) is displayed.

  Furthermore, even after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, a character notifying that the suspended variable display is stopped and displayed is displayed, so the remaining fluctuation time is very short (for example, within 1s). Also, the player can recognize that the suspended variable display is effective and the determination result is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, even when the remaining fluctuation time is longer than the reference time (3s in the present embodiment), the player is notified of the fact that the notification result being interrupted (temporarily stopped) is being displayed in a fluctuation manner. The person can easily recognize that the suspended variable display was effective without disappearing.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been suspended is resumed, the character is informed of that to the character, but the present invention is not particularly limited thereto. Of course, it may be configured to notify by a lamp or the like. In addition, as shown in the display mode that shows that the player has resumed (for example, displayed as an animation notifying that the variable display has been resumed by the character etc.), the suspended change Of course, notification may be made in a display mode dedicated to the resumption of display. By doing this, the player can correctly recognize that the suspended variable display has been resumed.

  In the present embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to select the variation pattern in accordance with the remaining variation time. Not limited to this, when main controller 110 resumes the temporarily stopped fluctuation table time, the remaining fluctuation time causes the same fluctuation time fluctuation pattern or a fluctuation time slightly shorter than the remaining fluctuation time. The variation pattern may be configured to be selected. When a variation pattern with a slightly shorter variation time is selected, the voice lamp control device 113 is controlled to delay the difference between the variation pattern of the remaining variation time and the variation pattern of the slightly short variation time and cause the variation table time to occur. The variation table of the first special symbol or the second special symbol can be performed according to the remaining variation time.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the suspension rearrangement process (S1413) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing this pending reordering process (S1413). This hold rearrangement process (S1413 in FIG. 40) is one of main processes (S1400) (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, in the hold rearrangement process (FIG. 40, S1413), when the player operates the frame button 22 in the effective period, the hold symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the order of establishment of the hold A process of setting the display to be rearranged in the variable display start order is executed.

  In the pending reordering process (S1413 in FIG. 40), it is first determined whether it is a reorderable period (S1801). In the sortable period, gaming states other than the state with no hold established in the big hit game or different starting ports 63a and 63b (the state in which there is not one or more hold of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively) are arranged The exchangeable period is set.

  If it is determined that it is a sortable period (S1801: Yes), a display button operation display command is generated (S1802). When the display control device 114 receives this display button operation display command, the third symbol display device 81 displays the character "May be reorderable!" And the player can press the frame button 22. Informing a period that is The notification mode is not limited to this, and may be performed by voice or the like, or may be controlled to light a dedicated lamp or the like.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, by providing the sortable period, the player can easily recognize the timing at which the sort operation can be performed, and the frame switch 22 can be operated at an appropriate timing. it can. In addition, as long as the rearrangement possible period is not particularly provided, and the rearrangement is possible when the frame button 22 is pressed, the arrangement display may be naturally performed.

  It is determined whether the frame button 22 is operated (S1803). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is operated (S1803: Yes), the reordering flag 223k7 of all the pending areas in which the pending data of the follow reorder pending storage area 223k is stored is set to on. (S1804).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the reordering period is not reached (S1801: No) and when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not operated (S1803: No), this process is ended.

  By this configuration, when the player wants to rearrange, it is possible to rearrange only the reserved symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The player can know the actual variable display start order, and can know in advance the special symbol to be focused next (the special symbol to be the variable display start). Therefore, it is possible to play the game while assuming the display area to be viewed in advance, and to play the game smoothly.

  Further, in the configuration of the pachinko machine, since the distribution ball 630 is configured to easily win the game ball alternately by the distribution device 630, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured. The game is played evenly and the game can be played efficiently.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, sorting of the holding symbol is performed as a configuration to be executed based on the player operating the frame button 22, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and is executed whenever a new holding is stored. Naturally, it may be configured as well. By configuring in this manner, the player can always correctly recognize the fluctuation display start order by the holding symbols rearranged in the fluctuation start order.

  In this embodiment, the sortable period is other than a state in which there is no hold established in the jackpot game or different starting ports 63a and 63b (state in which there is no hold of one or more first special symbols and second special symbols). The game state has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be set as a sortable period even during a jackpot game, or conversely, a period in which a specific variable display mode is displayed It may be set to other than, etc., and may be determined as appropriate.

  When the jackpot game is set to a sortable period, it is necessary to sort in consideration of the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display temporarily stopped in the fluctuation display. Specifically, the fluctuation start time is calculated based on the determined fluctuation time (variation display mode) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol being suspended and the remaining fluctuation time during temporary stop. Then, the sorting order is determined, and sorting is performed based on the sorting order. By configuring in this way, even if a new hold display mode is displayed during the jackpot game, the hold display mode is combined with the display mode already displayed before the hold display mode is displayed. The sorting can be performed in the correct fluctuation start order, and the player can be notified of the correct fluctuation start order even in the jackpot gaming machine.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the reordering storage area 203u of the main control device 110 and the secondary reordering storage area 223k of the audio lamp control device 113 are configured to store data in which the reordering is performed mutually. Not only that, the main control device 110 is configured to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of various data (relevant judgment result, jackpot type, fluctuation pattern type, etc.) necessary for sorting by a prize command, Reordering may be performed only by the audio lamp control device 113.

  By configuring in this manner, even when a power failure occurs, main controller 110 backs up various data necessary for sorting in RAM 203, and when power is restored, the various processes in startup processing (FIG. 32) are performed. By outputting the data to the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113 can easily perform recovery from the power failure by performing sorting based on the various data.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol or the first reserved due to the remaining variation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol during the variation start and the variation pattern type of the data stored in the reordering storage area 203u 2 The variation start time of the special symbol was calculated to calculate the variation start order. Not only that, at the time of game ball winning, it decides information (time information) whether it is the fluctuation aspect longer than fixed time by deciding whether it is the fluctuation aspect which becomes reach or not, the time information and fluctuation The fluctuation start order may be roughly determined and rearranged from the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. By configuring in this way, it is determined whether or not it is a fluctuation mode that will be a reach at the time of winning (whether it is a long time fluctuation mode or a short time fluctuation mode), and the accurate fluctuation time (fluctuation mode) is Even with the pachinko machine 10 determined based on information such as the number of balls held at the start of fluctuation, it is possible to inform the player of a rough fluctuation start order.

  Therefore, the player may not be in the correct order of starting the change, but the fact that the sorting has been performed is included in the one in which the long-time fluctuation mode (the fluctuation mode to become reach) is suspended. Can play games with the expectation of a jackpot.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the slot machine and the game machine of the present invention, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment will be shown.

  Success or failure judgment means that executes the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment conditions, and executes the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment conditions First display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating the result of determination of success or failure of the first lottery game by means, in the order in which the first condition for acceptance judgment is satisfied, and second lottery game of the condition for success Second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating the result of the determination whether the second determination result is satisfied or not, and the first identification means for the first display means Display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of information on the second display means respectively, and a result of the pass / fail judgment by the pass / fail judgment means becomes a hit, and the display control means causes the first or second display means First or second identification In a gaming machine having a bonus game execution means for granting a bonus game which is advantageous to a player when information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, based on the establishment of the first success or failure determination condition. The second identification information corresponding to the satisfaction / decision condition that is satisfied is determined based on the establishment of the second validity / decision unit, which determines the dynamic display mode related to the time information of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfaction / decision condition that is satisfied. Dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode related to time information of the first and second identifications corresponding to the established success or failure determination conditions when the first or second The dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means and the fulfillment order of the qualification conditions combining the first and the second qualification conditions established until the dynamic display of the information is started. Information about The first information for each suspension information is distinguished while the suspension information storage means for storing the suspension information having at least the suspension information of the first pass / fail judgment condition and the second pass / fail judgment condition stored in the suspension information storage means Hold display means displayed in the distinguishable hold display mode, and the first or second success or failure judgment conditions are satisfied, the fulfillment order of the success or failure judgment conditions combining the success or failure judgment condition and the second success or failure judgment condition When new hold information is stored, it is based on the remaining dynamic display time of the first or second identification information in the dynamic display and the dynamic display mode for each hold information previously stored. Dynamic display start time information determining means for determining time information until the first or second identification information corresponding to new hold information becomes dynamic display start, and storing the information in the hold information storage means; That a predetermined condition is established Triggered by the dynamic display start time information determination unit, based on each dynamic display start time information stored in the hold information storage unit, the dynamic display mode displayed on the hold display unit, the dynamic display A game machine A1 comprising: rearranging means for rearranging in an order to start the game.

  According to the gaming machine A1, based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Further, based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. The dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first success or failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the success or failure judgment result of the second lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second success / failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Here, the first identification information is a first display means, and the second identification information is a second display means, and can be dynamically displayed by the display control means. And, when the result of judgment of success or failure by the success or failure judgment means becomes a hit and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing a hit by the display control means, a bonus game which is advantageous to the player is executed. It is carried out by means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. The dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode related to the time information of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied yes-no determination condition based on the establishment of the first yes-no decision condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second success or failure determination condition, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode related to the time information of the second identification information corresponding to the established success or failure determination condition. When the first or second identification information corresponding to the satisfied qualification condition is started when dynamic display is started when the first or second qualification condition is satisfied, the first propriety determination condition and the first 2 Hold information having at least the establishment order of the success / failure determination conditions including the success / failure determination conditions and the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit is stored in the hold information storage unit. Success or failure of the combination of the first pass / fail judgment condition and the second pass / fail judgment condition for each hold information while distinguishing the hold information of the first pass / fail judgment condition and the second pass / fail judgment condition stored in the hold information storage means. The establishment order of the determination conditions is performed by the suspension display means as the display of the distinguishable suspension display mode. When the first or second validity determination condition is satisfied and new hold information is stored, the remaining dynamic display time of the first or second identification information during dynamic display is stored first Based on the dynamic display mode for each hold information, the time information until the first or second identification information corresponding to the new hold information becomes the dynamic display start is determined by the dynamic display start time information determination means And stored in the pending information storage means. Then, when the predetermined condition is established, the hold displayed on the hold display unit is based on each dynamic display start time information stored in the hold information storage unit by the dynamic display start time determination unit. The display mode is rearranged by the rearrangement means in the order of starting the dynamic display. Thereby, for example, the hold information of the second lottery game is newly stored in a state where the hold information of the first lottery game is stored first. At this time, when the remaining dynamic display time of the first identification information in the dynamic display is longer than the remaining dynamic display time of the second identification information in the dynamic display, a newly stored second lottery game The start time of the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the hold information of 1 is more than the start time of the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the hold information of the first lottery game stored earlier It gets faster. However, since the hold display mode is sequentially displayed in the hold display mode indicating the order in which the success or failure judgment condition obtained by combining the first success / failure judgment condition and the second success / failure judgment condition is satisfied, the first lottery stored earlier The hold display mode of the newly stored second lottery game is displayed in the hold display mode indicating the order after the game hold information. Then, there may be a case where the actual start order of the dynamic display and the establishment order of the pass / fail judgment conditions differ, but when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the sorting means changes the actual dynamic display Sorted and displayed in the start order. Therefore, the player can also dynamically start displaying the first identification information or the second identification information in the order different from the order in which the actual success or failure judgment conditions are established. Since the hold display mode is rearranged, confusion of the player can be suppressed.

  A gaming machine A2 characterized in that it has condition distributing means for assisting that the first and second judgment conditions are met alternately in the gaming machine A1.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exerted. That is, it is assisted by the distributing means that the first and second judgment conditions are satisfied alternately. As a result, the first success or failure judgment condition and the second success or failure judgment condition are easily met equally, and by efficiently executing the first lottery game and the second lottery game, more games can be performed in a shorter time. It can be carried out.

  In the gaming machine of the gaming machine A1 or A2, when the first or second judgment condition is newly established and the hold information is stored in the hold information storage means, the sorting means holds the hold information The first or second information corresponding to the newly established holding information and the previously stored holding information, based on the dynamic display start time information corresponding to each holding information previously stored in the storage means. A game machine A3 characterized in that a dynamic display start order of identification information is determined, and the order is related to hold information and stored in the hold information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the first or second validity determination condition is newly established and the hold information is stored in the hold information storage means, the dynamic corresponding to each hold information previously stored in the hold information storage means Based on the display start time information, the dynamic display start order of the first or second identification information corresponding to the newly stored hold information and the previously stored hold information is determined, and the order is each hold It is stored in the hold information storage means by the sorting means in association with the information. Thus, the dynamic display start order is updated each time the first or second validity determination condition is satisfied and the hold information is stored. Therefore, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the hold display mode can be rearranged based on the updated dynamic display start order. Therefore, even when there is a change in the dynamic display start order, it becomes possible to rearrange the hold display mode in the corresponding dynamic display start order, and the player is notified of the correct dynamic display start order. Can.

  The game machine according to any one of the game machines A1 to A3 has operation means operable by the player, and the sorting means satisfies the predetermined condition when the operation means is operated. A game machine A4 characterized in that the hold display mode is rearranged.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are exerted. That is, the player has operation means operable by the player, and the rearrangement means rearranges the hold display mode on condition that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the operation means is operated. A game machine A4 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the operation means operable by the player is operated, the hold display mode is rearranged by the rearrangement means on the assumption that the predetermined condition is satisfied. Thus, it is possible to rearrange the hold display mode at the timing intended by the player, and to notify the player of the correct dynamic display start order at the timing when the player wants to know the correct dynamic display start order. Can.

  In the gaming machine of any one of gaming machines A1 to A4, the sorting means determines that the predetermined condition is established when the first or second success or failure judgment condition is newly established, the hold display A game machine A5 characterized in that the hold display mode displayed on the means is rearranged.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the first or second validity determination condition is newly satisfied, the hold display mode displayed on the hold display unit is rearranged by the rearrangement unit on the assumption that the predetermined condition is satisfied. As a result, when the new hold display mode is displayed, the hold display mode is rearranged, so that the player can know the correct dynamic display start order.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A5, in the special gaming state in which the first lottery game and the second lottery game, which are executed after the bonus game executing means execute the bonus game, are likely to be hit than the normal time The lottery information for drawing whether or not to shift is acquired based on the establishment of the first or second yes / no decision condition, the first or second yes / no decision condition is established, and the decision condition established And storing the lottery information in the suspension information storage unit in association with the suspension information, and storing the reservation information in the suspension information storage unit, the acceptance / rejection determination unit including the suspension information storage unit Until the dynamic display start of the first or second identification information corresponding to each of the hold information stored in the memory based on the dynamic display start time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means , It is determined by the game state lottery means whether the game state of the dynamic display start time information corresponding to the hold information is the special game state, and a preliminary determination is performed to determine in advance whether the acceptance or rejection is performed, the results are each hold In the case where the first or second identification information corresponding to each hold information stored in the hold information storage means becomes dynamically displayable while being stored in the hold information storage means in association with the information The decision is made formally based on the gaming state when the variation start becomes possible, and the dynamic display mode determination means corresponds to the hold information stored in the hold information storage means. Until the first or second identification information becomes able to start dynamic display, the success or failure judgment means determines the dynamic display mode based on the judgment result of the prior judgment stored in the hold information storage means, Retention When the first or second identification information corresponding to the pending information stored in the information storage means can start dynamic display, the dynamic display is performed based on the determination result of the pass / fail determination means executed in that case. A game machine B1 characterized by determining an aspect.

  According to the gaming machine B1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the following effects are exerted. That is, in order to make a lottery whether or not to shift to a special gaming state in which the first lottery game and the second lottery game, which are executed after the bonus game executing means execute the bonus game, are more likely to win than normal. The lottery information of is acquired by the gaming state lottery means based on the establishment of the first or second success or failure judgment condition. In addition, when the first or second success or failure judgment condition is satisfied, and the hold information corresponding to the satisfied judgment condition is stored, the lottery information is held by the gaming state lottery means in relation to the hold information. It is stored in the information storage means. Until the first or second identification information corresponding to each hold information stored in the hold information storage means becomes able to start dynamic display, based on the dynamic display start time decided by the dynamic display start time decision means It is judged by the game state lottery means whether the game state at the time of the dynamic display start corresponding to each hold information is the special game state, and the pre-judgment to perform the presumptive judgment in advance is executed by the pass / fail judgment means. Then, the result is stored in the hold storage means by the pass / fail judgment means in association with each hold information. On the other hand, when the first or second identification information corresponding to each hold information stored in the hold information storage means can start dynamic display, the pass / fail judgment based on the gaming state in that case is judged to be a pass / fail. Officially implemented by means. Until the first or second identification information corresponding to the pending information stored in the pending information storage means can start dynamic display, based on the determination result of the prior determination by the pass / fail decision means stored in the pending information storage means The dynamic display time is determined. On the other hand, when the first or second identification information corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold information storage means can start dynamic display, based on the judgment result of the pass / fail judgment means executed in that case. The dynamic display time is determined by the dynamic display time determination means. As a result, even if the hold information is newly stored and the dynamic display start order is changed, the gaming state at the start of the dynamic display is judged based on the correct dynamic display start order, and the propriety determination is performed. . Therefore, the dynamic display time can be determined in advance based on the correct validity determination result, and it is possible to determine the correct dynamic display start order also when a new success or failure determination condition is satisfied next.

  Success or failure judgment means that executes the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment conditions, and executes the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment conditions First display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating the result of determination of success or failure of the first lottery game by means, in the order in which the first condition for acceptance judgment is satisfied, and second lottery game of the condition for success Second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating the result of the determination whether the second determination result is satisfied or not, and the first identification means for the first display means Display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of information on the second display means respectively, and a result of the pass / fail judgment by the pass / fail judgment means becomes a hit, and the display control means causes the first or second display means First or second identification In the gaming machine having a bonus game execution means for providing a bonus game which is advantageous to the player when the information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, the first success / failure determination condition and the second success / failure condition The first or the first upper limit number of times up to a predetermined upper limit number of times when the first or second success or failure judgment condition is satisfied, which is assisted by the condition distributing unit assisting the establishment of the judgment condition alternately and the condition distribution unit [2] A game machine C1 having a reserve storage means for storing a right to play a lottery game.

  According to the gaming machine C1, based on the establishment of the first success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Further, based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. The dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first success or failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the success or failure judgment result of the second lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second success / failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Here, the first identification information is a first display means, and the second identification information is a second display means, and can be dynamically displayed by the display control means. And, when the result of judgment of success or failure by the success or failure judgment means becomes a hit and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing a hit by the display control means, a bonus game which is advantageous to the player is executed. It is carried out by means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. It is assisted by the condition distributing means that the first and second judgment conditions are satisfied alternately. The right to perform the first or second lottery game up to a predetermined upper limit number is stored by the hold storage means when the first or second validity determination conditions are satisfied, assisted by the condition distribution means. As a result, the first success or failure judgment condition and the second success or failure judgment condition are easily met equally, and the right to play the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be stored uniformly, and the first lottery game is played. It is possible to prevent any one of the right and the right to play the second lottery game from being biased and being stored earlier up to the upper limit number. Therefore, to store the right to perform the first lottery game and the second lottery game up to the upper limit number respectively, it is possible to suppress the problem that the right more than the upper limit number is generated in either one and becomes invalid. it can.

  In the gaming machine of the gaming machine C1, when the gaming area and the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area enter, the first starting opening, which satisfies the first success or failure judgment condition, and the game flowing down the gaming area The ball has a second start-up opening where the second hit / fail determination condition is satisfied when the ball enters the ball, and the condition distributing means has game balls at the first start-up opening and the second start-up opening. A game machine C2 characterized by having a game ball guiding portion for assisting in entering alternately.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the gaming machine C1, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the game ball flowing down the game area enters the first starting opening, the first hit determination condition is satisfied, while when the game ball enters the second starting opening, the second hit determination condition is satisfied. Ru. It is assisted by the game ball guiding portion of the condition distributing means that the game balls alternately enter the first starting opening and the second starting opening. As a result, the player can easily cause the game ball to alternately enter the first starting port and the second starting port by causing the game ball to flow down to the game area, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game Can be performed efficiently, so that many lottery games can be performed in a shorter time.

  In the gaming machine of gaming machine C2, when the first or second judgment condition is newly established and the hold information is stored in the hold information storage means, the sorting means holds the hold information storage means Of the first or second identification information corresponding to the newly established holding information and the previously stored holding information, based on the dynamic display start time corresponding to each holding information previously stored in A game machine C3 characterized in that a dynamic display start order is determined, and the order is stored in the hold information storage means in association with the hold information.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the gaming machine C2, the following effects are exerted. That is, the gaming ball entered from the entrance of the condition distributing means is rotated by a predetermined angle in the first direction to the first starting opening through the first guiding path to the gaming ball by the gaming ball guiding portion After being guided, the game ball entered from the ball entry next is received while being rotated to a predetermined angle in the first direction, and is rotated at a predetermined angle in a second direction opposite to the first direction. The gaming ball is guided by the gaming ball guiding portion to the second starting opening through the second guiding path. Thereby, it becomes possible to distribute and guide game balls alternately to the first starting opening and the second starting opening using a common member, and a member for distributing to the first starting opening and the second starting opening respectively As compared with the case where is provided, the structure for distributing the game balls can be made compact.

  In the gaming machine of gaming machine C3, the gaming ball guiding portion of the condition distributing means is disposed at a position facing the gaming ball having entered the ball entrance while being rotated to the predetermined angle in the first direction. And the ball enters the ball entrance when the game machine ball receives the ball and enters the second direction, and the first passive part rotates to the predetermined angle, and the second direction rotates to the predetermined angle. A second passive unit is disposed at a position facing the gaming ball, receives the gaming ball having entered the ball, and rotates to a predetermined angle, and the gaming ball received by the first passive unit from the ball entry port is received Prevents the game ball from rotating in the first direction before the game ball enters the ball entry port after the game machine rotates in the second direction, or the second passive part enters the ball After receiving the game ball entered from the mouth and rotating it in the first direction, before the game ball enters the ball entry port next time Gaming machine C4, characterized in that a, a rotation restricting portion which prevents the pivoting in the second direction.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the gaming machine C3, the following effects are exerted. That is, the first passive portion of the gaming ball guiding portion is disposed at a position facing the gaming ball having entered the ball entrance with the gaming ball guiding portion of the condition distributing means being rotated to a predetermined angle in the first direction. When the first passive portion receives the entered game ball, it is rotated in the second direction to a predetermined angle. Further, the second passive part of the gaming ball guiding part is disposed at a position facing the gaming ball having entered the ball entrance with the gaming ball guiding part of the condition distributing means being rotated to a predetermined angle in the second direction. When the second passive portion receives the entered game ball, the game ball is rotated in the first direction to a predetermined angle. After the first passive part receives the game ball entered from the ball entrance and rotates in the second direction, it may then rotate in the first direction before the game ball enters the ball entrance. Or, after the second passive part receives the game ball having entered the ball from the ball entrance and is rotated in the first direction, it is then rotated in the second direction before the game ball enters the ball inlet. This is prevented by the rotation restricting portion. Thus, after the gaming ball guiding portion is rotated to guide the gaming ball to one of the guiding paths, the next gaming ball is rotated in the other direction before entering the ball, and then the ball is entered next. A game ball can also be prevented from having a problem that it is guided to the same route as the game ball entered in front of the game ball. Therefore, it becomes possible to guide the game ball entering the ball entrance to the first starting opening and the second starting opening more accurately alternately, and the right to carry out the first lottery game and the second lottery game is equalized. Can be stored.

  The gaming machine of the gaming machine C1 has a gaming area and a common starting opening which establishes the first or second pass / fail judgment condition when a game ball flowing down the gaming area enters the ball, The condition distributing means is characterized in that the first success or failure judgment condition and the second success or failure judgment condition are satisfied alternately in a controlled manner every time the game ball enters the common starting opening. Machine C5.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the gaming machine C1, the following effects are exerted. That is, each time the game ball flowing down the game area enters the common starting opening, establishment of the first and second judgment conditions is alternately distributed by the condition distributing means in a controlled manner. Thereby, the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be alternately performed with the common starting opening, and the gaming area can be configured compactly.

  In the gaming machine A1 to A5 or B1, after the execution of sorting display of the hold display mode on the hold display means by the sorting means, the first or second success or failure judgment condition is newly established. In this case, with the display order of the displayed pending display modes being rearranged, the pending display mode indicating the newly established first or second success or failure judgment condition is in the order in which the pending display modes are established. A game machine D1 characterized by being displayed on a display means.

  According to the gaming machine D1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5 and B1, the following effects are exerted. That is, after the execution of the rearrangement display of the suspension display mode by the suspension display means by the rearrangement means, when the first or second success or failure judgment condition is satisfied, the display order of the suspension display mode displayed in rearrangement is maintained In the hold state, the hold display mode indicating the newly established first or second pass / fail judgment condition is displayed on the hold display means in the order of the hold. As a result, even when the first or second validity determination condition is satisfied and the corresponding hold display mode is displayed after the execution of the sort display, the display order of the hold display modes displayed in the rear view is maintained. Thus, the player can correctly recognize the order of starting the dynamic display at the time of sorting. Therefore, the player must identify whether the display mode in which the sorting has been performed or the display mode in which the sorting is not performed is performed before or after the timing in which the display mode is displayed is before or after the sorting is performed. Can. Therefore, it can be easily recognized which order the hold display mode indicates.

  In the gaming machine of the gaming machine D1, the sorting display is performed in a state where the pending display mode in which the sorting display has been performed and the pending display mode in which the sorting display is not performed are mixedly displayed on the pending display means. When a predetermined condition which becomes an execution trigger of the means is newly established, the sorting means sorts all the pending display modes displayed on the pending display means in the order of starting the dynamic display. A game machine D2 characterized by being a game machine.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exerted. That is, in a state in which the pending display mode in which the sorting display has been performed and the pending display mode not yet executed are mixedly displayed on the pending display means, a predetermined condition that triggers the execution of the sorting means is newly added. If the condition is satisfied, all the pending display modes displayed on the pending display means are rearranged by the sorting means in the order of starting the dynamic display. As a result, even if the pending display modes of the reordering execution and the reordering non-execution are mixedly displayed, the reordering is executed again to arrange the order of starting the accurate dynamic display, It can be identified by the pending display mode after execution of replacement.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, the on-hold information storage means determines the on / off status by the on / off determination means based on the establishment of the first or second on / off determination condition. A normal hold storage area in which normal hold information including at least the decision information for use and the dynamic display determination information used for determining the dynamic display mode by the dynamic display mode determination means is stored, and the normal hold storage area Before the first or second identification information corresponding to the stored normal holding information can be displayed dynamically, based on the normal holding information, the result of the judgment of the appropriateness by the judgment unit and the determination of the dynamic display mode are made in advance Means for determining the dynamic display mode by the means and the dynamic display start time information by the dynamic display start time information determining means, and storing as sorting information Storage area, and when the first or second validity determination condition is newly established, based on the dynamic display start time information corresponding to each sorting information stored ahead of the sorting pending storage area. The first or second identification information corresponding to the normal hold information stored in the normal hold storage area newly established and the normal hold information previously stored in the normal hold storage area. A game machine E1 comprising: rearrangement order determination means for determining the order in which the dynamic display is started and storing the order in the rearrangement storage area.

  According to the gaming machine E1, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine described in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, the following effects are exerted. That is, based on the establishment of the first or second propriety determination condition, the normal suspension information having at least the propriety determination information used for the propriety determination and the dynamic display determination information used for determining the dynamic display mode is the suspension information storage It is stored in the normal storage area of the means. Before the first or second identification information corresponding to the normal hold information stored in the normal hold storage area can be dynamically displayed, a result of determination of success or failure and a dynamic display mode are made in advance based on the normal hold information. Dynamic display start time information is determined and stored as sorting information in the sorting storage area of the storage information storage means. When the first or second validity determination condition is newly established, the condition is newly established based on the dynamic display start time information corresponding to each sorting information stored ahead of the sorting pending storage area, and the normal holding is performed. Determining the order in which the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the normal hold information stored in the memory area and the normal hold information previously stored in the normal memory area is started, The order is stored in the rearrangement reserve storage area by the rearrangement order determining means. This makes it possible to separately process the data for performing the lottery game and the data for determining the rearrangement order, and to facilitate the process of determining the rearrangement order. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the processing for executing the rearrangement and the like, and it is possible to facilitate the development of the gaming machine.

  The gaming machine of the gaming machine E1 includes main control means for executing main control of the game and slave control means for executing game control according to a slave control signal output by the master control means, the main control The means has the pending information storage means, the sorting information is stored in the sorting pending storage area of the pending information storage means, and the sorting order is determined by the sorting order determining means based on the sorting information. Each time it is determined, a winning signal indicating each sorting order stored in the sorting reserve storage area is output to the slave control means, and the slave control means indicates the winning signal based on the winning signal. According to the secondary suspension information storage means having secondary secondary storage area in which each secondary sort order is stored, and the secondary display mode rearrangement based on the primary sequence stored in the secondary secondary storage area. Gaming machine E2, characterized in that it has a, and the rearrangement unit that row.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the control of the game is executed by the sub control means in accordance with the sub control signal from the main control means which executes the main control of the game. Reordering information is stored in the reordering storage area of the main control means, and stored in the reordering storage area every time the reordering order is determined by the reordering order determining means based on the reordering information. A winning signal indicating each sort order is output by the main control means to the secondary control means. Further, in the secondary control means, the respective rearranging orders indicated by the winning signal are stored in the secondary rearrangement hold storage area of the secondary hold information storage means. Then, based on the sorting order stored in the secondary sorting reserve storage area, the sorting of the reserve display mode is executed by the sorting means of the secondary control means. As a result, the main control means does not have to perform processing to rearrange the hold display mode even if a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the control load of the main control means can be reduced.

  The gaming machine of the gaming machine E1 includes main control means for executing main control of the game and slave control means for executing game control according to a slave control signal output by the master control means, the main control The means has the pending information storage means, and indicates each of the sorting information stored in the sorting pending storage area every time the sorting information is stored in the sorting pending storage area of the pending information storage means. A prize signal is output to the slave control means, and the slave control means includes a slave sort information storage means having a slave sort storage area in which each sort of sorting information indicated by the winning signal is stored based on the prize signal. And determining the sorting order based on the dynamic display start time in each sorting information of the secondary sorting reserve storage area, and storing the secondary sorting reserve storage area in the secondary sorting reserve storage area; ,Previous Gaming machine E3 based on the sort order stored in the slave rearrangement reserved memory area, and having a said rearrangement means for performing the rearrangement of the hold display mode.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the control of the game is executed by the sub control means in accordance with the sub control signal from the main control means which executes the main control of the game. Every time the sorting information is stored in the sorting storage area of the main control means, a winning signal indicating each sorting information stored in the sorting storage area is outputted by the main control means to the secondary control means. Further, in the secondary control means, the respective rearrangement information indicated by the winning signal is stored in the secondary rearrangement hold storage area of the secondary hold information storage means. Then, the sorting order is determined based on the dynamic display start time in the sorting information stored in the secondary sorting reserve storage area, and the secondary sorting reserve storage area according to the sorting order determination means of the control means It is memorized. Reordering of the hold display mode is executed by the reordering means of the sub control means based on the stored reordering order. As a result, the main control means does not have to determine the rearrangement order, and the secondary control means can determine the rearrangement order based on the winning signal, so that the control load on the main control means can be reduced. . Therefore, the reordering of the hold display mode can be executed with the control load of the main control means suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, or E1 to E3, the on-hold information storage unit determines the on-off state based on the establishment of the first or second on-off determination condition. Stored in a normal hold storage area in which the pass / fail judgment information used for the pass / fail judgment by the means and the dynamic display decision information used in the determination of the dynamic display mode by the dynamic display mode decision means Before the first or second identification information corresponding to each information can be displayed dynamically, based on the respective information in advance, the result of A reordering storage area in which a dynamic display mode and dynamic display start time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means are determined and stored as reordering information; When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the means stores the reordering valid information in the reordering pending storage area for each pending display mode displayed at that time, and the reordering pending storage area A gaming machine F1 for performing sorting of the hold display mode displayed on the hold display means based on each sort of sorting information.

  According to the gaming machine F1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, or E1 to E3, the following effects are exerted. That is, based on the establishment of the first or second success or failure judgment condition, the normality holding storage area of the holding information storage means is the success / failure determination information used for the success / failure determination and the dynamic display determination information used for determining the dynamic display mode. Is stored in Before the first or second identification information corresponding to each information stored in the normal storage area can be displayed dynamically, based on the respective information, a result of determination of success or failure and a dynamic display mode and a motion are made in advance. The target display start time information is determined and stored as sorting information in the sorting holding storage area of the holding information storage means. When a predetermined condition is satisfied, the reordering means stores the reordering effective information in the reordering pending storage area for each pending display mode displayed at that time, and the respective reordering pending storage areas Based on the sorting information, sorting of the hold display mode displayed on the hold display unit is performed. Therefore, the hold display mode displayed when the predetermined condition is established can be accurately rearranged in the order of starting the dynamic display.

  In the gaming machine of the gaming machine F1, the sorting means repeatedly updates and displays the hold display mode displayed on the hold display means for each predetermined update opportunity, and holds the hold display means to the hold display means. With regard to the display mode of the display mode, the hold display mode of the rearrangement hold storage area in which the rearrangement effective information is stored is rearranged and displayed in the order of starting the dynamic display, while the rearrangement effective information is stored. A gaming machine F2 characterized in that the pending display mode of the sorting pending storage area not being displayed is displayed in the order in which the first or second pass / fail determination condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine F1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the gaming machine F1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the hold display mode displayed on the hold display means is repeatedly updated every predetermined update opportunity and displayed by the sorting means. The pending display mode of the sorting pending display area in which the sorting valid information is stored is sorted by the order in which the dynamic display is started and displayed by the sorting means. On the other hand, the pending display mode in which the sorting effective information is not stored is displayed by the sorting means in the order in which the first or second yes / no decision condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to maintain and display the pending display mode in which the sorting is performed, in the order in which the dynamic display starts accurately. Therefore, it is possible to divide and display the pending display mode which has not been sorted and has not been sorted, and even if a new pending display mode is displayed after the sorting is executed, the dynamic of the pending display mode which has already been sorted The player can easily recognize the order in which the display is started.

  In the gaming machine A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, or E1 to E3, F1 or F2, the first lottery game and the second lottery are executed after the bonus game executing means executes the bonus game The lottery information for lottery whether or not to make a transition to a special gaming state in which the success or failure judgment with the game is likely to be hit is obtained on the basis of the establishment of the first or second success / failure judgment condition When storing the hold information corresponding to the 1st or 2nd success or failure judgment condition satisfied and the satisfied or not judgment condition satisfied, the game in which the lottery information is stored in the hold information storage means in relation to the held information The dynamic display start time information includes state lottery means, and when the first or second yes / no decision condition is newly established and the hold information is stored in the hold information storage means The game when it becomes possible to start the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the newly stored suspension information based on the dynamic display start time information determined by the deciding means The game state lottery means determines whether the state is the special game state, performs pre-judgment to make a pass / fail judgment in advance, stores the result in the hold information storage means, and the result of the pass / fail judgment is If it is a touch to shift to the special game state, and the order in which the dynamic display corresponding to the newly stored hold information is earlier than the hold information previously stored, the newly stored With respect to the hold information which becomes an order after the order to become the dynamic display start corresponding to the held information, whether the game state when starting the dynamic display is the special game state again, The game state lottery means Each of the determinations is performed to execute in advance a preliminary determination to perform a yes or no decision, and the result is stored in the suspension information storage unit, and the dynamic display mode determination unit is the suspension information storage unit Until the first or second identification information corresponding to the suspension information stored in the memory can be dynamically displayed, the acceptance determination unit determines whether or not new suspension information is stored in the suspension information storage unit. The dynamic display mode is determined in advance based on the determination result of the prior determination stored in the suspension information storage unit and stored in the suspension information storage unit while the suspension information stored in the suspension information storage unit is stored. When the first or second identification information corresponding to the information becomes able to start dynamic display, the dynamic display mode is determined based on the determination result of the propriety determination means executed in that case. To A game machine G1 to be characterized.

  According to the gaming machine G1, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2, the following effects are exerted. That is, in order to make a lottery whether or not to shift to a special gaming state in which the first lottery game and the second lottery game, which are executed after the bonus game executing means execute the bonus game, are more likely to win than normal. The lottery information of is selected by the gaming state lottery means based on the establishment of the first or second success / failure determination condition. Further, when the first or second success or failure judgment condition is satisfied, and the hold information corresponding to the satisfied or not judgment condition is stored, the lottery result is held by the gaming state lottery means in relation to the hold information. It is stored in the information storage means. When the first or second validity determination condition is newly established and the hold information is stored in the hold information storage means, based on the dynamic display start time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determination means The game state lottery means determines whether the game state when the first or second identification information corresponding to the newly stored hold information is able to start dynamic display is the special game state, in advance The pre-judging to make a pass / fail decision is executed by the pass / fail decision means, and the result is stored in the pending information storage means. Then, if the result is the transition to the special game state, and the order in which the dynamic display corresponding to the newly stored hold information is earlier than the hold information previously stored, then The game state lottery means respectively determines whether or not the game state when starting the dynamic display is the special game state again with respect to the hold information which becomes the order of, and the prior judgment to make a pass / fail judgment in advance is success or failure It is executed by the determination means, and the result is stored in the pending information storage means. Until new display information is stored in the suspension information storage unit, until the first or second identification information corresponding to the suspension information stored in the suspension information storage unit becomes capable of dynamic display start, The dynamic display mode is determined in advance by the dynamic display mode determination unit based on the determination result, and is stored in the hold information storage unit. On the other hand, when the first or second identification information corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold information storage means can start dynamic display, based on the judgment result of the pass / fail judgment means executed in that case. The dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. As a result, the hold information is newly stored, and the order of starting the dynamic display is changed, and even if the hold determination result of the hold information stored earlier is changed, the hold determination result is used. It can be re-judged in advance as appropriate. Therefore, the dynamic display mode can be determined again based on the latest result of the success or failure determination, and the order in which the dynamic display starts can be correctly determined. Therefore, the hold display modes can be rearranged in the order in which the dynamic display starts.

  The main control means for performing main control of the game, and the secondary control means for performing control of the game based on the secondary control signal from the main control means, the main control means is the first success or failure determination condition The second lottery game is executed based on the establishment of the second lottery condition based on the establishment of the first lottery game, and the sub-control unit is configured to execute the second lottery procedure based on the establishment of the second lottery condition; First display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating the result of determination of the success or failure of the first lottery game by the success / failure determination means of the main control means, in the order in which the first success / failure determination conditions are satisfied; The second display means is dynamically displayed with the second identification information indicating the success or failure judgment result of the second lottery game by the success or failure judgment means of the means in the order in which the second success or failure judgment condition is satisfied, and the first identification information The second display of the second identification information on the first display means And a display control unit capable of performing dynamic display control on each of the stages, and the judgment result of the judgment by the judgment unit becomes a hit, and the first or second display unit displays the first display unit by the display control unit. Alternatively, in the gaming machine to which a bonus game advantageous to the player is given when the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit, the main control means is based on the judgment result of the success or failure judgment means. Dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the first or second identification information at a predetermined dynamic display time, and the dynamic display determined by the dynamic display mode determining means In the case where the display mode signal generation means generates the display mode signal based on the mode and outputs it to the secondary control means, and either the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit If, on the other hand, the first or second identification information is being displayed dynamically, an interruption signal instructing interruption of the dynamic display is generated, while based on the completion of the bonus game based on that hit And management signal generation means for generating a restart signal for instructing restart of the interrupted dynamic display, and the display control means of the slave control means displays the display based on the reception of the display mode signal. The dynamic display mode indicated by the mode signal is displayed dynamically on the first or second display means, and the slave control means determines the time of the dynamic display based on the reception of the display mode signal. Based on the dynamic display time measuring means for measuring, the slave time managing means for interrupting the measurement of the dynamic display time measuring means based on the reception of the interruption signal, and the reception of the resume signal. Suspended dynamic display The remaining remaining dynamic display time is determined from the measurement time of the dynamic display time measuring means, and the remaining of the first or second identification information interrupted according to the remaining dynamic display time A following redisplay mode determination means for determining a dynamic redisplay mode which is a dynamic display mode to be displayed during the dynamic display time of the game machine H1.

  According to the gaming machine H1, the control of the game is executed by the slave control means in accordance with the slave control signal from the main control means for executing the main control of the game. In the main control means, on the basis of the establishment of the first success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment on the first lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Further, based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Further, in the secondary control means, the dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the success / failure determination of the first lottery game by the success / failure determination means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first success / failure determination conditions are satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the success or failure judgment result of the second lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second success / failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Here, the first identification information is a first display means, and the second identification information is a second display means, and can be dynamically displayed by the display control means. Then, when the judgment result of the judgment by the judgment unit becomes a hit, and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit by the display control unit, a bonus game which is advantageous to the player is awarded. . Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. Further, in the main control means, the dynamic display mode determination means determines a dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the first or second identification information in a predetermined dynamic display time. A display mode signal is generated by the display mode signal generating means based on the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means, and is output to the slave control means. Then, when one of the first and second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a collision, the other first or second identification information is dynamically displayed, if An interruption signal indicating interruption is generated by the management signal generating means. On the other hand, on the basis of the end of the bonus game based on the winning, a restart signal instructing restart of the interrupted dynamic display is generated by the management signal generation means. In the slave control means, on the basis of the reception of the display mode signal, the dynamic display mode indicated by the display mode signal is displayed on the first or second display means by the display control means. Based on the reception of the display mode signal from the main control means, the time of the dynamic display is measured by the dynamic display time measuring means. The measurement of the dynamic display time measuring means is interrupted by the slave time managing means based on the reception of the interruption signal from the main control means. On the other hand, based on the reception of the resumption signal from the main control means, the remaining dynamic display time of the suspended dynamic display mode is determined from the measurement time of the dynamic display time measurement means, and the remaining The dynamic display mode which is a dynamic display mode to be displayed at the remaining dynamic display time of the first or second identification information which has been interrupted according to the dynamic display time of Be done. Therefore, when the dynamic display of the first or second identification information interrupted during the bonus game is started, the dynamic re-display mode according to the remaining time is determined. The lottery result can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner in the dynamic redisplay mode according to the display time. Also, even if the main control means does not select the dynamic re-displaying mode according to the remaining dynamic display time and instructs the slave control means, the slave control means performs the dynamic re-reading according to the remaining dynamic display time. Since the display mode is determined, the control load on the main control means can be reduced. Therefore, even with the gaming machine that simultaneously executes the first lottery game and the second lottery game, it is possible to suppress the load increase of the main control means and perform various effects of the game.

  In the gaming machine of the gaming machine H1, when it is determined that the remaining dynamic display time is equal to or less than the reference time, the driven redisplay mode determination means is configured by the dynamic display time within the reference time. While determining the short dynamic redisplay aspect which is the dynamic redisplay aspect, the dynamic display time being longer than the reference time if it is determined that the remaining dynamic display time is longer than the reference time A game machine H2 characterized by determining a normal dynamic re-display mode which is the dynamic re-display mode configured by a display time.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the gaming machine H1, the following effects are exerted. That is, when it is determined by the secondary control means that the remaining dynamic display time is equal to or less than the reference time, the short dynamic redisplay mode is a dynamic redisplay mode configured with the dynamic display time within the reference time. The display mode is determined by the driven redisplay mode determining means. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining dynamic display time is longer than the reference time, the normal dynamic redisplay mode is determined by the driven redisplay determination means. Thus, it is possible to determine the dynamic redisplay mode in accordance with the remaining dynamic display time. Therefore, even when the remaining dynamic display time is short, by determining the dedicated dynamic re-display mode, it is possible to inform the determination result of the lottery game so that the player can easily understand.

  A gaming machine according to any one of gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, C1 to C5, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2, G1, H1 or H2, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine I1. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display device may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

  A gaming machine I2 according to any one of gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, C1 to C5, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2, G1, H1 or H2 characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine . Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

In any one of gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, C1 to C5, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2, G1, H1 or H2, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine A gaming machine I3 characterized by being. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.
<Others>
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when game balls enter a plurality of starting openings provided on the game board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and the dynamic display of the special symbol notifying the lottery result is It is executed on the display device. In such a configuration, the success or failure of the game is drawn individually corresponding to each starting opening, and the drawing result corresponds to each starting opening (for example, the first special for the two starting openings) After dynamically displaying the symbol and the second special symbol), the lottery result is notified. In this way, it has been proposed that a plurality of special symbols can be dynamically displayed at the same time.
For example, in Patent Document 1, when the game ball enters the first starting opening, the dynamic display of the first special symbol starts, and when the game ball enters the second starting opening, the second special symbol moves dynamically. Start the display. Therefore, when the game ball enters the starting opening corresponding to the other special symbol while either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed dynamically, the first special symbol and the second special symbol Both will be in the state of displaying dynamically at the same time. Then, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped in the display mode informing the big hit, it shifts to the big hit game.
In addition, when the game ball enters the first starting opening during the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the upper limit number of rights to dynamically display the first special symbol after the end of the dynamic display in progress (for example, 4) is stored as a holding ball. Similarly, when the game ball enters the second starting opening during the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the right to dynamically display the second special symbol after the end of the dynamic display in progress is the upper limit number ( For example, up to 4) is stored as a holding ball (e.g., Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-319221).
By the way, in the gaming machine where dynamic display can be simultaneously performed by the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is difficult to make the game ball enter the first start opening and the second start opening equally, and it is difficult It is biased to enter the ball to one starting opening, and in order to store the holding balls in both starting openings up to the upper limit number, an overflow where the game balls above the upper limit number enters at one starting opening tends to occur There was a problem of that. When an overflow occurs, a winning lottery or dynamic indication for the overflowed ball is not made, which is disadvantageous to the player.
The present technical idea aims to provide a gaming machine capable of making a game ball equally play in a plurality of starting openings and suppressing the occurrence of overflow in a gaming machine which dynamically displays a plurality of special symbols simultaneously. I assume.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 executes a first lottery game on the basis of the establishment of the first condition, the second lottery on the basis of the formation of the second condition. The first identification information indicating the success / failure determination means for executing the success / failure determination of the lottery game and the first lottery game determination result by the success / failure determination means is dynamically displayed in the order in which the first success / failure determination condition is satisfied. First display means, and second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating a result of determination of success or failure of the second lottery game by the success or failure determination means, in order of establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition; Display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of first identification information on the first display means and display control of the second identification information on the second display means, and a result of the pass / fail judgment by the pass / fail judgment means , By the display control means It has a bonus game execution means for giving a bonus game which is advantageous to the player when the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit on the first or second display means. Condition distribution means for assisting alternately establishing the first success / failure determination condition and the second success / failure determination condition, and the first or second success / failure determination condition assisted by the condition distribution means And hold storage means for storing as the right to play the first or second lottery game up to a predetermined upper limit number of times.
In the gaming machine according to the technical idea 2, in the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, a game area and a game ball flowing down the game area enter to establish the first success or failure judgment condition. (1) A starting opening, and a second starting opening in which the second hit / failing determination condition is satisfied by the game ball flowing down the game area entering, and the condition distributing means includes the first starting. It has a game ball guidance part which assists a game ball entering a mouth and said 2nd starting mouth alternately.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 2, wherein the condition distributing means includes a ball entry port through which game balls flowing down the game area can enter and a ball entry port thereof. A first guiding path for guiding the ball having a ball to the first starting opening through the gaming ball guiding portion, and a second guiding path for guiding the game ball to the second starting opening through the gaming ball guiding portion And the gaming ball guiding portion receives the gaming ball having entered the ball from the ball entry port, rotates the first direction to a predetermined angle, and guides the gaming ball to the first guiding path. Next, the gaming ball having entered the ball from the ball entry port is received in a state of being rotated in the first direction, and is rotated to a predetermined angle in a second direction opposite to the first direction. 2 is to guide the game ball to the induction route.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 3, wherein the gaming ball guiding portion of the condition distributing means is rotated to a predetermined angle in the first direction to the ball entrance. A first passive part disposed at a position facing the entering game ball, receiving the entering game ball and rotating to the second direction to a predetermined angle, and rotating to the second direction to the predetermined angle If so, the second passive unit is disposed at a position facing the gaming ball entered into the entrance, and receives the gaming sphere entered and rotates to a predetermined angle, and the first passive unit After receiving the game ball entered from the ball entrance and rotating in the second direction, it prevents the game ball from pivoting in the first direction before entering the ball entrance next. Or, after the second passive part receives the game ball entered from the ball entrance and rotates in the first direction, Before technique ball to ball entrance to the entering ball port, and a, and a rotation restricting portion which prevents the pivoting in the second direction.
In the gaming machine according to the technical idea 5, in the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, the game area and the game ball flowing down the game area enter to establish the first or second judgment condition. The condition distribution means alternately controls the first and second determination conditions and the second determination condition every time the game ball enters the common start aperture. Is established.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the success / failure determination means of the first lottery game is executed based on the establishment of the first success / failure determination condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second success or failure judgment condition, the success or failure judgment of the second lottery game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. The dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the success or failure judgment of the first lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first success or failure judgment conditions are satisfied. Further, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the success or failure judgment result of the second lottery game by the success or failure judgment means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second success / failure judgment conditions are satisfied.
Here, the first identification information is a first display means, and the second identification information is a second display means, and can be dynamically displayed by the display control means. And, when the result of judgment of success or failure by the success or failure judgment means becomes a hit and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing a hit by the display control means, a bonus game which is advantageous to the player is executed. It is carried out by means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently.
It is assisted by the condition distributing means that the first and second judgment conditions are satisfied alternately. The right to perform the first or second lottery game up to a predetermined upper limit number is stored by the hold storage means when the first or second validity determination conditions are satisfied, assisted by the condition distribution means.
As a result, the first success or failure judgment condition and the second success or failure judgment condition are easily met equally, and the right to play the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be stored uniformly, and the first lottery game is played. It is possible to prevent any one of the right and the right to play the second lottery game from being biased and being stored earlier up to the upper limit number. Therefore, to store the right to perform the first lottery game and the second lottery game up to the upper limit number respectively, it is possible to suppress the problem that the right more than the upper limit number is generated in either one and becomes invalid. It has the effect of being able to
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effect is exerted. That is, when the game ball flowing down the game area enters the first starting opening, the first hit determination condition is satisfied, while when the game ball enters the second starting opening, the second hit determination condition is satisfied. Ru. It is assisted by the game ball guiding portion of the condition distributing means that the game balls alternately enter the first starting opening and the second starting opening.
As a result, the player can easily cause the game ball to alternately enter the first starting port and the second starting port by causing the game ball to flow down to the game area, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game Can be performed efficiently, so that many lottery games can be performed in a short time.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the following effect is exerted. That is, the gaming ball entered from the entrance of the condition distributing means is rotated by a predetermined angle in the first direction to the first starting opening through the first guiding path to the gaming ball by the gaming ball guiding portion After being guided, the game ball entered from the ball entry next is received while being rotated to a predetermined angle in the first direction, and is rotated at a predetermined angle in a second direction opposite to the first direction. The gaming ball is guided by the gaming ball guiding portion to the second starting opening through the second guiding path.
Thereby, it becomes possible to distribute and guide game balls alternately to the first starting opening and the second starting opening using a common member, and a member for distributing to the first starting opening and the second starting opening respectively Compared to the case of providing the game ball, the structure for distributing the game balls can be made compact.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, the following effect is exerted. That is, the first passive portion of the gaming ball guiding portion is disposed at a position facing the gaming ball having entered the ball entrance with the gaming ball guiding portion of the condition distributing means being rotated to a predetermined angle in the first direction. When the first passive portion receives the entered game ball, it is rotated in the second direction to a predetermined angle. Further, the second passive part of the gaming ball guiding part is disposed at a position facing the gaming ball having entered the ball entrance with the gaming ball guiding part of the condition distributing means being rotated to a predetermined angle in the second direction. When the second passive portion receives the entered game ball, the game ball is rotated in the first direction to a predetermined angle.
After the first passive part receives the game ball entered from the ball entrance and rotates in the second direction, it may then rotate in the first direction before the game ball enters the ball entrance. Or, after the second passive part receives the game ball having entered the ball from the ball entrance and is rotated in the first direction, it is then rotated in the second direction before the game ball enters the ball inlet. This is prevented by the rotation restricting portion.
Thus, after the gaming ball guiding portion is rotated to guide the gaming ball to one of the guiding paths, the next gaming ball is rotated in the other direction before entering the ball, and then the ball is entered next. A game ball can also be prevented from having a problem that it is guided to the same route as the game ball entered in front of the game ball. Therefore, it becomes possible to guide the game ball entering the ball entrance to the first starting opening and the second starting opening more accurately alternately, and the right to carry out the first lottery game and the second lottery game is equalized. The effect is that it can be stored in
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, the following effect is exerted in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1. That is, each time the game ball flowing down the game area enters the common starting opening, establishment of the first and second judgment conditions is alternately distributed by the condition distributing means in a controlled manner. As a result, the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be alternately performed with the common starting port, and there is an effect that the game area can be configured compactly.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
8 1 3 symbol display device (Viewing means)
S405 first determination means
S 715 Second judging means
S901 first acquisition means
S906 first storage means
S 908 second acquisition means
S 913 second storage means
S923 order discrimination means
S1406 Display mode change means

Claims (5)

Eligibility determining means that executes the determination of the first lottery game based on the establishment of the first determination criteria, and executes the determination of the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second determination criteria,
First display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating the result of determination of the success or failure of the first lottery game by the success / failure determination means, in the order in which the first success / failure determination condition is established;
Second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating a result of determination of the success or failure of the second lottery game by the success or failure determination means, in order of establishment of the second success or failure determination condition;
Display control means capable of performing dynamic display control of the first identification information on the first display means and the second identification information on the second display means;
The player is determined to be in a display mode in which the first or second identification information indicates a hit on the first or second display means by the success or failure judgment result by the success or failure judgment means being a hit. Gaming machine having a bonus game execution means for giving a bonus game which is advantageous to
Condition distributing means for assisting the first and second judgment conditions to be alternately established;
Hold storage means for storing as the right to play the first or second lottery game up to a predetermined upper limit number of times when the first or second success or failure judgment condition is satisfied, assisted by the condition distribution means A gaming machine characterized by having The game area,
A first start-up opening, which is satisfied with the first success or failure judgment condition, when the game ball flowing down the game area enters the ball;
The game ball which flows down the game area has a second start-up opening, which is satisfied by the second judgment condition, when the ball enters the ball,
The said condition distribution means has a game ball induction | guidance | derivation part which assists that a game ball alternately enters into the said 1st starting opening and the said 2nd starting opening, It is characterized by the above-mentioned. Of gaming machines. The condition distribution unit is
A ball entry port through which game balls flowing down the game area can enter;
The first guiding path for guiding the gaming ball having entered the ball entrance to the first starting opening via the gaming ball guiding section, and the second starting opening via the gaming ball guiding section And a second induction path for guiding
The gaming ball guiding portion receives the gaming ball having entered the ball from the ball entry and rotates it to a predetermined angle in a first direction to guide the gaming ball to the first guiding path, and then the ball is entered next. The game ball entered from the mouth is received in a state of being rotated in the first direction, and is rotated to a predetermined angle in a second direction opposite to the first direction to play the game into the second guideway The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the game machine guides a ball. The game ball guiding unit of the condition distributing means is
In a state where it is rotated to a predetermined angle in the first direction, it is disposed at a position facing the gaming ball that has entered the ball entry port, receives the gaming ball that has entered the ball, and has a predetermined angle in the second direction. A rotating first passive part,
When the game machine is rotated to a predetermined angle in the second direction, the game machine is disposed at a position facing the gaming ball that has entered the ball entry hole, and rotates to a predetermined angle upon receiving the entered game ball. The passive part,
After the first passive part receives the game ball having entered the ball from the ball entry port and rotates in the second direction, then before the game ball enters the ball entry port in the first direction, After the game ball is rotated in the first direction after receiving the gaming ball which the second passive part has entered from the ball entry port, preventing the pivoting, then the game ball enters the ball entry port. The gaming machine according to claim 3, further comprising: a rotation restricting portion that prevents rotation in the second direction before the movement. The game area,
The game ball flowing down the game area enters the ball, and has a common start opening that satisfies the first or second judgment condition.
The condition distributing means is characterized in that the first success or failure judgment condition and the second success or failure judgment condition are satisfied alternately in a controlled manner each time the game ball enters the common starting opening. The gaming machine according to claim 1.

Images